在《相应部》中显示巴利原文
Saṃyuttanikāye
《因缘品》的注疏显示巴利原文
Nidānavagga-aṭṭhakathā
1. 因缘相应显示巴利原文
1. Nidānasaṃyuttaṃ
1. 佛陀品显示巴利原文
1. Buddhavaggo
1. 对《缘起经》的解释显示巴利原文
1. Paṭiccasamuppādasuttavaṇṇanā
1 「如是我闻」(Evaṃ me sutaṃ):这是《因缘品》中的第一部经,即《缘起经》。以下是对这部经的逐词解释:经文说「在那里,世尊对比丘们说」(tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesi),这里的「在那里」(tatra) 是在说明地点和时间。因为它表明:“在他安住的时刻,在那个时间;在他所安住的祇园,在那里。”或者说,它指示适合说法的地点和时间。因为世尊不会在不适当的地点、不适当的时间说法。例如《优陀那》中的“婆醯耶!现在还不是时候……”(Udāna 10) 就是这里的证明。
「kho」是一个虚词,只起填补音节的作用,或者表示确定、起始时间等含义。
「世尊」(bhagavā):是显示他是世间所敬重的称呼。
「比丘们」(bhikkhū):是指那些适合听闻教法的人。此外,这里「比丘」一词的含义,应该根据《波罗夷》45和《分别》510中的解释来理解:“因为以乞食为生,所以称为比丘;或已奉行乞食行,所以称为比丘”等等。
「说」(āmantesi):就是呼唤、讲话、使觉知,在这里是这个意思。但在其他地方,这个词也有“告知”的意思,例如:“比丘们!我告知你们,比丘们!我向你们宣说。”它也有“召唤”的意思,例如:“来吧,比丘!你替我传话,叫舍利弗来。”(《增支部》9.11)
「比丘们」(bhikkhavo) 是用呼格来表达呼唤的方式。之所以用这个称呼,是因为比丘们成就了以乞食为生的戒行等功德。通晓语言的人认为:如果一个人具足以乞食为生的戒行功德,他就是「比丘」;或者具足依乞食而行的法性功德,他也是「比丘」;或者他在乞食方面做得很好,他同样可以被称为「比丘」。
世尊用这个表明他们具足乞食戒行等功德的称呼,揭示他们为高低各色人等所追随的生活方式,以此来制止他们心中可能生起的浮躁或消沉。
而「比丘们」这一称呼,承载着世尊的悲悯、柔和的心,以及先以目光注视他们的亲切,这样称呼让他们面向他,既表达了他想说法的愿望,也激起了他们闻法的兴趣;同时,由于「唤醒」的意义,也促使他们如理作意。因为教法的成就,正有赖于如理作意。显示巴利原文
1.Evaṃme sutanti – nidānavagge paṭhamaṃ paṭiccasamuppādasuttaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ anupubbapadavaṇṇanā – tatra kho bhagavā bhikkhū āmantesīti, ettha tatrāti desakālaparidīpanaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘yaṃ samayaṃ viharati, tatra samaye, yasmiñca jetavane viharati, tatra jetavane’’ti dīpeti. Bhāsitabbayutte vā desakāle dīpeti. Na hi bhagavā ayutte dese kāle ca dhammaṃ bhāsati. ‘‘Akālo kho tāva bāhiyā’’tiādi (udā. 10) cettha sādhakaṃ. Khoti padapūraṇamatte, avadhāraṇe ādikālatthe vā nipāto. Bhagavāti lokagarudīpanaṃ. Bhikkhūti kathāsavanayuttapuggalavacanaṃ. Apicettha ‘‘bhikkhakoti bhikkhu, bhikkhācariyaṃ ajjhūpagatoti bhikkhū’’tiādinā (pārā. 45; vibha. 510) nayena vacanattho veditabbo. Āmantesīti ālapi, abhāsi, sambodhesi, ayamettha attho. Aññatra pana ñāpanepi hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘āmantayāmi vo, bhikkhave, paṭivedayāmi vo, bhikkhave’’ti. Pakkosanepi. Yathāha – ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, mama vacanena sāriputtaṃ āmantehī’’ti (a. ni. 9.11). Bhikkhavoti āmantanākāradīpanaṃ. Tañca bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhattā vuttaṃ. Bhikkhanasīlatāguṇayuttopi hi bhikkhu, bhikkhanadhammatāguṇayuttopi bhikkhane sādhukāritāguṇayuttopīti saddavidū maññanti. Tena ca tesaṃ bhikkhanasīlatādiguṇayogasiddhena vacanena hīnādhikajanasevitavuttiṃ pakāsento uddhatadīnabhāvaniggahaṃ karoti. ‘‘Bhikkhavo’’ti iminā ca karuṇāvipphārasommahadayanayananipātapubbaṅgamena vacanena te attano abhimukhe karonto teneva kathetukamyatādīpakena nesaṃ vacanena sotukamyataṃ janeti, teneva ca sambodhanatthena sādhukaṃ manasikārepi niyojeti. Sādhukaṃ manasikārāyattā hi sāsanasampatti.
若问:“当时也有其他天、人在场,世尊为何唯对比丘说?”回答是:因为他们地位最高、最为尊胜、离世尊最近、常随侍左右。世尊的说法虽然普被一切大众,但在大众中,比丘地位最高——因为他们最早出现于世;最为尊胜——因为他们以出家为本,随学于师,且堪受全部教法;离世尊最近——于座中近侍世尊;常随侍左右——因为他们总是住于世尊附近。再者,比丘是最当机的法器,能依所教如实修行。而此次开示,亦特别针对某些比丘而说。因此,世尊这样招呼他们。显示巴利原文
Aparesupi devamanussesu vijjamānesu kasmā bhikkhūyeva āmantesīti ce? Jeṭṭhaseṭṭhāsannasadāsannihitabhāvato. Sabbaparisasādhāraṇā hi bhagavato dhammadesanā, parisāya jeṭṭhā bhikkhū paṭhamaṃ uppannattā, seṭṭhā anagāriyabhāvaṃ ādiṃ katvā satthucariyānuvidhāyakattā sakalasāsanapaṭiggāhakattā ca, āsannā tattha nisinnesu satthusantikattā, sadāsannihitā satthusantikāvacarattāti. Apica te dhammadesanāya bhājanaṃ yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipattisabbhāvato. Visesato ca ekacce bhikkhūyeva sandhāya ayaṃ desanāpīti evaṃ āmantesi.
问:世尊将说法时,为何先招呼比丘,而不直接说法?这是为了令他们提起正念。比丘们坐着的时候,有的可能心念他事,有的可能心意散乱,有的可能在思惟法义,也有的可能在对自己所修的业处作意。若不先招呼而直接说法,他们可能不会留意:“此开示以何为因?以何为缘?由何事而起?”或会误解其义,或全然不记。因此,世尊为令他们提起正念,先招呼他们,而后说法。显示巴利原文
Kimatthaṃ pana bhagavā dhammaṃ desento paṭhamaṃ bhikkhū āmantesi, na dhammameva desesīti? Satijananatthaṃ. Bhikkhū aññaṃ cintentāpi vikkhittacittāpi dhammaṃ paccavekkhantāpi kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontāpi nisinnā honti. Te anāmantetvā dhamme desiyamāne ‘‘ayaṃ desanā kiṃnidānā kiṃpaccayā katamāya aṭṭhuppattiyā desitā’’ti sallakkhetuṃ asakkontā duggahitaṃ vā gaṇheyyuṃ, na vā gaṇheyyuṃ, tena nesaṃ satijananatthaṃ bhagavā paṭhamaṃ āmantetvā pacchā dhammaṃ deseti.
“尊者”——这是表达恭敬的称呼,也是对世尊的回应。在此处,世尊以“比丘们!”招呼比丘,比丘们则以“尊者!”回应世尊。正如“比丘们!”是世尊的呼唤,“尊者!”是比丘们的应和。“比丘们!”是令他们应答,“尊者!”即是他们所作的回应。所谓“那些比丘”,即指被世尊招呼的比丘。“回应世尊”,即指他们对世尊的招呼作出回应,也就是当面谛听、领受、纳受的意思。“世尊这样说”,即世尊说出这整部应当宣说的经典。至此,具寿阿难为使此经——具足义理与文句、彰显诸佛说法智慧甚深之义的经典——易于理解而宣说的序分已告圆满。此序分具足时、处、说法者、众会及处所的庄严,其义理之解释亦已圆满。显示巴利原文
Bhadanteti gāravavacanametaṃ, satthuno paṭivacanadānaṃ vā. Apicettha ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti vadamāno bhagavā bhikkhū ālapati. ‘‘Bhadante’’ti vadamānā te bhagavantaṃ paccālapanti. Tathā hi ‘‘bhikkhavo’’ti bhagavā ābhāsati, ‘‘bhadante’’ti paccābhāsanti. ‘‘Bhikkhavo’’ti paṭivacanaṃ dāpeti, ‘‘bhadante’’ti paṭivacanaṃ denti. Te bhikkhūti ye bhagavā āmantesi, te. Bhagavato paccassosunti bhagavato āmantanaṃ patiassosuṃ, abhimukhā hutvā suṇiṃsu sampaṭicchiṃsu paṭiggahesunti attho. Bhagavā etadavocāti, bhagavā etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ sakalasuttaṃ avoca. Ettāvatā yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇagambhīrabhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagāhaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakaparisāpadesappaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassa atthavaṇṇanā samattā.
现在已到了时机,应以“缘起……我将为你们说”等开示方式,来注释世尊所安立的这部经。然此经的注释,须先审察经的安立方式而后解说明白,因此我们先来审察经的安立方式。经的安立方式有四种:自发意乐、随顺他意、随问而说、因事而说。其中,有些经是世尊未待他人祈请,纯粹出于自发意乐而宣说的,例如:拥有十力教说的经,拥有月喻、琵琶喻、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八圣道支等教说的经。对于这些经,“自发意乐”便是其安立方式。显示巴利原文
Idāni paṭiccasamuppādaṃ votiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa saṃvaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicāressāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti. Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti, seyyathidaṃ – dasabalasuttantahārako candopama-vīṇopama-sammappadhāna-iddhipāda-indriyabala-bojjhaṅgamaggaṅga-suttantahārakoti evamādīni, tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
然而,有些经是世尊观察了他人内心的意乐、堪忍、审察能力、心的志向以及觉悟之性后,随顺他人的意乐而宣说的,例如《小罗睺罗教诫经》、《大罗睺罗教诫经》、《转法轮经》、《无我相经》、《蛇喻经》、《界分别经》等等。这些经的安立方式便是“随顺他意”。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācanīyā dhammā. Yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.121; ma. ni. 3.416) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ nijjhānakkhamaṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca apekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, anattalakkhaṇasuttaṃ, āsīvisopamasuttaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti, evamādīni, tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
再者,四众弟子、四种种姓、龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天等诸天,乃至大梵天等,他们来到世尊前请问:“世尊,所谓觉支、觉支;所谓盖、盖——这些是否就是五取蕴?世间最上的财富是什么?”如这些等。当世尊被这样问及时,所宣说的《觉支相应》等经典,以及其他如《天相应》、《魔相应》、《梵天相应》、《帝释问经》、《小吠陀罗经》、《大吠陀罗经》、《沙门果经》、《旷野夜叉经》、《针毛夜叉经》、《粗毛夜叉经》等,这些经典的安立方式即是“随问而说”。显示巴利原文
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā cattāro vaṇṇā nāgā supaṇṇā gandhabbā asurā yakkhā mahārājāno tāvatiṃsādayo devā mahābrahmāti evamādayo ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgāti, bhante, vuccanti – (saṃ. ni. 5.202) nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇāti, bhante, vuccanti – ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā, kiṃsūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 183) nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni, yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta, mārasaṃyutta, brahmasaṃyutta, sakkapañha, cūḷavedalla, mahāvedalla, sāmaññaphalaāḷavaka, sūciloma, kharalomasuttādīni, tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
还有些经典是因某个因缘生起才被宣说的,例如《法嗣经》、《小狮子吼经》、《子肉喻经》、《木桩喻经》、《火堆喻经》、《泡沫喻经》、《波利质多罗树喻经》等。这些经典的安立方式便是“因事而说”。显示巴利原文
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ. Cūḷasīhanādasuttaṃ puttamaṃsūpamaṃ dārukkhandhūpamaṃ aggikkhandhūpamaṃ pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni, tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
如此,在这四种安立方式之中,这部《缘起经》的安立方式为“随顺他人意向”。因为此经是世尊随顺其他人的意向而安立的。随顺哪些人的意向呢?随顺顿悟者的意向。有四种人:顿悟者、广说悟者、可引导者、文句最胜者。其中,那种在宣说当下便能证悟佛法的人,称为顿悟者。那种听闻简要说法之后,于法义被详细解析时证悟佛法的人,称为广说悟者。那种必须通过闻法、提问、如理作意,亲近、承事、奉侍善知识,次第证悟佛法的人,称为可引导者。那种虽然多闻、多持诵、多读诵,却无法在这一生证悟佛法的人,称为文句最胜者。在这四种人当中,世尊正是随顺这些顿悟者的意向,而安立了此经。显示巴利原文
Evametesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa paṭiccasamuppādasuttassa parajjhāsayo nikkhepo. Parapuggalajjhāsayavasena hidaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katamesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasenāti? Ugghaṭitaññūnaṃ. Cattāro hi puggalā ugghaṭitaññū vipañcitaññū neyyo padaparamoti. Tattha yassa puggalassa saha udāhaṭavelāya dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo ugghaṭitaññū. Yassa puggalassa saṃkhittena bhāsitassa vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo vipañcitaññū. Yassa puggalassa uddesato paripucchato yoniso manasikaroto, kalyāṇamitte sevato, bhajato, payirupāsato, anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo neyyo. Yassa puggalassa bahumpi suṇato, bahumpi dhārayato, bahumpi vācayato na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hoti, ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamo. Iti imesu catūsu puggalesu ugghaṭitaññūpuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena idaṃ suttaṃ nikkhittaṃ.
据说,当时有五百位住于乡间的比丘,他们或一人独行,或二人、三人、四人、五人结伴,行持相同,受持头陀支,精进策励,专注修习止观,修习观。他们渴望微细、微妙、空性的缘起教示。傍晚时分,他们来到世尊跟前,顶礼之后,犹如被一张红色羊毛毯所围绕一般,怀着对教法的期盼,围坐于世尊身旁。世尊便随顺他们的意向,开始宣说此经。正如一位善巧的画师,如果得到一面未经处理的墙壁,不会即刻画上图案,而是先用大量黏土等做好壁面处理;壁面处理妥当之后,才在上面作画。然而,如果得到的是一面已经处理好的墙壁,他便不再做壁面处理的工作,而是调和好各种颜色,提起墨线笔或画笔,直接开始描绘图案。同理,世尊若遇到一个尚未做好修行准备、初入道的善男子,不会一开始就为他开示那邻近阿拉汉果的、微细、微妙、空性的观之特征,而是会先教导他具足戒、定、业所成慧的正见等前行道路。正如这样说的:显示巴利原文
Tadā kira pañcasatā janapadavāsikā bhikkhū sabbeva ekacarā dvicarā ticarā catucarā pañcacarā sabhāgavuttino dhutaṅgadharā āraddhavīriyā yuttayogā vipassakā saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ paccayākāradesanaṃ patthayamānā sāyanhasamaye bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā, vanditvā, rattakambalasāṇiyā parikkhipamānā viya desanaṃ paccāsīsamānā parivāretvā nisīdiṃsu. Tesaṃ ajjhāsayavasena bhagavā idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi. Yathā hi cheko cittakāro aparikammakatabhittiṃ labhitvā, na āditova rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpesi, mahāmattikalepādīhi pana bhittiparikammaṃ tāva katvā , kataparikammāya bhittiyā rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, kataparikammaṃ pana bhittiṃ labhitvā, bhittiparikammabyāpāraṃ akatvā, raṅgajātāni yojetvā, vaṭṭikaṃ vā tūlikaṃ vā ādāya rūpameva samuṭṭhāpeti, evameva bhagavā akatābhinivesaṃ ādikammikakulaputtaṃ labhitvā nāssa āditova arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati, sīlasamādhikammassakatādiṭṭhisampadāya pana yojento pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ tāva ācikkhati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
「因此,比丘!你应当从最初便净化善法。什么是善法的开端?即是极为清净的戒与正直的见。比丘!当你具足极为清净的戒与正直的见时,你便依于戒、安住于戒,以三种方式修习四念处。哪四种呢?比丘!你当于内身随观身而住,精勤、正知、具念,除去对世间的贪欲与忧恼;或于外身随观身……乃至……或于内外身随观身。于诸法中,随观诸法而住,精勤、正知、具念,除去对世间的贪欲与忧恼。比丘!当你依于戒、安住于戒,如此以三种方式修习这四念处时,那么,比丘!此后无论黑夜还是白昼,你所期许的,唯有善法的增长,而非退减。」显示巴利原文
‘‘Tasmātiha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, ādimeva visodhehi kusalesu dhammesu. Ko cādi kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ? Sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ diṭṭhi ca ujukā. Yato kho te, bhikkhu, sīlañca suvisuddhaṃ bhavissati diṭṭhi ca ujukā. Tato tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya cattāro satipaṭṭhāne tividhena bhāveyyāsi. Katame cattāro? Idha tvaṃ, bhikkhu, ajjhattaṃ vā kāye kāyānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Bahiddhā vā kāye…pe… ajjhattabahiddhā vā kāye…pe… dhammesu dhammānupassī viharāhi ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Yato kho tvaṃ, bhikkhu, sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne evaṃ tividhena bhāvessasi, tato tuyhaṃ, bhikkhu, yā ratti vā divaso vā āgamissati, vuddhiyeva pāṭikaṅkhā kusalesu dhammesu, no parihānī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.369).
如是,对于初入道的善男子,先以戒论作为预修之后,才开示那邻近阿拉汉果的、微细、微妙、空性的观相。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ ādikammikakulaputtassa sīlakathāya parikammaṃ kathetvā, arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati.
然而,若遇到戒行清净、已发精进、专修观行者,他便不再为其开示前方便道,而是直接开示作为阿拉汉果近因的、微细、微妙、空性的观相。这五百位比丘已然清净前方便道而安住,犹如精炼的黄金,又似层层打磨的宝石堆,唯缺一种出世间道尚未生起。如是,为使此道生起,大师观察他们的意乐,遂开始宣说此经。显示巴利原文
Parisuddhasīlaṃ pana āraddhavīriyaṃ yuttayogaṃ vipassakaṃ labhitvā, nāssa pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ ācikkhati, ujukameva pana arahattapadaṭṭhānaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ suññataṃ vipassanālakkhaṇaṃ ācikkhati. Ime pañcasatā bhikkhū pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ parisodhetvā ṭhitā sudhantasuvaṇṇasadisā suparimajjitamaṇikkhandhasannibhā, eko lokuttaramaggova nesaṃ anāgato. Iti tassāgamanatthāya satthā tesaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ apekkhamāno idaṃ suttaṃ ārabhi.
在此,“缘起”即指缘相。缘相即令诸法相互依缘、和合而生起,故称为“缘起”。这是此处的简要解说,详细解释应取自《清净道论》。显示巴利原文
Tattha paṭiccasamuppādanti paccayākāraṃ. Paccayākāro hi aññamaññaṃ paṭicca sahite dhamme uppādeti. Tasmā paṭiccasamuppādoti vuccati. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggato gahetabbo.
“vo”一词见于反身、目的格、作具格、与格、属格及填充词等用法中。例如,在“Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā sammodamānā?(阿那律们!你们是否和合、欢喜?)”(《中部》1.326;《大品》466)等句中,是反身用法。在“Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo(去吧,比丘们!我送别你们)”(《中部》2.157)等句中,是目的格。在“Na vo mama santike vatthabba(你们不可住在我这里)”等句中,是作具格。在“Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi(比丘们!我将为你们讲述林薮法门)”(《中部》1.190)等句中,是与格。在“Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita(舍利弗!你们的一切所说都是善说)”(《中部》1.345)等句中,是属格。在“Ye hi vo ariyā parisudd...”等句中,是……显示巴利原文
Voti ayaṃ vo-saddo paccatta-upayogakaraṇa-sampadāna-sāmivacana-padapūraṇesu dissati. ‘‘Kacci pana vo anuruddhā samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.326; mahāva. 466) hi paccatte dissati. ‘‘Gacchatha, bhikkhave, paṇāmemi vo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) upayoge. ‘‘Na vo mama santike vatthabba’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.157) karaṇe. ‘‘Vanapatthapariyāyaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.190) sampadāne. ‘‘Sabbesaṃ vo, sāriputta, subhāsita’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.345) sāmivacane. ‘‘Ye hi vo ariyā parisuddhakāyakammantā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.35) padapūraṇamatte. Idha panāyaṃ sampadāne daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhaveti patissavena abhimukhībhūtānaṃ puna ālapanaṃ. Desessāmīti desanāpaṭijānanaṃ. Taṃ suṇāthāti taṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ taṃ desanaṃ mayā vuccamānaṃ suṇātha.
在“善加作意”一句中,“善加”与“善哉”同义。而“善哉”一词,用于请求、接受、随喜、美好、坚固等义。例如,在“Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetu(善哉!尊者!愿世尊为我简略说法)”(《增支部》4.257;《相应部》4.65;5.381)等句中,是请求。在“Sādhu, bhante’ti kho so bhikkhu...(‘善哉!尊者!’那位比丘欢喜信受世尊的教说后……)”(《中部》3.86)等句中,是接受。在“Sādhu sādhu, sāriputta(善哉,善哉,舍利弗)”(《长部》3.349)等句中,是随喜。显示巴利原文
Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti ettha pana sādhukaṃ sādhūti ekatthametaṃ. Ayañca sādhusaddo āyācana-sampaṭicchana-sampahaṃsana-sundara-daḷhīkammādīsu dissati. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṃkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.257; saṃ. ni. 4.65; 5.381) hi āyācane dissati. ‘‘Sādhu, bhanteti kho so bhikkhu bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.86) sampaṭicchane. ‘‘Sādhu sādhu, sāriputtā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.349) sampahaṃsane.
善哉!乐法之国王,善哉!具智慧之人;
善哉,不欺朋友者;不作恶,是为乐。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sādhu dhammarucī rājā, sādhu paññāṇavā naro; Sādhu mittānamaddubbho, pāpassa akaraṇaṃ sukha’’nti. –
于类似文句(《本生经》2.18.101)中,‘sādhu’表美好义。于‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhi(婆罗门,请善加谛听)’(《增支部》5.192)等处,‘善加’一词即表示坚固与命令之义。此处,当知正是取其坚固义与命令义,亦通于美好义。即以坚固义:‘请坚固地聆听此法,善加执持’;以命令义:‘遵从吾命而听’;以美好义:‘请听此妙法’。如是阐明。‘作意’(manasi karotha)是转向、注意,意为令心等持。心不散乱地听闻,并置于心中,即是此中用意。显示巴利原文
Ādīsu (jā. 2.18.101) sundare. ‘‘Tena hi, brāhmaṇa, sādhukaṃ suṇāhī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.192) sādhukasaddoyeva daḷhīkamme āṇattiyantipi vuccati. Idha panāyaṃ ettheva daḷhīkamme āṇattiyā ca attho veditabbo, sundaratthepi vaṭṭati. Daḷhīkaraṇatthena hi ‘‘daḷhaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātha, suggahitaṃ gaṇhantā’’, āṇattiatthena ‘‘mama āṇattiyā suṇātha’’ sundaratthena ‘‘sundaramimaṃ bhaddakaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāthā’’ti etaṃ dīpitaṃ hoti. Manasi karothāti āvajjetha. Samannāharathāti attho. Avikkhittacittā hutvā nisāmetha, citte karothāti adhippāyo.
在此,「汝等谛听」(taṃ suṇātha)一句,是为了遮止耳根的散乱;而「善加作意」(sādhukaṃ manasi karotha)一句,则是通过令作意坚固,来遮止意根的散乱。其中,前者防止在执取文句上出现颠倒,后者防止在执取义理上出现颠倒。前者策励闻法,后者策励对已闻之法加以摄持与审察。再者,前者表明:此法具备严整的文句,故值得听闻;后者表明:此法具备真实的义理,故应当作意。或者,也可以将「善加」一词通于前后两句,如此理解其中的关联:正因为此法既是法义甚深,也是教说甚深,所以汝等应当谛听、善加作意;又因其义理甚深、体证甚深,故应善加作意。「我将说」(bhāsissāmi),意为“我将开示”。在“汝等谛听”这句中,所应允的并非仅仅是略说而已,我还会将其详细开演,故而这样说。因为这些语句正是表示略说与广说的用语。正如鹏耆舍长老所说:显示巴利原文
Idānettha taṃ suṇāthāti sotindriyavikkhepanivāraṇametaṃ. Sādhukaṃ manasi karothāti manasikāre daḷhīkammaniyojanena manindriyavikkhepanivāraṇaṃ. Purimañcettha byañjanavipallāsagāhanivāraṇaṃ, pacchimaṃ atthavipallāsagāhanivāraṇaṃ. Purimena ca dhammassavane niyojeti, pacchimena sutānaṃ dhammānaṃ dhāraṇūpaparikkhāsu. Purimena ca ‘‘sabyañjano ayaṃ dhammo, tasmā savanīyo’’ti dīpeti, pacchimena ‘‘sāttho, tasmā manasi kātabbo’’ti. Sādhukapadaṃ vā ubhayapadehi yojetvā, ‘‘yasmā ayaṃ dhammo dhammagambhīro ca desanāgambhīro ca, tasmā suṇātha sādhukaṃ. Yasmā atthagambhīro ca paṭivedhagambhīro ca, tasmā sādhukaṃ manasi karothā’’ti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Bhāsissāmīti desessāmi. ‘‘Taṃ suṇāthā’’ti ettha paṭiññātaṃ desanaṃ saṃkhittatova na desessāmi, apica kho vitthāratopi naṃ bhāsissāmīti vuttaṃ hoti. Saṅkhepavitthāravācakāni hi etāni padāni. Yathāha vaṅgīsatthero –
略说亦开示,广说亦演说;
音声如鹎鸟,显发其辩才。(《相应部》1.214;《长老偈》1241)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saṃkhittenapi deseti, vitthārenapi bhāsati; Sāḷikāyiva nigghoso, paṭibhānaṃ udīrayī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.214; theragā. 1241);
听闻此言,比丘们踊跃欢喜,便回应世尊:“是的,尊者!(evaṃ, bhante)”这即是说,他们纳受了导师的教诲,正所谓“已受取”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vutte ussāhajātā hutvā evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchiṃsu, paṭiggahesunti vuttaṃ hoti.
接着,世尊对他们这样说——接下来所说的是:“诸比丘,什么是缘起?”等,由此开示了整部经。其中,“诸比丘,什么是缘起?”属于为欲开示而问。要知道,提问共有五种:未见解明问、已见商议问、断疑问、同意问、欲开示问。这些提问的差别如下:显示巴利原文
Atha nesaṃ bhagavā etadavoca – etaṃ idāni vattabbaṃ ‘‘katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādo’’tiādiṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ avoca. Tattha katamo ca, bhikkhave, paṭiccasamuppādoti kathetukamyatāpucchā. Pañcavidhā hi pucchā adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā vimaticchedanāpucchā anumatipucchā kathetukamyatāpucchāti, tāsaṃ idaṃ nānattaṃ –
何为未见解明问?(参《大义》150;《小义·富楼那学童所问释》12)对于其本来不知、未见、未衡量、未审察、未令显现、未阐明的特征,为了了知它、看见它、衡量它、审察它、令它显现、阐明它而提出问题。这就是未见解明问。显示巴利原文
Katamā adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā (mahāni. 150; cūḷani. puṇṇakamāṇavapucchāniddesa 12)? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ. Tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhūtāya vibhāvanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā.
什么是已见商议问?对于平常已了知其相、已见其相、已衡量其相、已审察其相、已令其相显现、已阐明其相的事物,为了与其他智者共同商议而提出问题。这便是已见商议问。显示巴利原文
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ. So aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā.
什么是断疑问?平时陷入疑惑、陷入犹豫,心中生起两端:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是如何呢?”为了断除这样的疑惑而提出问题。这便是断疑问。显示巴利原文
Katamā vimaticchedanāpucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti vimatipakkhando dveḷhakajāto – ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti, so vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ vimaticchedanāpucchā.
什么是同意问?世尊征询比丘们的意见而发问:“诸比丘,你们意下如何?色是常的,还是无常的?”“尊者,是无常的。”“那么,无常的是苦还是乐?”“尊者,是苦。”“凡是无常、苦、变易之法,是否适合这样观察:‘这是我的,这是我,这是我的自我’呢?”“尊者,不适合。”(《相应部》3.79)这便是同意问。显示巴利原文
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti, aniccaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vāti, dukkhaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ, kallaṃ nu taṃ samanupassituṃ – ‘‘etaṃ mama esohamasmi eso me attā’’ti, no hetaṃ bhanteti (saṃ. ni. 3.79). Ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么是想开示问?世尊欲为比丘们说法而提问:“诸比丘,有四念处。哪四种呢?”这就是想开示问。显示巴利原文
Katamā kathetukamyatāpucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro’’ti? Ayaṃ kathetukamyatāpucchāti.
在这些提问中,佛陀没有前三种问。为什么呢?因为对于三世中的任何有为法,或离三世的无为法,没有什么是佛陀未见、未照、未称量、未审察、未明辨、未善照了的。因此,他没有未见解明问。再者,世尊以自智所通达者,不须与其余沙门、婆罗门、天、魔或梵天共相商议,故没有已见商议问。又因他是无犹豫者、已超越疑惑者、于一切法已断除疑惑者,故没有断疑问。然而,另外两种问,世尊则有。当知此中,这里所说的就是想开示问。显示巴利原文
Tattha buddhānaṃ purimā tisso pucchā natthi. Kasmā? Buddhānañhi tīsu addhāsu kiñci saṅkhataṃ addhāvimuttaṃ vā asaṅkhataṃ adiṭṭhaṃ ajotitaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ nāma natthi. Tena nesaṃ adiṭṭhajotanāpucchā natthi. Yaṃ pana bhagavatā attano ñāṇena paṭividdhaṃ, tassa aññena samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā saddhiṃ saṃsandanakiccaṃ natthi. Tenassa diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā natthi. Yasmā panesa akathaṃkathī tiṇṇavicikiccho sabbadhammesu vihatasaṃsayo. Tenassa vimaticchedanāpucchā natthi. Itarā pana dve pucchā bhagavato atthi. Tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchāti veditabbā.
此时,世尊先解释依提问所涉及的缘相,说道:“诸比丘,以无明为缘而有行……”等。在这里,如同一个人本来想说“我要讲父亲”,却先讲了儿子:“帝须的父亲,首那的父亲”一般,世尊本欲讲述缘,却以“以无明为缘而有行……”的方式,在讲述行等之缘——无明等法时,也一并讲述了缘所生法。而在《食集》的结尾,他则开示说:“诸比丘,我将为你们讲说缘起和缘已生法”(《相应部》2.20),同时举出两者,并加以解说。现在,对于“以无明为缘而有行”等句子,这里的“无明”本身就是那个“缘”,故称“无明缘”。因此,应当这样理解其意义:“以无明为缘,诸行生起。”以上是此处的概要。至于详尽、具足一切行相的顺观缘起解说,已于《清净道论》中讲过,故应依彼所述而领解。显示巴利原文
Idāni tāva pucchāya puṭṭhaṃ paccayākāraṃ vibhajanto avijjāpaccayā, bhikkhave, saṅkhārātiādimāha. Ettha ca yathā nāma ‘‘pitaraṃ kathessāmī’’ti āraddho ‘‘tissassa pitā soṇassa pitā’’ti paṭhamataraṃ puttampi katheti, evameva bhagavā paccayaṃ kathetuṃ āraddho ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā nayena saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccaye avijjādidhamme kathento paccayuppannampi kathesi. Āhāravaggassa pana pariyosāne ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādañca vo, bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhamme’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) ubhayaṃ ārabhitvā ubhayampi kathesi. Idāni avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārātiādīsu pana avijjā ca sā paccayo cāti avijjāpaccayo. Tasmā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantīti iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārena pana sabbākārasampannā anulomapaṭiccasamuppādakathā visuddhimagge kathitā, tasmā sā tattha kathitavaseneva gahetabbā.
在逆观的解说中,“avijjāya tveva”(即因无明的消尽)的意思是:确实是由于无明。“asesavirāganirodhā”的意思是:由那称为离贪的道所达成的完全消尽。“saṅkhāranirodho”的意思是:诸行达到了不再生起的息灭。为了说明:如此息灭了的诸行,因其息灭,识等也随之息灭,而名色等也确已息灭,世尊在说了“由行的息灭,而有识的息灭”等之后,宣说道:“evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hoti”(如此,这整个苦蕴便息灭了)。其中,“kevalassa”的意思是:整个的、全部的,或者说纯粹的,即其中不含有众生的意思。“dukkhakkhandhassa”的意思是:苦的积聚。“nirodho hoti”的意思是:不再生起。如此,世尊以顺观的十二支讲完了流转的教法之后,又使那流转回转过来,以逆观的十二支开示了还灭,并以阿拉汉道作为此开示的顶峰。就在开示圆满之时,那五百位已经开始修观、属于略说即悟型的修行者,如同被阳光触及而达至完全成熟的莲显示巴利原文
Paṭilomakathāyaṃ pana avijjāya tvevāti avijjāya tu eva. Asesavirāganirodhāti virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodhā. Saṅkhāranirodhoti saṅkhārānaṃ anuppādanirodho hoti. Evaṃnirodhānaṃ pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhā viññāṇādīnañca nirodhā nāmarūpādīni niruddhāniyeva hontīti dassetuṃ saṅkhāranirodhā viññāṇanirodhotiādīni vatvā, evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotīti āha. Tattha kevalassāti sakalassa, suddhassa vā, sattavirahitassāti attho. Dukkhakkhandhassāti dukkharāsissa. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti. Iti bhagavā anulomato dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭakathaṃ kathetvā tameva vaṭṭaṃ vinivaṭṭetvā paṭilomato dvādasahi padehi vivaṭṭaṃ kathento arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Desanāpariyosāne te pañcasatā āraddhavipassakā ugghaṭitaññūpuggalā sūriyarasmisamphuṭṭhāni paripākagatāni padumāni viya saccāni bujjhitvā arahattaphale patiṭṭhahiṃsu.
“Idamavoca bhagavā”的意思是:世尊宣说了这整部经,即依循流转与还灭之理而开演的整部经。“Attamanā te bhikkhū”的意思是:那五百位漏尽比丘,心中生起满足。“Bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandun”的意思是:世尊以他那如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般悦耳、令智者之心如受甘露灌顶的梵音说法,比丘们对此法语生起欢喜与随喜,并且完全信受。显示巴利原文
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ vaṭṭavivaṭṭavasena sakalasuttaṃ bhagavā avoca. Attamanā te bhikkhūti tuṭṭhacittā te pañcasatā khīṇāsavā bhikkhū. Bhagavato bhāsitaṃ abhinandunti karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsato bhagavato vacanaṃ abhinandiṃsu, anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cāti attho. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“这是善说、善语,善哉、善哉,对于如如者;”
比丘们随喜赞叹,以头顶礼,全然信受。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Subhāsitaṃ sulapitaṃ, sādhu sādhūti tādino; Anumodamānā sirasā, sampaṭicchiṃsu bhikkhavo’’ti.
2. 《分别经》的注释显示巴利原文
2. Vibhaṅgasuttavaṇṇanā
2 第二部经也应以同样的方式,理解其经文的安立。不过有一点区别:第一部是为了略解即悟者,以简略方式显示;这一部则是为了广解乃悟者,以详细方式显示。此外,在这部经中,应讲述四种寻藤人的譬喻,这些在《清净道论》中已经说过。正如一个寻藤人,先见到藤尖,便循着它找到根部,见到根部后,便从根上将藤砍断,取来用于工作。同样地,世尊在详细说法时,从缘起的顶端老死开始,一直追溯到作为其根本的无明,将教法引导下来,然后再开示流转与还灭,从而结束说法。显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyepi vuttanayeneva suttanikkhepo veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – paṭhamaṃ ugghaṭitaññūpuggalānaṃ vasena saṅkhepato dassitaṃ, idaṃ vipañcitaññūnaṃ vasena vitthāratoti. Imasmiñca pana sutte catasso vallihārakapurisūpamā vattabbā, tā visuddhimagge vuttā eva. Yathā hi vallihārako puriso valliyā aggaṃ disvā tadanusārena mūlaṃ pariyesanto taṃ disvā valliṃ mūle chetvā ādāya kamme upaneyya, evaṃ bhagavā vitthāradesanaṃ desento paṭiccasamuppādassa aggabhūtā jarāmaraṇā paṭṭhāya yāva mūlabhūtaṃ avijjāpadaṃ, tāva desanaṃ āharitvā puna vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ desento niṭṭhapesi.
在这里,对于老死等的详细教说,应这样抉择义理:首先,在老死的解说中,“那些、那些”应理解为对许多有情的简略共通解说。因为即使花上一整天说“提婆达多的老、某甲的老”,也说之不尽;但通过这两个词,便没有一位有情被遗漏在外了。所以说:“这是对许多有情的简略共通解说”。“于种种处、于种种处”则是基于趣和生类,对许多有情群体的共通解说。而“有情群体”一词,便是对通过共通解说所指明的具体形态的实例说明。在“老、老化”等解说中,“老”是自性解说;“老化”是行相解说;“牙齿脱落”等三者,是基于时间推移的作用解说;其后两者,则是本性解说。因为“此老”一词,是从自性上加以说明的,故为自性解说。“老化”则是从行相上加以说明的,故为行相解说。以“牙齿脱落”,说明的是在时间推移中,牙齿、指甲得以碎裂的作用;以“头发变白”,说明的是头发、身毛得以变白的作用;以“皮肤起皱”,说明的是肌肉萎缩、皮肤起皱的作用。因此,牙齿脱落等三者,便是依于时间推移的作用解说。通过这些显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ vitthāradesanāya atthanicchayo – jarāmaraṇaniddese tāva tesaṃ tesanti ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddesoti viññātabbo. Yā devadattassa jarā, yā somadattassāti evañhi divasampi kathentassa neva sattā pariyādānaṃ gacchanti. Imehi pana dvīhi padehi na koci satto apariyādinno hoti. Tasmā vuttaṃ, ‘‘ayaṃ saṅkhepato anekesaṃ sattānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso’’ti. Tamhi tamhīti ayaṃ gatijātivasena anekesaṃ sattanikāyānaṃ sādhāraṇaniddeso. Sattanikāyeti sādhāraṇaniddesena niddiṭṭhassa sarūpanidassanaṃ. Jarā jīraṇatātiādīsu pana jarāti sabhāvaniddeso. Jīraṇatāti ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā, pacchimā dve pakatiniddesā. Ayañhi jarāti iminā padena sabhāvato dīpitā, tenassāyaṃ sabhāvaniddeso . Jīraṇatāti iminā ākārato, tenassāyaṃ ākāraniddeso. Khaṇḍiccanti iminā kālātikkame dantanakhānaṃ khaṇḍitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Pāliccanti iminā kesalomānaṃ palitabhāvakaraṇakiccato. Valittacatāti iminā maṃsaṃ milāpetvā tacavalibhāvakaraṇakiccato dīpitā. Tenassā ime khaṇḍiccantiādayo tayo kālātikkame kiccaniddesā. Tehi imesaṃ vikārānaṃ dassanavasena pākaṭībhūtā pākaṭajarā dassitā. Yatheva hi udakassa vā vātassa vā aggino vā tiṇarukkhādīnaṃ saṃbhaggapalibhaggatāya vā jhāmatāya vā gatamaggo pākaṭo hoti, na ca so gatamaggo tāneva udakādīni, evameva jarāya dantādīsu khaṇḍiccādivasena gatamaggo pākaṭo, cakkhuṃ ummīletvāpi gayhati na ca khaṇḍiccādīneva jarā. Na hi jarā cakkhuviññeyyā hoti.
而通过“寿命的减损、诸根的成熟”这两个词,所说明的正是随着时间推移而变得明显、被称为“寿尽”和“眼等诸根成熟”的本性。因此,应知后两者为对本性的解说。此处,因为达到衰老的人其寿命会减损,故以果喻的方便,将老称为“寿命的减损”。又因为年轻时极为清净明亮、能轻松取到微细所缘的眼等诸根,到了衰老时变得成熟、紊乱、不清明,甚至无法取到粗大所缘,故同样以果喻的方便,称为“诸根的成熟”。显示巴利原文
Āyuno saṃhāni indriyānaṃ paripākoti imehi pana padehi kālātikkameyeva abhibyattāya āyukkhaya-cakkhādiindriya-paripākasaññitāya pakatiyā dīpitā. Tenassime pacchimā dve pakatiniddesāti veditabbā. Tattha yasmā jaraṃ pattassa āyu hāyati, tasmā jarā ‘‘āyuno saṃhānī’’ti phalūpacārena vuttā. Yasmā ca daharakāle suppasannāni sukhumampi attano visayaṃ sukheneva gaṇhanasamatthāni cakkhādīni indriyāni jaraṃ pattassa paripakkāni āluḷitāni avisadāni, oḷārikampi attano visayaṃ gahetuṃ asamatthāni honti, tasmā ‘‘indriyānaṃ paripāko’’ti phalūpacāreneva vuttā.
如是所述的一切老,又可分为“明显的老”与“隐蔽的老”两种。其中,由于能在牙齿等处看到破碎等相状,色法中的老称为“明显的老”;而非色法中的老,由于看不到那样的变化,则称为“隐蔽的老”。此处,所见破碎等相,实即牙齿等的色法本身,因其极易辨识。人们以眼见后,通过意门思维:“这些牙齿被老所损坏”,由此了知“老”的存在。正如看见水中绑着牛头等标志,便知下方有水一样。此外,还有“无间断的老”与“有间断的老”两种。其中,如同宝石、金、银、珊瑚、月亮、太阳等物,或在少欲众生等有生命者中,或在花、果、嫩叶等无生命者中,其颜色等特殊状态的变化难以察觉,故此种老称为“无间断的老”,意即持续而无间断的老化。而在如前所述的其他事物中,其颜色等特殊状态的变化容易察觉,故那种老应理解为“有间断的老”。显示巴利原文
Sā panāyaṃ evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbāpi jarā pākaṭā paṭicchannāti duvidhā hoti. Tattha dantādīsu khaṇḍādibhāvadassanato rūpadhammesu jarā pākaṭajarā nāma, arūpadhammesu pana jarā tādisassa vikārassa adassanato paṭicchannajarā nāma. Tattha yvāyaṃ khaṇḍādibhāvo dissati, so tādisānaṃ dantādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā vaṇṇoyeva, taṃ cakkhunā disvā manodvārena cintetvā ‘‘ime dantā jarāya pahaṭā’’ti jaraṃ jānāti udakaṭṭhāne baddhāni gosīsādīni oloketvā heṭṭhā udakassa atthibhāvaṃ jānanaṃ viya. Puna avīci savīcīti evampi duvidhā hoti. Tattha maṇi-kanaka-rajata-pavāḷacandasūriyādīnaṃ viya mandadasakādīsu pāṇīnaṃ viya ca pupphaphalapallavādīsu ca apāṇīnaṃ viya antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ duviññeyyattā jarā avīcijarā nāma, nirantarajarāti attho. Tato aññesu pana yathāvuttesu antarantarā vaṇṇavisesādīnaṃ suviññeyyattā jarā savīcijarā nāmāti veditabbā.
自此以下,“他们的、那些的”等,皆应依前述之理来理解。而在“死去、死去性”等中,“死去”是就死亡这一动作而言的,它是适用于单蕴、四蕴或五蕴有情的总称。以表示性状的词“死去性”,则是为了显示其相。“破坏”是说明死亡所涉诸蕴到达了坏灭。“消失”是说明死亡所涉诸蕴,犹如破碎的瓦罐,无论如何都不再安住。“死亡、死”是指被称为“能杀者”的死,由此排除了断灭死等其他种类的死。所谓“时”,即终结者,其作用称为“寿尽”。如此,他以世间共许的说法阐述了死。显示巴利原文
Ito paraṃ tesaṃ tesantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Cuti cavanatātiādīsu pana cutīti cavanakavasena vuccati, ekacatupañcakkhandhasāmaññavacanametaṃ. Cavanatāti bhāvavacanena lakkhaṇanidassanaṃ . Bhedoti cutikkhandhānaṃ bhaṅguppattiparidīpanaṃ. Antaradhānanti ghaṭasseva bhinnassa bhinnānaṃ cutikkhandhānaṃ yena kenaci pariyāyena ṭhānābhāvaparidīpanaṃ. Maccu maraṇanti maccusaṅkhātaṃ maraṇaṃ, tena samucchedamaraṇādīni nisedheti. Kālo nāma antako, tassa kiriyā kālakiriyā. Evaṃ tena lokasammutiyā maraṇaṃ dīpeti.
现在,为了以究竟义说明,便说“诸蕴的破坏”等。因为于究竟义,唯有诸蕴坏灭,并无所谓“有情”死去。只是在诸蕴坏灭时,世俗说“有情死了”;坏灭之后,便施设“已死”之名。于此,就四蕴有与五蕴有而言,是“诸蕴的破坏”;就一蕴有而言,是“身体的舍弃”。就四蕴有而言,是“诸蕴的破坏”;其余二种有,则应有“身体的舍弃”。何以故?因后二种有中,亦存在名为“色身”的身体。或者,于四大天王天等处,诸蕴唯坏灭,无所遗弃,故他们是“诸蕴的破坏”;而于人类等处,则有“身体的舍弃”。在此,因死是身体舍弃之因,故可解为死即“身体的舍弃”,当如此了知其义。如此,此老与此死,比丘们,此二者合为一处,即称为“老死”。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthena dīpetuṃ khandhānaṃ bhedotiādimāha. Paramatthena hi khandhāyeva bhijjanti, na satto nāma koci marati. Khandhesu pana bhijjamānesu satto marati, bhinnesu matoti vohāro hoti. Ettha ca catupañcavokāravasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, ekavokāravasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Catuvokāravasena ca khandhānaṃ bhedo, sesadvayavasena kaḷevarassa nikkhepo veditabbo. Kasmā? Bhavadvayepi rūpakāyasaṅkhātassa kaḷevarassa sabbhāvato. Atha vā yasmā cātumahārājikādīsu khandhā bhijjanteva, na kiñci nikkhipati, tasmā tesaṃ vasena khandhānaṃ bhedo, manussādīsu kaḷevarassa nikkhepo. Ettha ca kaḷevarassa nikkhepakāraṇato maraṇaṃ ‘‘kaḷevarassa nikkhepo’’ti vuttanti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Iti ayañca jarā idañca maraṇaṃ, idaṃ vuccati, bhikkhaveti idaṃ ubhayampi ekato katvā jarāmaraṇanti kathīyati.
在“生”的解释中,有“生”、“出生”等词。其中,“生”以出生义为“生”,此适合诸根尚未具足的情形。“出生”以出生义为“出生”,此适合诸根已具足的情形。“入胎”以入胎义为“入胎”,此适合卵生与胎生。因他们如同进入、穿透卵壳与子宫般地结生。“再生”以再生义为“再生”,此适合湿生与化生。因他们即时显现而生。这是从世俗角度所作的教导。显示巴利原文
Jātiniddese jāti sañjātītiādīsu jāyanaṭṭhena jāti, sā aparipuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Sañjāyanaṭṭhena sañjāti, sā paripuṇṇāyatanavasena yuttā. Okkamanaṭṭhena okkanti, sā aṇḍajajalābujavasena yuttā. Te hi aṇḍakosañca vatthikosañca okkamantā pavisantā viya paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhanti. Abhinibbattanaṭṭhena abhinibbatti, sā saṃsedajaopapātikavasena yuttā. Te hi pākaṭāyeva hutvā nibbattanti. Ayaṃ tāva vohāradesanā.
现在,此是从究竟义所作的教导。因于究竟义,唯诸蕴显现,并无“有情”存在。其中,“诸蕴”一词,应如此理解:于一蕴有,指一个蕴;于四蕴有,指四个蕴;于五蕴有,指五个蕴。“显现”即生起。“诸处”一词,此处应理解为:依于彼彼处所生起的处所而作的归类。“获得”是指在相续中显现。因正是所显现者,才被称为“获得”。通过“诸比丘,这称为生”一语,对从世俗与从究竟两种角度所教导的“生”作了总结。显示巴利原文
Idāni paramatthadesanā hoti. Khandhāyeva hi paramatthato pātubhavanti, na satto. Tattha ca khandhānanti ekavokārabhave ekassa, catuvokārabhave catunnaṃ, pañcavokārabhave pañcannampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pātubhāvoti uppatti. Āyatanānanti ettha tatra tatra uppajjamānāyatanavasena saṅgaho veditabbo. Paṭilābhoti santatiyaṃ pātubhāvoyeva. Pātubhavantāneva hi tāni paṭiladdhāni nāma honti. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, jātīti iminā padena vohārato paramatthato ca desitāya jātiyā nigamanaṃ karotīti.
在“有”的解说中,“欲有”包括业有与再生有。其中,业有是指能导致欲界再生的业。因为它是再生有的因,所以如同“佛陀的出世是乐,恶的积聚是苦”等语句那样,依果报的名称而称为“有”。再生有则是由那个业所产生、被执取的五蕴。因为它在那里“有”(存在),所以称为“有”。总之,在这里,业和再生两者都称为“欲有”。同样的道理也适用于色有和无色有。显示巴利原文
Bhavaniddese kāmabhavoti kammabhavo ca upapattibhavo ca. Tattha kammabhavo nāma kāmabhavūpagakammameva. Tañhi tattha upapattibhavassa kāraṇattā ‘‘sukho buddhānaṃ uppādo (dha. pa. 194) dukkho pāpassa uccayo’’tiādīni (dha. pa. 117) viya phalavohārena bhavoti vuttaṃ. Upapattibhavo nāma tena kammena nibbattaṃ upādiṇṇakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Tañhi tattha bhavatīti katvā bhavoti vuttaṃ. Sabbathāpi idaṃ kammañca upapattiñca ubhayampetamidha ‘‘kāmabhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesūti.
在“取”的解说中,就“欲取”等而言:所谓欲取,是指人们以此取去执取欲乐的对象,或者这种取本身即执取欲乐;又或者,它既是欲又是取,故称“欲取”。“取”是指强烈的执取。如同在“恼害”(upāyāsa)、“近住”(upakaṭṭha)等词中,“upa-”前缀有“强烈”之义。这是对五种欲功德的贪染的同义语。这是概要。详细而言,应当按照《法集论》[1220段]、《分别论》[938段]等所教导的方式来了解:“其中,什么是欲取?就是对于诸欲的欲贪……”等。显示巴利原文
Upādānaniddese kāmupādānantiādīsu vatthukāmaṃ upādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyatīti kāmupādānaṃ, kāmo ca so upādānañcāti kāmupādānaṃ. Upādānanti daḷhaggahaṇaṃ vuccati. Daḷhattho hi ettha upasaddo upāyāsaupakaṭṭhādīsu viya. Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ kāmupādānaṃ? Yo kāmesu kāmacchando’’ti (dha. sa. 1220; vibha. 938) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
同样地,它既是见又是取,所以称为“见取”。或者,它执取见,又或者人们以此取去执取见,故称“见取”。因为后面的见会执取前面的见,人们也会用那个见来执取其他见。正如经中所说:“我和世间是常住的,只有这个是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”[《中部·根本五十经》3.27]等。这是除戒禁取和我语取之外,一切邪见的同义语。这是概要。详细而言,应当按照《法集论》[1221段]等所教导的方式来了解:“其中,什么是见取?就是‘没有布施的果报’……”等。显示巴利原文
Tathā diṭṭhi ca sā upādānañcāti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Atha vā diṭṭhiṃ upādiyati, upādiyanti vā etena diṭṭhinti diṭṭhupādānaṃ. Upādiyati hi purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi, upādiyanti ca tāya diṭṭhiṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’ntiādi (ma. ni. 3.27). Sīlabbatupādānaattavādupādānavajjassa sabbadiṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ diṭṭhupādānaṃ? Natthi dinna’’nti (dha. sa. 1221) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
同样地,他们以此执取戒禁,或者它本身即执取戒禁,又或者它既是戒禁又是取,因此称为「戒禁取」。像牛戒、牛行之类,由于执着「以此而得清净」(《法集论》1222;《分别论》938),其本身便成了取。这是概要。详述则应依教导如是了知:「其中,什么是戒禁取?即‘在此之外,沙门、婆罗门们以戒而清净’……等。」显示巴利原文
Tathā sīlabbatamupādiyanti etena, sayaṃ vā taṃ upādiyati, sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcāti vā sīlabbatupādānaṃ. Gosīlagovatādīni hi ‘‘evaṃ suddhī’’ti (dha. sa. 1222; vibha. 938) abhinivesato sayameva upādānānīti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ sīlabbatupādānaṃ? Ito bahiddhā samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sīlena suddhī’’ti vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
他们以此而说,故称为‘说’(vāda);以此而执取,故称为‘取’(upādāna)。他们说什么、执取什么?即说和执取‘我’。执取我之说,便是‘我语取’。或者,仅仅是我之说本身,他们便以此执取‘我’,故为‘我语取’。这是以二十种事为基础的身见的同义语。这是此处概要。详述则应如是了知:「其中,什么是‘我语取’?在此,无闻凡夫……不见圣者……等。」显示巴利原文
Idāni vadanti etenāti vādo, upādiyanti etenāti upādānaṃ, kiṃ vadanti upādiyanti vā? Attānaṃ. Attano vādupādānaṃ attavādupādānaṃ. Attavādamattameva vā attāti upādiyanti etenāti attavādupādānaṃ. Vīsativatthukāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panetaṃ, ‘‘tattha katamaṃ attavādupādānaṃ? Idha assutavā puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī’’ti vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
于爱的解说中,「色爱」……乃至「法爱」:这是于眼门等速行路中现起的爱,依父方相似的所缘而立名,犹如依父而称「富翁之子」「婆罗门之子」等。此处,以色为所缘的爱,或于色的爱,即是「色爱」。当它作为欲贪而现起、对色产生味著时,即是「欲爱」;当它作为与常见相应的贪而现起、认为「色是常、恒、常住」而产生味著时,即是「有爱」;当它作为与断见相应的贪而现起、认为「色将断灭、坏灭,死后不存在」而产生味著时,即是「非有爱」。如此,单是色爱就有三种。如同色爱,声爱等也是如此。于是成为十八种爱行。这十八种爱行,于内色等有十八种,于外色等有十八种,合为三十六种。如此,过去有三十六种,未来有三十六种,现在有三十六种,总为一百零八种爱行。或者,如「依于内,有‘我是’;有‘我是这样’」(《分别论》973)等说,依内色等有十八种;如「依于外,有‘以此,我是’;有‘以此,我是这样’」(《分别论》975)等说,依外色等有十八种,合为三十六种;如此,过显示巴利原文
Taṇhāniddese rūpataṇhā…pe… dhammataṇhāti etaṃ cakkhudvārādīsu javanavīthiyā pavattāya taṇhāya ‘‘seṭṭhiputto brāhmaṇaputto’’ti evamādīsu pitito nāmaṃ viya pitisadisārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Ettha ca rūpārammaṇā taṇhā, rūpe taṇhāti rūpataṇhā. Sā kāmarāgabhāvena rūpaṃ assādentī pavattamānā kāmataṇhā, sassatadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ sassata’’nti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā bhavataṇhā, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatarāgabhāvena ‘‘rūpaṃ ucchijjati vinassati pecca na bhavatī’’ti evaṃ assādentī pavattamānā vibhavataṇhāti rūpataṇhā evaṃ tividhā hoti. Yathā ca rūpataṇhā, tathā saddataṇhādayopīti evaṃ tāni aṭṭhārasa taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Tāni ajjhattarūpādīsu aṭṭhārasa, bahiddhārūpādīsu aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa. Iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evaṃ aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni honti. ‘‘Ajjhattikassa upādāya asmīti hoti, itthasmīti hotī’’ti (vibha. 973) vā evamādīni ajjhattikarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasa, ‘‘bāhirassa upādāya iminā asmīti hoti, iminā itthasmīti hotī’’ti (vibha. 975) vā evamādīni bāhirarūpādinissitāni aṭṭhārasāti chattiṃsa, iti atītāni chattiṃsa, anāgatāni chattiṃsa, paccuppannāni chattiṃsāti evampi aṭṭhasataṃ taṇhāvicaritāni honti. Puna saṅgahe kariyamāne rūpādīsu ārammaṇesu chaḷeva taṇhākāyā tissoyeva kāmataṇhādayo hontīti. Evaṃ –
以‘解说’之义而名为‘解说’,以‘详细’之义而名为‘详细’;
又,具慧者应通过归纳而了知爱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Niddesatthena niddesa, vitthārā vitthārassa ca; Puna saṅgahato taṇhā, viññātabbā vibhāvinā’’ti.
于受的解说中,‘受身’即受的集合。‘眼触所生受’……乃至‘意触所生受’:此乃依据《分别论》所说:‘眼触所生受有善、有不善、有无记’(《分别论》34)。于眼门等中生起的善、不善、无记受,是依其所依处而命名的,正如‘舍利弗’、‘满慈子’等是依母亲之名而得称。此处就字面义而言:以眼触为缘所生之受,即名‘眼触所生受’。如此方式于一切处类推。以上是此处的总摄之说。然而,从果报的角度看,眼门中有两种眼识、两种意界及三种意识界,应通过与他们识相应之理而了知受。耳门等亦准此。于意门中,唯与意识界相应。显示巴利原文
Vedanāniddese vedanākāyāti vedanāsamūhā. Cakkhusamphassajā vedanā…pe… manosamphassajāvedanāti etaṃ ‘‘cakkhusamphassajāvedanā atthi kusalā, atthi akusalā, atthi abyākatā’’ti evaṃ vibhaṅge (vibha. 34) āgatattā cakkhudvārādīsu pavattānaṃ kusalākusalābyākatavedanānaṃ ‘‘sāriputto mantāṇiputto’’ti evamādīsu mātito nāmaṃ viya mātisadisato vatthuto nāmaṃ. Vacanattho panettha – cakkhusamphassahetu jātā vedanā cakkhusamphassajā vedanāti. Eseva nayo sabbattha. Ayaṃ tāvettha sabbasaṅgāhikā kathā. Vipākavasena pana cakkhudvāre dve cakkhuviññāṇāni, dve manodhātuyo, tisso manoviññāṇadhātuyoti etāhi sampayuttavasena vedanā veditabbā. Eseva nayo sotadvārādīsu. Manodvāre manoviññāṇadhātusampayuttāva.
在触的解说中,“眼触”即眼处的触,余处类推。眼触……身触:此即说明了善、不善果报、以五处为依的十种触。“意触”:指与其余二十二种世间果报意相应的触。显示巴利原文
Phassaniddese cakkhusamphassoti cakkhumhi samphasso. Esa nayo sabbattha. Cakkhusamphasso…pe… kāyasamphassoti ettāvatā ca kusalākusalavipākā pañcavatthukā dasa phassā vuttā honti. Manosamphassoti iminā sesabāvīsatilokiyavipākamanasampayuttā phassā.
在解释六处时,关于眼处等应说明的内容,已于《清净道论》的蕴解说与处解说中讲过。显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatananiddese cakkhāyatanantiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimagge khandhaniddese ceva āyatananiddese ca vuttameva.
在名色的解说中,“名”以倾向为相,“色”以变坏为相。在分别时,其“受”即是受蕴,“想”即是想蕴,“思、触、作意”应知为行蕴。虽然行蕴中尚有其他所摄之法,但即便在最微弱的心中也都有这三种存在,故此处仅以此三者作为代表。“四大种”:此处“四”是数量的限定;“大种”是地、水、火、风的别名。它们为何被称为大种,及其他抉择方法,这一切在《清净道论》的色蕴解说中已作说明。关于“及依四大种而存”:此处的“四”是表示对象意义的属格,即指“四大种”。“upādāya”意为取、执持,也有人解释为依止。文中还应补上“存在”一词。或者,此属格表示集合义,应理解为:“依于四大种的集合而存在的色”。总之,四大种(地等四者),以及依阿毗达摩教法、依靠四大种而生起、分为眼处等二十三类的色,这一切都应了知为“色”。显示巴利原文
Nāmarūpaniddese namanalakkhaṇaṃ nāmaṃ. Ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ rūpaṃ. Vibhajane panassa vedanāti vedanākkhandho, saññāti saññākkhandho, cetanā phasso manasikāroti saṅkhārakkhandho veditabbo. Kāmañca aññepi saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā dhammā santi, ime pana tayo sabbadubbalesupi cittesu santi, tasmā etesaṃyeva vasenettha saṅkhārakkhandho dassito. Cattāro ca mahābhūtāti ettha cattāroti gaṇanaparicchedo. Mahābhūtāti pathavīāpatejavāyānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yena pana kāraṇena tāni mahābhūtānīti vuccanti, yo cettha añño vinicchayanayo, so sabbo visuddhimagge rūpakkhandhaniddese vutto. Catunnañca mahābhūtānaṃ upādāyāti ettha pana catunnanti upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ, cattāri mahābhūtānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Upādāyāti upādiyitvā, gahetvāti attho. Nissāyātipi eke. ‘‘Vattamāna’’nti ayañcettha pāṭhaseso. Samūhatthe vā etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ, catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ samūhaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ rūpanti ettha attho veditabbo. Evaṃ sabbathāpi yāni ca cattāri pathavīādīni mahābhūtāni, yañca catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vattamānaṃ cakkhāyatanādibhedena abhidhammapāḷiyameva vuttaṃ tevīsatividhaṃ rūpaṃ, taṃ sabbampi rūpanti veditabbaṃ.
在识的解说中,“眼识”,即依眼而有的识,或从眼生起的识,故称眼识。耳识、鼻识、舌识、身识也是如此。另一者,“意”本身即是识,故称“意识”。这是与双五识(眼识等五识)有别的三地异熟心的同义语。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇaniddese cakkhuviññāṇanti cakkhumhi viññāṇaṃ, cakkhuto vā jātaṃ viññāṇanti cakkhuviññāṇaṃ. Evaṃ sotaghānajivhākāyaviññāṇāni. Itaraṃ pana manoyeva viññāṇanti manoviññāṇaṃ. Dvipañcaviññāṇavajjitatebhūmakavipākacittassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在行的解说中,行以造作为相。分别解说时,“身行”,即从身转起的行。这是从身门以推动方式生起的二十种身思的异名——来自欲界善的八种,以及来自不善的十二种。“语行”,即从语言转起的行。这是从语门以言语差别方式生起的同二十种语思的异名。“心行”,即从心转起的行。这是不由身门与语门推动,而是独坐静虑者所生起的、世间善与不善的二十九种意思的异名。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhāraniddese abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇo saṅkhāro. Vibhajane panassa kāyasaṅkhāroti kāyato pavattasaṅkhāro. Kāyadvāre copanavasena pavattānaṃ kāmāvacarakusalato aṭṭhannaṃ, akusalato dvādasannanti vīsatiyā kāyasañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vacīsaṅkhāroti vacanato pavattasaṅkhāro, vacīdvāre vacanabhedavasena pavattānaṃ vīsatiyā eva vacīsañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Cittasaṅkhāroti cittato pavattasaṅkhāro, kāyavacīdvāre copanaṃ akatvā raho nisīditvā cintentassa pavattānaṃ lokiyakusalākusalavasena ekūnatiṃsamanosañcetanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
在无明的解说中,“于苦无知”,即对苦谛的无知,这是“愚痴”的异名。于“苦集无知”等,亦应如此理解。此中,应从四种理由了知“于苦无知”:以被包含故、以依处故、以所缘故、以覆盖故。即:它由于被苦谛所包含,故于苦是“被包含”的;以苦谛作为依止缘为它的依处,故苦谛是其“依处”;以苦谛作为所缘缘为它的所缘,故苦谛是其“所缘”;它通过阻碍对苦谛真实相的如实通达,并夺除彼处智慧生起之机,从而覆盖苦谛。显示巴利原文
Avijjāniddese dukkhe aññāṇanti dukkhasacce aññāṇaṃ, mohassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Esa nayo dukkhasamudaye aññāṇantiādīsu. Tattha catūhi kāraṇehi dukkhe aññāṇaṃ veditabbaṃ antogadhato vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Tathā hi taṃ dukkhasaccapariyāpannattā dukkhe antogadhaṃ, dukkhasaccañcassa nissayapaccayabhāvena vatthu, ārammaṇapaccayabhāvena ārammaṇaṃ, dukkhasaccaṃ etaṃ paṭicchādeti tassa yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇena ñāṇappavattiyā cettha appadānena.
对苦集的无知应从三种理由来了解:从依处、从所缘、从覆盖。对灭与道的无知则只应从一种理由来了解,即从覆盖。因为对于灭谛和道谛,无知仅仅是覆盖它们——它通过阻碍对这二谛真实相的如实通达,并阻止智慧在其中生起。然而,无知并不容于灭谛与道谛,因为它不为这二谛所摄;这二谛亦非其依处,因不同时生起;这二谛亦非其所缘,因它不能以这二谛为对象而生起。这是因为:后二谛极其甚深、难以见到,对于已成为盲目的无知,无法在那里生起。而前二谛的自性相虽可被言说,却因难以洞见而显得甚深,无知便以颠倒执取的方式在那里生起。显示巴利原文
Dukkhasamudaye aññāṇaṃ tīhi kāraṇehi veditabbaṃ vatthuto ārammaṇato paṭicchādanato ca. Nirodhe paṭipadāya ca aññāṇaṃ ekeneva kāraṇena veditabbaṃ paṭicchādanato. Nirodhapaṭipadānañhi paṭicchādakameva aññāṇaṃ tesaṃ yāthāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhanivāraṇena tesu ca ñāṇappavattiyā appadānena. Na pana taṃ tattha antogadhaṃ tasmiṃ saccadvaye apariyāpannattā, na tassa taṃ saccadvayaṃ vatthu asahajātattā, nārammaṇaṃ, tadārabbha appavattanato. Pacchimañhi saccadvayaṃ gambhīrattā duddasaṃ, na tattha andhabhūtaṃ aññāṇaṃ pavattati. Purimaṃ pana vacanīyattena sabhāvalakkhaṇassa duddasattā gambhīraṃ, tattha vipallāsagāhavasena pavattati.
此外,仅凭“于苦”这一句,就已经从摄持、依处、所缘和作用方面显示了无明。仅凭“于苦集”这一句,也已经从依处、所缘和作用方面显示了它。仅凭“于苦灭”“于趣向苦灭之道”这两句,则只从作用方面显示了它。而从总括的角度来看,应知“无知”一词,是从无明的自性而作的指示。显示巴利原文
Apica ‘‘dukkhe’’ti ettāvatā saṅgahato vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca avijjā dīpitā. ‘‘Dukkhasamudaye’’ti ettāvatā vatthuto ārammaṇato kiccato ca. ‘‘Dukkhanirodhe dukkhanirodhagāminiyā paṭipadāyā’’ti ettāvatā kiccato. Avisesato pana ‘‘aññāṇa’’nti etena sabhāvato niddiṭṭhāti ñātabbā.
“确实如此,比丘们”的意思是:“正是这样,比丘们”。“成为灭”的意思是“成为不再生起的状态”。在此,世尊实际上是以所有这些“灭”的表述来开示涅槃。因为那些法以涅槃为所缘,才得以灭尽,所以涅槃被称为那些法的“灭”。如此,世尊在这部经中,以十二句话语开示了轮回与出离,并以阿拉汉果为顶点,结束了这次开示。开示结束时,正如前面所描述的方式,那五百位比丘都安住于阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Iti kho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave. Nirodho hotīti anuppādo hoti. Apicettha sabbeheva tehi nirodhapadehi nibbānaṃ desitaṃ. Nibbānañhi āgamma te te dhammā nirujjhanti, tasmā taṃ tesaṃ tesaṃ nirodhoti vuccati. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ sutte dvādasahi padehi vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ desento arahattanikūṭeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Desanāpariyosāne vuttanayeneva pañcasatā bhikkhū arahatte patiṭṭhahiṃsūti.
《行道经》的注释。显示巴利原文
3. Paṭipadāsuttavaṇṇanā
3 第三经。「邪道」:这首先是指不能导向出离之道。难道不是以无明为缘,既有福行,也有不动行吗?那它为何成了邪道呢?答言:因其属于轮回之顶端。凡以希求三有、即希求轮回而发起的业,即便是最微小的,哪怕是五神通乃至八等至,这一切皆属轮回之边,皆是轮回之顶端。正因皆为轮回顶端,故是邪道。相反,凡以希求出离轮回、希求涅槃而发起的业,哪怕仅施一杓粥、或施一把树叶,这一切皆属出离之边,皆依止于出离。正因皆属出离之边,故是正道。因为,即使是如一把树叶般微不足道的施舍,或是如毘罗摩大施般广大的善行,若为希求轮回成就,以依止轮回的方式被错误安立,便唯能带来轮回之果,而不能导向出离。然而,若以‘愿我此施能导向烦恼之彻底灭尽’这样的方式希求出离,并以依止出离的方式被正确安立,则它能令证得阿拉汉果、辟支菩提智乃至一切知智,且永不会在未证阿拉汉前便走到尽头。因此,应当明白:顺着轮回的次第……显示巴利原文
3. Tatiye micchāpaṭipadanti ayaṃ tāva aniyyānikapaṭipadā. Nanu ca avijjāpaccayā puññābhisaṅkhāropi atthi āneñjābhisaṅkhāropi, so kathaṃ micchāpaṭipadā hotīti. Vaṭṭasīsattā. Yañhi kiñci bhavattayasaṅkhātaṃ vaṭṭaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ, antamaso pañcābhiññā aṭṭha vā pana samāpattiyo, sabbaṃ taṃ vaṭṭapakkhiyaṃ vaṭṭasīsanti vaṭṭasīsattā micchāpaṭipadāva hoti. Yaṃ pana kiñci vivaṭṭaṃ nibbānaṃ patthetvā pavattitaṃ, antamaso uḷuṅkayāgumattadānampi paṇṇamuṭṭhidānamattampi, sabbaṃ taṃ vivaṭṭapakkhiyaṃ vivaṭṭanissitaṃ, vivaṭṭapakkhikattā sammāpaṭipadāva hoti. Appamattakampi hi paṇṇamuṭṭhimattadānakusalaṃ vā hotu mahantaṃ velāmadānādikusalaṃ vā, sace vaṭṭasampattiṃ patthetvā vaṭṭanissitavasena micchā ṭhapitaṃ hoti, vaṭṭameva āharituṃ sakkoti, no vivaṭṭaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ me dānaṃ āsavakkhayāvahaṃ hotū’’ti evaṃ pana vivaṭṭaṃ patthentena vivaṭṭavasena sammā ṭhapitaṃ arahattampi paccekabodhiñāṇampi sabbaññutaññāṇampi dātuṃ sakkotiyeva, na arahattaṃ appatvā pariyosānaṃ gacchati. Iti anulomavasena micchāpaṭipadā, paṭilomavasena sammāpaṭipadā desitāti veditabbā. Nanu cettha paṭipadā pucchitā, nibbānaṃ bhājitaṃ, niyyātanepi paṭipadāva niyyātitā. Na ca nibbānassa paṭipadāti nāmaṃ, savipassanānaṃ pana catunnaṃ maggānametaṃ nāmaṃ, tasmā pucchāniyyātanehi padabhājanaṃ na sametīti. No na sameti, kasmā? Phalena paṭipadāya dassitattā. Phalena hettha paṭipadā dassitā. ‘‘Avijjāya tveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’ti etaṃ nirodhasaṅkhātaṃ nibbānaṃ yassā paṭipadāya phalaṃ, ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, sammāpaṭipadāti ayamettha attho. Imasmiñca atthe asesavirāganirodhāti ettha virāgo nirodhasseva vevacanaṃ, asesavirāgā asesanirodhāti ayañhettha adhippāyo. Yena vā virāgasaṅkhātena maggena asesanirodho hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ etaṃ padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi sati sānubhāvā paṭipadā vibhattā hoti. Iti imasmimpi sutte vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitanti. Tatiyaṃ.
第四《毘婆尸经》的注释。显示巴利原文
4. Vipassīsuttavaṇṇanā
4 第四句。「毗婆尸」(Vipassī):据说,这位菩萨与世间之人不同。世间之人,由于由微小业所生的业生色虚弱,故眼睛会颤动;而菩萨则非如此。因他是由强力业所生之业生色,力量强固,故眼睛不颤动,他目不瞬视,犹如三十三天的天人。因此,经中说:‘比丘们,这位童子因目不瞬视,故毗婆尸童子得到“毗婆尸、毗婆尸”这一名称。’(《长部》2.40)此处意思是:由于远离了不时眨眼所生的黑暗,故能清晰观看;或者指他睁着眼睛观看,因此称为‘毗婆尸’。在此,虽一切最后生菩萨皆因强力业所生业生色之力强,眼睛均无颤动,但唯独此菩萨是因此因缘而得此名。显示巴利原文
4. Catutthe vipassissāti tassa kira bodhisattassa yathā lokiyamanussānaṃ kiñcideva passantānaṃ parittakammābhinibbattassa kammajapasādassa dubbalattā akkhīni vipphandanti , na evaṃ vipphandiṃsu. Balavakammanibbattassa pana kammajapasādassa balavattā avipphandantehi animisehi eva akkhīhi passi seyyathāpi devā tāvatiṃsā. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘animisanto kumāro pekkhatīti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa ‘vipassī vipassī’tveva samaññā udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.40). Ayañhettha adhippāyo – antarantarā nimisajanitandhakāravirahena visuddhaṃ passati, vivaṭehi vā akkhīhi passatīti vipassī. Ettha ca kiñcāpi pacchimabhavikānaṃ sabbabodhisattānaṃ balavakammanibbattassa kammajapasādassa balavattā akkhīni na vipphandanti, so pana bodhisatto eteneva nāmaṃ labhi.
此外,「毗婆尸」也指'择了又择、反复观察而见(viceyya viceyya passati)',意思是仔细地审查、反复地观察而看见。据说有一天,国王坐在裁决处教导人们处理事务时,大臣们把一个装扮好的大人(mahāpurisa)带来,放在国王的膝上。当菩萨把这个大人放在怀里逗弄时,大臣们故意把物品的主人错判给了不是主人的人。菩萨便发出了不悦的声音(anattamanasadda)。国王说:'你们查查看,这是怎么回事?'大臣们仔细查看后,没发现其他原因,就说:'因为这件案子没有判决妥当,他才会这样做。'于是,他们重新把物品判还给了真正的主人,然后思量道:'这位童子是知道情况才这么做的吗?'为了试探,他们又再次把物品的主人错判给别人。菩萨又一次发出了同样的声音。于是国王明白了:'这位大人是知道内情的。'从那以后,国王处理事务时就变得毫不放逸(appamatta)了。因此,经中说:'比丘们,因为这位童子择了又择,以正理来决断事务,所以毗婆尸童子更进而得到了「毗婆尸、毗婆尸」这个称呼。'(《长部》2.41)显示巴利原文
Apica viceyya viceyya passatīti vipassī, vicinitvā vicinitvā passatīti attho. Ekadivasaṃ kira vinicchayaṭṭhāne nisīditvā atthe anusāsantassa rañño alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ mahāpurisaṃ āharitvā aṅke ṭhapayiṃsu. Tassa taṃ aṅke katvā palāḷayamānasseva amaccā sāmikaṃ assāmikaṃ akaṃsu. Bodhisatto anattamanasaddaṃ nicchāresi. Rājā ‘‘kimetaṃ upadhārethā’’ti āha. Upadhārayamānā aññaṃ adisvā ‘‘aṭṭassa dubbinicchitattā evaṃ kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti puna sāmikameva sāmikaṃ katvā ‘‘ñatvā nu kho kumāro evaṃ karotī’’ti? Vīmaṃsantā puna sāmikaṃ assāmikamakaṃsu. Puna bodhisatto tatheva saddaṃ nicchāresi. Atha rājā ‘‘jānāti mahāpuriso’’ti tato paṭṭhāya appamatto ahosi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘viceyya viceyya kumāro atthe panāyati ñāyenāti kho, bhikkhave, vipassissa kumārassa bhiyyosomattāya ‘vipassī vipassī’tveva samaññā udapādī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.41).
“世尊”:指具足祥福者。“阿拉汉”:因杀灭贪等诸敌,或毁坏轮回之轮的轮辐,或因值得资具等供养,故称阿拉汉——如此从功德而得的名称。“正自觉者”:指以正确的方法与因由,由自己亲身精勤而觉悟四圣谛者。“正觉之前”:所谓正觉,是指四道中的智慧;即在那之前。“正是菩萨存在时”:此处,菩提即智慧,以菩提为所缘的有情称为菩萨,意为有智者、具慧者、贤明者。因为从过去诸佛足下发起誓愿之时起,这位有情即是贤明者,而非愚痴者,故称为菩萨。又犹如从水中长出、已臻饱满的莲花,因触及阳光而必将绽放,被称为“将绽放之莲花”;同样地,因在诸佛面前得到授记,必将无障碍地圆满波罗蜜而觉悟,故“将觉悟之有情”亦名为菩萨。再者,他追求那称为四道智的菩提而转起,因此“执着于菩提、系着于菩提的有情”亦为菩萨。如此,依功德而得的名称,正是菩萨存在时。“苦”:即痛苦。“到达”:即已至。这是说:唉!此众生界已到达痛苦。“死而又结生”:这是就一再地死与结生而说。“出离”:即涅槃。因为从老死之苦中出离,故说为彼之出离。“何时呢”:即在哪个时候。显示巴利原文
Bhagavatoti bhāgyasampannassa. Arahatoti rāgādiarīnaṃ hatattā, saṃsāracakkassa vā arānaṃ hatattā, paccayānaṃ vā arahattā arahāti evaṃ guṇato uppannanāmadheyyassa. Sammāsambuddhassāti sammā nayena hetunā sāmaṃ paccattapurisakārena cattāri saccāni buddhassa. Pubbeva sambodhāti sambodho vuccati catūsu maggesu ñāṇaṃ, tato pubbeva. Bodhisattasseva satoti ettha bodhīti ñāṇaṃ, bodhimā satto bodhisatto, ñāṇavā paññavā paṇḍitoti attho. Purimabuddhānañhi pādamūle abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya paṇḍitova so satto, na andhabāloti bodhisatto. Yathā vā udakato uggantvā ṭhitaṃ paripākagataṃ padumaṃ sūriyarasmisamphassena avassaṃ bujjhissatīti bujjhanakapadumanti vuccati, evaṃ buddhānaṃ santike byākaraṇassa laddhattā avassaṃ anantarāyena pāramiyo pūretvā bujjhissatīti bujjhanakasattotipi bodhisatto. Yā ca esā catumaggañāṇasaṅkhātā bodhi, taṃ patthayamāno pavattatīti bodhiyaṃ satto āsattotipi bodhisatto. Evaṃ guṇato uppannanāmavasena bodhisattasseva sato. Kicchanti dukkhaṃ. Āpannoti anuppatto. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – aho ayaṃ sattaloko dukkhaṃ anuppattoti. Cavati ca upapajjati cāti idaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhivasena vuttaṃ. Nissaraṇanti nibbānaṃ. Tañhi jarāmaraṇadukkhato nissaṭattā tassa nissaraṇanti vuccati. Kudāssu nāmāti katarasmiṃ nu kho kāle.
“如理作意”:即通过方法之作意、根本之作意。“慧的现观”:即与慧一起,对老死之因的现观、结合、相应生起,意思是“以生为缘而有老死”——此为他所照见。或者,“由如理作意,慧的现观生起”:即通过如理作意与慧,现观生起。意即“当有生时,则有老死”——如此通达了老死之因。此理适用于一切处。显示巴利原文
Yoniso manasikārāti upāyamanasikārena pathamanasikārena. Ahu paññāya abhisamayoti paññāya saddhiṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇassa abhisamayo samavāyo samāyogo ahosi, ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti idaṃ tena diṭṭhanti attho. Atha vā yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāyāti yoniso manasikārena ca paññāya ca abhisamayo ahu. ‘‘Jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇa’’nti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇassa paṭivedho ahosīti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha.
“如是此”:即如此。“集、集”:于十一处中,将行等之集总合而说。“于前所未闻”:即“以无明为缘,行之集生起”。如此,于此前所未闻之法中,或于四圣谛法中。“眼”等皆是智的同义词。此处,智因能见之义为眼,因了知之义为智,因遍知之义为慧,因通达之义为明,因照亮之义为光。应知此乃于四谛中,间杂宣说世间与出世间者。于灭句,亦应以此理了知义趣。第四。显示巴利原文
Iti hidanti evamidaṃ. Samudayo samudayoti ekādasasu ṭhānesu saṅkhārādīnaṃ samudayaṃ sampiṇḍetvā niddisati. Pubbe ananussutesūti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārānaṃ samudayo hotī’’ti. Evaṃ ito pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu, catūsu vā ariyasaccadhammesu. Cakkhuntiādīni ñāṇavevacanāneva. Ñāṇameva hettha dassanaṭṭhena cakkhu, ñātaṭṭhena ñāṇaṃ, pajānanaṭṭhena paññā, paṭivedhanaṭṭhena vijjā, obhāsanaṭṭhena ālokoti vuttaṃ . Taṃ panetaṃ catūsu saccesu lokiyalokuttaramissakaṃ niddiṭṭhanti veditabbaṃ. Nirodhavārepi imināva nayena attho veditabbo. Catutthaṃ.
第五至第十《尸弃经》等注疏显示巴利原文
5-10. Sikhīsuttādivaṇṇanā
5-10 在第五等经中,不应将“尸弃的,比丘们”等词连接为“尸弃的也,比丘们”而理解其义。何以故?因为这些经文并非于同一场合宣说。它们是在不同处所宣说的,但义理全然相同。因为一切菩萨端坐于菩提座时,并没有任何沙门、婆罗门、天、魔或梵天前来告知:“过去的菩萨是通过观照缘起而成佛的。”然而,犹如初劫时天降雨水,之后的雨水都沿着前水所行的道路而流淌;同样地,后来的诸佛也都遵循着过去诸佛所行之道而行。一切菩萨都从入出息念第四禅出定,将智慧投向缘起,顺逆观照缘起而成佛。如此,在七部经中次第阐述了名为“佛陀之观”的内容。显示巴利原文
5-10. Pañcamādīsu sikhissa, bhikkhavetiādīnaṃ padānaṃ ‘‘sikhissapi, bhikkhave’’ti na evaṃ yojetvā attho veditabbo. Kasmā? Ekāsane adesitattā. Nānāṭhānesu hi etāni desitāni, attho pana sabbattha sadisoyeva. Sabbabodhisattānañhi bodhipallaṅke nisinnānaṃ na añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā ācikkhati – ‘‘atīte bodhisattā paccayākāraṃ sammasitvā buddhā jātā’’ti. Yathā pana paṭhamakappikakāle deve vuṭṭhe udakassa gatamaggeneva aparāparaṃ vuṭṭhiudakaṃ gacchati, evaṃ tehi tehi purimabuddhehi gatamaggeneva pacchimā pacchimā gacchanti. Sabbabodhisattā hi ānāpānacatutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā taṃ anulomapaṭilomaṃ sammasitvā buddhā hontīti paṭipāṭiyā sattasu suttesu buddhavipassanā nāma kathitāti.
1. 关于《食经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Āhārasuttavaṇṇanā
11 在《食品》的第一经中,“诸食”(āhārā)是指诸缘。因为诸缘能带来(āharanti)各自的果,所以称为“食”。在“已生的有情……”(bhūtānaṃ vā sattānanti)等句中,“已生者”(bhūtā)指已经出生、已经产生的有情。“求有者”(sambhavesino)指那些寻求、寻找“有”、出生、产生的有情。其中,四生中的卵生和胎生有情,在尚未破开卵壳或子宫膜之前,称为“求有者”;一旦破开卵壳或子宫膜而出,则称为“已生者”。湿生和化生有情,在第一个心识刹那称为“求有者”,从第二个心识刹那起则称为“已生者”。又或者,依他们出生时的威仪(iriyāpatha)而言,只要尚未转变为其他威仪,就称为“求有者”,转变之后则称为“已生者”。又或者说,“已生者”指已经出生、已经完全再生(abhinibbatti)的有情,也就是那些已经出生、已经完全再生,而不再被归类为“还会再有的”的有情,这是对漏尽者而言的。显示巴利原文
11. Āhāravaggassa paṭhame āhārāti paccayā. Paccayā hi āharanti attano phalaṃ, tasmā āhārāti vuccanti. Bhūtānaṃ vā sattānantiādīsu bhūtāti jātā nibbattā. Sambhavesinoti ye sambhavaṃ jātiṃ nibbattiṃ esanti gavesanti. Tattha catūsu yonīsu aṇḍajajalābujā sattā yāva aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca na bhindanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma, aṇḍakosaṃ vatthikosañca bhinditvā bahi nikkhantā bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā opapātikā ca paṭhamacittakkhaṇe sambhavesino nāma, dutiyacittakkhaṇato pabhuti bhūtā nāma. Yena vā iriyāpathena jāyanti, yāva tato aññaṃ na pāpuṇanti, tāva sambhavesino nāma, tato paraṃ bhūtā nāma. Atha vā bhūtāti jātā abhinibbattā, ye bhūtā abhinibbattāyeva, na puna bhavissantīti saṅkhaṃ gacchanti, tesaṃ khīṇāsavānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sambhavamesantīti sambhavesino. Appahīnabhavasaṃyojanattā āyatimpi sambhavaṃ esantānaṃ sekkhaputhujjanānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi imehi dvīhi padehi sabbasatte pariyādiyati. Vāsaddo cettha sampiṇḍanattho, tasmā bhūtānañca sambhavesīnañcāti ayamattho veditabbo.
“为住”(ṭhitiyā),意即为了住(ṭhitatthaṃ);“为资助”(anuggahāya),意即为了资助(anuggahatthaṃ)。这仅是言辞上的差异,两个词的意义实为同一。又或者,“为住”是指依已生起之法的相续不断,为不令其中断;“为资助”是指为令未生起的法得以生起。此二义,于“对已生者,为住与为资助;对求有者,为住与为资助”这两种情形中,皆应如此理解。显示巴利原文
Ṭhitiyāti ṭhitatthaṃ. Anuggahāyāti anuggahatthaṃ. Vacanabhedoyeva cesa, attho pana dvinnampi padānaṃ ekoyeva. Atha vā ṭhitiyāti tassa tassa sattassa uppannadhammānaṃ anuppabandhavasena avicchedāya. Anuggahāyāti anuppannānaṃ uppādāya. Ubhopi cetāni ‘‘bhūtānaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya ca, sambhavesīnaṃ vā ṭhitiyā ceva anuggahāya cā’’ti evaṃ ubhayattha daṭṭhabbānīti.
“段食”(kabaḷīkāro āhāro),指做成团状(kabaḷaṃ katvā)而被吞咽下去的食物,这是对以米饭、粥等为依托物的食素(ojā)的称呼。其中所说的“粗或细”,因依托物的粗性而称为“粗”,因细性而称为“细”。然而就其真实本性而言,段食本身属于细色(sukhumarūpa)所摄,故本质上是细的。它的粗与细,是依着依托品的粗细来理解的。例如,比鳄鱼的食物更细的,是孔雀的食物。据说鳄鱼会吞下石头,石头入腹即化;孔雀则吃蛇、蝎等动物。比孔雀的食物更细的,是鬣狗的食物。据说鬣狗吃被丢弃了三年的角与骨,这些骨头只用唾液湿润一下,便如块根般变软。比鬣狗的食物更细的,是大象的食物,大象吃各种树枝等。比大象的食物更细的,是野牛、大瞪羚等鹿类的食物,据说它们吃各种无实质的树叶等。比这些动物的食物更细的,是牛的食物,牛吃鲜草与干草。比牛的食物更细的,是兔子的食物。比兔子的食物更细的,是鸟的食物。比鸟的食物更细的,是边地居民的食物。比边地居民的食物更细的,是村落首领的食物。显示巴利原文
Kabaḷīkāro āhāroti kabaḷaṃ katvā ajjhoharitabbako āhāro, odanakummāsādivatthukāya ojāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Oḷāriko vā sukhumo vāti vatthuoḷārikatāya oḷāriko, sukhumatāya sukhumo. Sabhāvena pana sukhumarūpapariyāpannattā kabaḷīkāro āhāro sukhumova hoti. Sāpi cassa vatthuto oḷārikatā sukhumatā ca upādāyupādāya veditabbā. Kumbhīlānañhi āhāraṃ upādāya morānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Kumbhīlā kira pāsāṇe gilanti, te ca nesaṃ kucchippattā vilīyanti. Morā sappavicchikādipāṇe khādanti. Morānaṃ pana āhāraṃ upādāya taracchānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira tivassachaḍḍitāni visāṇāni ceva aṭṭhīni ca khādanti, tāni ca nesaṃ kheḷena temitamattāneva kandamūlaṃ viya mudukāni honti. Taracchānaṃ āhāraṃ upādāya hatthīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te hi nānārukkhasākhādayo khādanti. Hatthīnaṃ āhārato gavayagokaṇṇamigādīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te kira nissārāni nānārukkhapaṇṇādīni khādanti. Tesampi āhārato gunnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Te allasukkhatiṇāni khādanti. Tesaṃ āhārato sasānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sasānaṃ āhārato sakuṇānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Sakuṇānaṃ āhārato paccantavāsīnaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Paccantavāsīnaṃ āhārato gāmabhojakānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Gāmabhojakānaṃ āhārato rājarājamahāmattānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Tesampi āhārato cakkavattino āhāro sukhumo. Cakkavattino āhārato bhummānaṃ devānaṃ āhāro sukhumo. Bhummānaṃ devānaṃ āhārato cātumahārājikānaṃ. Evaṃ yāva paranimmitavasavattīnaṃ āhārā vitthāretabbā. Tesaṃ panāhāro sukhumotveva niṭṭhaṃ patto.
这里应注意:在粗的依托品中,食素是微少的、羸弱的;在细的依托品中,食素则是强而有力的。譬如,有人饮下满钵的粥,片刻即感饥饿,欲食任何东西;然而,仅饮一掬熟酥,便终日不思进食。其中,依托物能消除那名为“业生火”的损害,却不能长养;食素则能长养,却不能消除损害。二者合在一起,便能消除损害并长养身心。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca oḷārike vatthusmiṃ ojā parittā hoti dubbalā, sukhume balavatī. Tathā hi ekapattapūrampi yāguṃ pīto muhutteneva jighacchito hoti yaṃkiñcideva khāditukāmo, sappiṃ pana pasatamattaṃ pivitvā divasaṃ abhottukāmo hoti. Tattha vatthu kammajatejasaṅkhātaṃ parissayaṃ vinodeti, na pana sakkoti pāletuṃ. Ojā pana pāleti, na sakkoti parissayaṃ vinodetuṃ. Dve pana ekato hutvā parissayañceva vinodenti pālenti cāti.
“第二是触”(phasso dutiyo),应知眼触等六种触在这四种食中为第二食。这仅是说法上的次序(desanānayo eva cesa),因此不必在此追究“凭何理由称为第二、第三”之类的问题。“意思”(manosañcetanā)即是指思(cetanā)。“识”(viññāṇanti)即指心。如是,世尊在此处依执受(upādiṇṇaka)与非执受(anupādiṇṇaka)合为一类而开示了四种食。因为段食既有执受的,也有非执受的,触等亦是如此。其中,被蛇等吞入的青蛙等,应视为执受的段食。因为青蛙等被蛇等吞下后,即使进入腹中也仍能存活一段时间。当它们还处在执受的部分时,不能成就食的作用;而当它们身体破散、处于非执受的部分时,便成就食的作用了。那时它们也被称为‘执受的食’。但这并不被导师们所认可,注释书(aṭṭhakathā)中便破斥了这种说法,而这样说:‘在这些有情当中,无论是进食的、未进食的,吃的、不吃的,都有一种与结生(paṭisandh显示巴利原文
Phasso dutiyoti cakkhusamphassādi chabbidhopi phasso etesu catūsu āhāresu dutiyo āhāroti veditabbo. Desanānayo eva cesa, tasmā iminā nāma kāraṇena dutiyo tatiyo cāti idamettha na gavesitabbaṃ. Manosañcetanāti cetanāva vuccati. Viññāṇanti cittaṃ. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ ṭhāne upādiṇṇakaanupādiṇṇakavasena ekarāsiṃ katvā cattāro āhāre dassesi. Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upādiṇṇakopi atthi anupādiṇṇakopi, tathā phassādayo. Tattha sappādīhi gilitānaṃ maṇḍūkādīnaṃ vasena upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāro daṭṭhabbo. Maṇḍūkādayo hi sappādīhi gilitā antokucchigatāpi kiñci kālaṃ jīvantiyeva. Te yāva upādiṇṇakapakkhe tiṭṭhanti, tāva āhāratthaṃ na sādhenti . Bhijjitvā pana anupādiṇṇakapakkhe ṭhitā sādhenti. Tadāpi upādiṇṇakāhāroti vuccantīti. Idaṃ pana ācariyānaṃ na ruccatīti aṭṭhakathāyameva paṭikkhipitvā idaṃ vuttaṃ – imesaṃ sattānaṃ khādantānampi akhādantānampi bhuñjantānampi abhuñjantānampi paṭisandhicitteneva sahajātā kammajā ojā nāma atthi, sā yāvapi sattamā divasā pāleti, ayameva upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāroti veditabbo. Tebhūmakavipākavasena pana upādiṇṇakaphassādayo veditabbā, tebhūmakakusalākusalakiriyavasena anupādiṇṇakā. Lokuttarā pana ruḷhīvasena kathitāti.
于此,或有人问:“若‘食’的意义即是‘缘’的意义,那么,在对有情尚有众多其他缘存在的情况下,为何只说这四种食呢?”答曰:因为它们是内在(ajjhattika)相续的殊胜缘。具体而言,对于以段食为食的有情,段食是色身的殊胜缘;触是名身中受(vedanā)的殊胜缘;意思是识(viññāṇa)的殊胜缘;识是名色(nāmarūpa)的殊胜缘。正如世尊所说:“诸比丘,犹如此身依食而住,缘食而存,无食则不存。”(《相应部》5.183)同样地,“缘触而有受,缘行(saṅkhāra)而有识,缘识而有名色。”(《相应部》2.1;《分别论》225)显示巴利原文
Etthāha – ‘‘yadi paccayaṭṭho āhāraṭṭho, atha kasmā aññesupi sattānaṃ paccayesu vijjamānesu imeyeva cattāro vuttā’’ti? Vuccate – ajjhattikasantatiyā visesapaccayattā. Visesapaccayo hi kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkhānaṃ sattānaṃ rūpakāyassa kabaḷīkāro āhāro, nāmakāye vedanāya phasso, viññāṇassa manosañcetanā, nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati, anāhāro no tiṭṭhati (saṃ. ni. 5.183), tathā phassapaccayā vedanā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.1; vibha. 225).
然而,此处,何者为食(āhāro),它又带来何物呢?段食(kabaḷīkārāhāro)带来具有食素第八法(ojaṭṭhamaka)的诸色(rūpa);触食(phassāhāro)带来三种受;意思食(manosañcetanāhāro)带来三种有;识食(viññāṇāhāro)带来结生时的名色。显示巴利原文
Ko panettha āhāro kiṃ āharatīti? Kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati phassāhāro tisso vedanā, manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave, viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpanti.
如何带来呢?先说段食:当食物刚刚放入口中,便已生起八种色法;当它被牙齿嚼碎,正被咽下时,每一粒饭都各自生起八种色法。如此,段食便带来具食素第八法的诸色。触食:能带来乐受的触,在生起时就带来乐受;能带来苦受的触便带来苦受;能带来不苦不乐受的触则带来不苦不乐受。如此,在一切情形下,触食都带来三种受。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro tāva mukhe ṭhapitamatteyeva aṭṭha rūpāni samuṭṭhāpeti, dantavicuṇṇitaṃ pana ajjhohariyamānaṃ ekekaṃ sitthaṃ aṭṭhaṭṭharūpāni samuṭṭhāpetiyeva. Evaṃ kabaḷīkārāhāro ojaṭṭhamakarūpāni āharati. Phassāhāro pana sukhavedanīyo phasso uppajjamānoyeva sukhaṃ vedanaṃ āharati, dukkhavedanīyo dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhavedanīyo adukkhamasukhanti evaṃ sabbathāpi phassāhāro tisso vedanā āharati.
「意思食」:导向欲有的业,带来欲有;导向色有、无色有的业,则带来相应的有。如此,意思食在一切情形下带来三种有。「识食」:在结生刹那,与结生识相应的三个蕴,以及依三组相续的方式生起的三十种色法,识食通过俱生缘等方式将它们带来,故称为食。这样,识食便带来结生时的名色。此处,所谓「意思食带来三有」,正是指有漏的善思或不善思。所谓「识食带来结生名色」,正是指结生识。然而,更一般地说,因为它们能带来相应法及由之等起的法,故应了知它们被称为「食」。显示巴利原文
Manosañcetanāhāro kāmabhavūpagaṃ kammaṃ kāmabhavaṃ āharati, rūpārūpabhavūpagāni taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ. Evaṃ sabbathāpi manosañcetanāhāro tayo bhave āharati. Viññāṇāhāro pana ye ca paṭisandhikkhaṇe taṃsampayuttakā tayo khandhā, yāni ca tisantativasena tiṃsa rūpāni uppajjanti, sahajātādipaccayanayena tāni āharatīti vuccati. Evaṃ viññāṇāhāro paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatīti. Ettha ca ‘‘manosañcetanā tayo bhave āharatī’’ti sāsavakusalākusalacetanāva vuttā. ‘‘Viññāṇaṃ paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ āharatī’’ti paṭisandhiviññāṇameva vuttaṃ. Avisesena pana taṃsampayuttataṃsamuṭṭhānadhammānaṃ āharaṇatopete ‘‘āhārā’’ti veditabbā.
在这四种食中,段食通过支持的方式成就食的作用;触只是通过接触;意思只是通过造作;识只是通过认知。这是什么意思呢?段食只是通过支持——也就是维持色身——令有情得以安住。即使这个身体是由业所生,只要得到段食的支撑,便可安住十年、一百年,乃至尽其寿命。如同什么呢?如同母亲生下的婴儿,由乳母喂以乳汁等来养育,才能长久存活;也如同用支撑物撑持的房屋。对此,曾有如是说:显示巴利原文
Etesu catūsu āhāresu kabaḷīkārāhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti, phasso phusantoyeva manosañcetanā āyūhamānāva, viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva. Kathaṃ? Kabaḷīkārāhāro hi upatthambhentoyeva kāyaṭṭhapanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Kammajanitopi hi ayaṃ kāyo kabaḷīkārāhārena upatthaddho dasapi vassāni vassasatampi yāva āyuparimāṇā tiṭṭhati. Yathā kiṃ ? Yathā mātuyā janitopi dārako dhātiyā thaññādīni pāyetvā posiyamāno ciraṃ tiṭṭhati, yathā ca upatthambhena upatthambhitaṃ gehaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ –
大王,譬如房屋即将倒塌时,用另一根木料加以支撑,这房屋便能维持而不塌。同样地,大王,此身依食而住,缘食而立。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yathā, mahārāja, gehe papatante aññena dārunā upatthambhitaṃ santaṃ eva taṃ gehaṃ na patati. Evameva kho, mahārāja, ayaṃ kāyo āhāraṭṭhitiko āhāraṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
如是,段食以支撑的方式,成就其食的作用。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kabaḷīkāro āhāro upatthambhento āhārakiccaṃ sādheti.
段食在这样成就作用的同时,也成为两种色续的缘:食等起色及所执受色。它对业生色是作为支持者而为缘;对食等起色则是作为生起者而为缘。触则仅仅接触作为乐、苦等事的所缘,通过令乐受等转起而令众生安住。思则是通过造作善或不善业、产生有之根本而令众生安住。识则仅仅通过认知,通过令名色转起而令众生安住。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ sādhentopi ca kabaḷīkāro āhāro dvinnaṃ rūpasantatīnaṃ paccayo hoti āhārasamuṭṭhānassa ca upādiṇṇakassa ca. Kammajānaṃ anupālako hutvā paccayo hoti, āhārasamuṭṭhānānaṃ janako hutvāti. Phasso pana sukhādivatthubhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusantoyeva sukhādivedanāpavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Manosañcetanā kusalākusalakammavasena āyūhamānāyeva bhavamūlanipphādanato sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hoti. Viññāṇaṃ vijānantameva nāmarūpappavattanena sattānaṃ ṭhitiyā hotīti.
然而,在这些食以支持等方式成就食的作用时,应当了知其中有四种恐怖。即:于段食,贪着即是恐怖;于触食,趋近即是恐怖;于意思食,造作即是恐怖;于识食,投生即是恐怖。何以故?若于段食生起贪着,有情为寒热等所迫,为饮食故从事量谷等业,便会遭受诸多痛苦。或有于此教法中出家之人,以行医等邪命求食,不仅现世成为应受呵责者,后世亦如《相应部》所述——‘其僧伽帝燃烧、炽然……’如是等方式,成为沙门饿鬼。以此因由,应知于段食,贪著即是恐怖。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ upatthambhanādivasena āhārakiccaṃ sādhayamānesu panetesu cattāri bhayāni daṭṭhabbāni. Seyyathidaṃ – kabaḷīkārāhāre nikantiyeva bhayaṃ, phasse upagamanameva, manosañcetanāya āyūhanameva, viññāṇe abhinipātoyeva bhayanti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Kabaḷīkārāhāre hi nikantiṃ katvā sītādīnaṃ purakkhatā sattā āhāratthāya muddāgaṇanādikammāni karontā anappakaṃ dukkhaṃ nigacchanti. Ekacce ca imasmiṃ sāsane pabbajitvāpi vejjakammādikāya anesanāya āhāraṃ pariyesantā diṭṭheva dhamme gārayhā honti, samparāyepi, ‘‘tassa saṅghāṭipi ādittā sampajjalitā’’tiādinā lakkhaṇasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 2.218) vuttanayena samaṇapetā honti. Iminā tāva kāraṇena kabaḷīkāre āhāre nikanti eva bhayanti veditabbā.
同样地,趋近触食者,由于贪着触味,便会侵犯他人守护、爱惜之物,诸如妻女、财物等。物主将其人赃并获后,或将其斩成碎块弃于垃圾堆,或将其送交国王。国王随即施以种种刑罚。身坏命终之后,堕于恶趣亦是必然。如此,以贪着触味为根源,现世之恐怖与后世之恐怖悉皆降临。因此,应知于触食,趋近即是恐怖。显示巴利原文
Phassaṃ upagacchantāpi phassassādino paresaṃ rakkhitagopitesu dārādīsu bhaṇḍesu aparajjhanti, te saha bhaṇḍena bhaṇḍasāmikā gahetvā khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ vā chinditvā saṅkārakūṭe chaḍḍenti , rañño vā niyyādenti. Tato te rājā vividhā kammakāraṇā kārāpeti. Kāyassa ca bhedā duggati tesaṃ pāṭikaṅkhā hoti. Iti phassassādamūlakaṃ diṭṭhadhammikampi samparāyikampi bhayaṃ sabbamāgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena phassāhāre upagamanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
至于造作善与不善之业,以此为根,三界一切恐怖便随之而来。以此因由,应知于意思食,造作即是恐怖。显示巴利原文
Kusalākusalakammāyūhane pana tammūlakaṃ tīsu bhavesu bhayaṃ sabbaṃ āgatameva hoti. Iminā kāraṇena manosañcetanāhāre āyūhanameva bhayanti veditabbaṃ.
结生识无论投生到哪一处,便会执取那一处的结生名色而再生。既然此后再生的处所,一切怖畏随之俱起——因为怖畏都以结生为根源——因此应当了知:对于识食,投生即是怖畏。显示巴利原文
Paṭisandhiviññāṇañca yasmiṃ yasmiṃ ṭhāne abhinipatati, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne paṭisandhināmarūpaṃ gahetvāva nibbattati. Tasmiñca nibbatte sabbabhayāni nibbattāniyeva honti tammūlakattāti iminā kāraṇena viññāṇāhāre abhinipātoyeva bhayanti veditabboti.
在“以何为因”等句中,“因”“集”“生”“发生”等词,皆是表示原因的同义词。何以称为“因”?因为结果依之而生,犹如招呼人说“来,取此”而令其执取,故名为“因”。因为结果由之生起、出生、发生,故名为“集”“生”“发生”。此处词义分别是:以何为因(kiṃnidānā)、以何为集(kiṃsamudayā)、以何为生(kiṃjātikā)、以何为发生(kiṃpabhavā)。然而,依前所述之理,渴爱正是它们的因、集、生、发生,故世尊说“以渴爱为因”等。应知一切文句皆可如是理解。显示巴利原文
Kiṃnidānātiādīsu nidānādīni sabbāneva kāraṇavevacanāni. Kāraṇañhi yasmā phalaṃ nideti, ‘‘handa naṃ gaṇhathā’’ti appeti viya, tasmā nidānanti vuccati. Yasmā taṃ tato samudeti jāyati pabhavati, tasmā samudayo jāti pabhavoti vuccati. Ayaṃ panettha padattho – kiṃnidānaṃ etesanti kiṃnidānā. Ko samudayo etesanti kiṃsamudayā. Kā jāti etesanti kiṃjātikā. Ko pabhavo etesanti kiṃpabhavā. Yasmā pana tesaṃ taṇhā yathāvuttena atthena nidānañceva samudayo ca jāti ca pabhavo ca, tasmā ‘‘taṇhānidānā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo.
于此处,这四种食以渴爱为因:应当了知,以结生为起始,这些被称为“有身”的食,其因即是前世的渴爱之力。具体如何?在结生刹那,对于根门完备的有情,依七种相续力而住;对于其他有情,则依次递减的相续力而住,他们所生起的色聚内部皆有食素,这便是以渴爱为因的“执受段食”。而与结生心相应的触、思,加上这结生心本身即是识,它们便是以渴爱为因的“执受触食”“执受意思食”“执受识食”。如此,前世的渴爱作为因,生起了这些结生食。如同结生时那样,此后由第一个有分心刹那等所生的诸食,也应以同样方式理解。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ime cattāro āhārā taṇhānidānāti paṭisandhiṃ ādiṃ katvā attabhāvasaṅkhātānaṃ āhārānaṃ purimataṇhānaṃ vasena nidānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Paṭisandhikkhaṇe tāva paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃ sattānaṃ sattasantativasena, sesānaṃ tato ūnaūnasantativasena uppannarūpabbhantaraṃ jātā ojā atthi, ayaṃ taṇhānidāno upādiṇṇakakabaḷīkārāhāro. Paṭisandhicittasampayuttā pana phassacetanā sayañca cittaṃ viññāṇanti ime taṇhānidānā upādiṇṇaka-phassamanosañcetanā-viññāṇāhārāti evaṃ tāva purimataṇhānidānā paṭisandhikā āhārā. Yathā ca paṭisandhikā, evaṃ tato paraṃ paṭhamabhavaṅgacittakkhaṇādinibbattāpi veditabbā.
然而,世尊不仅了知诸食的因,也了知作为食之因的渴爱的因,乃至了知渴爱之因的受等诸因。因此,世尊以“比丘们,此渴爱以何为因”等理趣,在开示轮回之后,又开示了还灭。而在此处,世尊面向过去进行开示,以过去显示轮回。何以故?正是依于食,才执取了现在的这个有身。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana bhagavā na kevalaṃ āhārānameva nidānaṃ jānāti, āhāranidānabhūtāya taṇhāyapi, taṇhāya nidānānaṃ vedanādīnampi nidānaṃ jānātiyeva, tasmā taṇhā cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, kiṃnidānātiādinā nayena vaṭṭaṃ dassetvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassesi. Imasmiñca pana ṭhāne bhagavā atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvā atītena vaṭṭaṃ dasseti. Kathaṃ? Āhāravasena hi ayaṃ attabhāvo gahito.
渴爱,即是引生此有身之业。而受、触、六处、名色、识等,是为显示那个有身——即安住其中而造作诸业的有身——而说。无明与行,则是引生彼有身之业。如此,于二处说有身,于二处说能引生彼有身之业,简而言之,即是业与业果。世尊通过阐明此二法,面向过去而开示,以过去显示了轮回。显示巴利原文
Taṇhāti imassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ, vedanāphassasaḷāyatananāmarūpaviññāṇāni yasmiṃ attabhāve ṭhatvā kammaṃ āyūhitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ vuttāni, avijjāsaṅkhārā tassattabhāvassa janakaṃ kammaṃ. Iti dvīsu ṭhānesu attabhāvo, dvīsu tassa janakaṃ kammanti saṅkhepena kammañceva kammavipākañcāti, dvepi dhamme dassentena atītābhimukhaṃ desanaṃ katvā atītena vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
于此,不应认为此法开示因未显示未来便不完整;而应从理则的角度,将其视为圆满。譬如,一位明眼人见到一条鳄鱼伏于水面,他从上方观察,看见其颈;从这一面,看见其背;最终,看见尾部近根处。然而,当他向下观察其腹部时,并未见到没入水中的尾尖与四足。他并不会因此便认为“这条鳄鱼不完整”,而是从理则上即将其视为完整。此喻也应作如是解。显示巴利原文
Tatrāyaṃ desanā anāgatassa adassitattā aparipuṇṇāti na daṭṭhabbā. Nayato pana paripuṇṇātveva daṭṭhabbā. Yathā hi cakkhumā puriso udakapiṭṭhe nipannaṃ suṃsumāraṃ disvā tassa parabhāgaṃ olokento gīvaṃ passeyya, orato piṭṭhiṃ, pariyosāne naṅguṭṭhamūlaṃ, heṭṭhā kucchiṃ olokento pana udakagataṃ agganaṅguṭṭhañceva cattāro ca hatthapāde na passeyya, so na ettāvatā ‘‘aparipuṇṇo suṃsumāro’’ti gaṇhāti, nayato pana paripuṇṇotveva gaṇhāti, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
如同卧于水面上的鳄鱼,这是对三界轮回的譬喻。站在岸上的明眼人,则是对瑜伽行者的譬喻。当那人看见卧于水面上的鳄鱼时,就如同瑜伽行者依于食而照见这个有身。随后看见鳄鱼的颈部,就如同瑜伽行者看见此有身的生起之因——渴爱。看见鳄鱼的背部,就如同通过受等方式,看见在那有身中由渴爱所造之业的果报。看见鳄鱼的尾根,就如同看见该有身的生起之因——无明与行。然而,当此人向下观察鳄鱼的腹部,即使没有看到尾尖和四足,他也不会因此就认为“这条鳄鱼是不完整的”,而是依于理则,断定它即是完整的。同样地,在经典中,某些处所没有提及缘起的轮转,不应就此认为“此开示不完整”,而应了知,这是依于理则断定为完整的。再者,在食与渴爱之间有一个连结,渴爱与受之间有一个,识与行之间有一个——如此,世尊开示了具有三个连结、四个扼要的轮回。这是第一。显示巴利原文
Udakapiṭṭhe nipannasuṃsumāro viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Tīre ṭhito cakkhumā puriso viya yogāvacaro. Tena purisena udakapiṭṭhe suṃsumārassa diṭṭhakālo viya yoginā āhāravasena imassattabhāvassa diṭṭhakālo. Parato gīvāya diṭṭhakālo viya imassattabhāvassa janikāya taṇhāya diṭṭhakālo. Piṭṭhiyā diṭṭhakālo viya yasmiṃ attabhāve taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, vedanādivasena tassa diṭṭhakālo. Naṅguṭṭhamūlassa diṭṭhakālo viya tassattabhāvassa janakānaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ diṭṭhakālo. Heṭṭhā kucchiṃ olokentassa pana agganaṅguṭṭhañceva cattāro ca hatthapāde adisvāpi ‘‘aparipuṇṇo suṃsumāro’’ti agahetvā nayato paripuṇṇotveva gahaṇaṃ viya yattha yattha paccayavaṭṭaṃ pāḷiyaṃ na āgataṃ, tattha tattha ‘‘desanā aparipuṇṇā’’ti agahetvā nayato paripuṇṇātveva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha ca āhārataṇhānaṃ antare eko sandhi, taṇhāvedanānaṃ antare eko, viññāṇasaṅkhārānaṃ antare ekoti evaṃ tisandhicatusaṅkhepameva vaṭṭaṃ dassitanti. Paṭhamaṃ.
二、《牟利破群那经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Moḷiyaphaggunasuttavaṇṇanā
12 在第二部经中,世尊就在“或为护持有情”这句话处结束了开示。为何如此?因为那里坐着一位见行者。在彼时的集会中,确实坐着一位名为牟利破群那的比丘,他是一位见行者。当时,导师心中思惟:“他会站出来向我提问,那时我便为他解答。”为了给予他提问的机会,世尊便结束了开示。显示巴利原文
12. Dutiye sambhavesīnaṃ vā anuggahāyāti imasmiṃyeva ṭhāne bhagavā desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Kasmā? Diṭṭhigatikassa nisinnattā. Tassañhi parisati moḷiyaphagguno nāma bhikkhu diṭṭhigatiko nisinno. Atha satthā cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ uṭṭhahitvā maṃ pañhaṃ pucchissati, athassāhaṃ vissajjessāmī’’ti pucchāya okāsadānatthaṃ desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Moḷiyaphaggunoti moḷīti cūḷā vuccati. Yathāha –
世尊曾说:“斩断那以殊胜妙香所熏的发髻,”
释迦族的雄牛将它抛向空中;
帝释用殊胜的宝珠篮接取,
千眼者以头承接。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Chetvāna moḷiṃ varagandhavāsitaṃ Vehāyasaṃ ukkhipi sakyapuṅgavo; Ratanacaṅkoṭavarena vāsavo, Sahassanetto sirasā paṭiggahī’’ti.
他俗家时发髻极为高大,由此得名“牟利破群那”。即便出家后,人们仍以此名称呼他。“说了此”是指:那位比丘为衔接世尊说法脉络,而说出此言:“尊者,究竟是谁啖食那识食?”此句意为:尊者,那个吃下、吞食此识食的,究竟是谁呢?显示巴利原文
Sā tassa gihikāle mahantā ahosi. Tenassa ‘‘moḷiyaphagguno’’ti saṅkhā udapādi. Pabbajitampi naṃ teneva nāmena sañjānanti. Etadavocāti desanānusandhiṃ ghaṭento etaṃ ‘‘ko nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāraṃ āhāretī’’ti vacanaṃ avoca. Tassattho – bhante, ko nāma so, yo etaṃ viññāṇāhāraṃ khādati vā bhuñjati vāti?
为何他不问其他三种食,只问这一种呢?因为他怀有“我知”的执见。他看到众生把食物捏成一大团后吃下,那是段食,于是对段食生起“我知”的执见。他又看到鹧鸪、鹌鹑、孔雀、鸡等依靠与母体接触而生长,便以为“这些众生靠触食生长”。而海龟在合适的时节从大海中出来,在海岸沙间产下卵,以沙覆盖后又潜入大海;那些卵因忆念母亲而不腐烂,他认为它们是以意思食养育,这就成了他的执见。虽然这位长老有这种种执见,但他并非基于这些执见而发问。因为见行者如同疯人一般。犹如疯人拿着篮子走入街巷,不论牛粪、石块、粪便、可食的碎屑,还是合意或不合意的东西,他全都捡起放入篮中。同样地,见行者会问出合理或不合理的问题。不应责备他“为何问这个”,只须在他发问之处制止其执取。因此,世尊没有说“你为何这样问”,而是为了解除他的执取,才说“这个问题不合适”等。显示巴利原文
Kasmā panāyaṃ itare tayo āhāre apucchitvā imameva pucchatīti? Jānāmīti laddhiyā. So hi mahante piṇḍe katvāva kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ bhuñjante passati, tenassa taṃ jānāmīti laddhi. Tittiravaṭṭakamorakukkuṭādayo pana mātusamphassena yāpente disvā ‘‘ete phassāhārena yāpentī’’ti tassa laddhi. Kacchapā pana attano utusamaye mahāsamuddato nikkhamitvā samuddatīre vālikantare aṇḍāni ṭhapetvā vālikāya paṭicchādetvā mahāsamuddameva otaranti. Tāni mātuanussaraṇavasena na pūtīni honti. Tāni manosañcetanāhārena yāpentīti tassa laddhi. Kiñcāpi therassa ayaṃ laddhi, na pana etāya laddhiyā imaṃ pañhaṃ pucchati . Diṭṭhigatiko hi ummattakasadiso. Yathā ummattako pacchiṃ gahetvā antaravīthiṃ otiṇṇo gomayampi pāsāṇampi gūthampi khajjakhaṇḍampi taṃ taṃ manāpampi amanāpampi gahetvā pacchiyaṃ pakkhipati. Evameva diṭṭhigatiko yuttampi ayuttampi pucchati. So ‘‘kasmā imaṃ pucchasī’’ti na niggahetabbo, pucchitapucchitaṭṭhāne pana gahaṇameva nisedhetabbaṃ. Teneva naṃ bhagavā ‘‘kasmā evaṃ pucchasī’’ti avatvā gahitagāhameva tassa mocetuṃ no kallo pañhotiādimāha.
其中,“不适当”即不合适。“我并非说‘食’”:我不说有某个众生或人在“食”。如果我说“食”,那么对于我的提问:“尊者,那识食是哪个法的缘?”即问:尊者,这识食是作为什么的缘?若能这样问,那么这样的解答才是相应的:“识食是未来后有生起的缘。”其中,“识食”是指结生心;而“未来的后有生起”,则是指与那个识一同生起的名色。当那个称为“后有生起”的名色产生后,便有了六处,这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Tattha no kalloti ayutto. Āhāretīti ahaṃ na vadāmīti ahaṃ koci satto vā puggalo vā āhāretīti na vadāmi. Āhāretīti cāhaṃ vadeyyanti yadi ahaṃ āhāretīti vadeyyaṃ. Tatrassa kallo pañhoti tasmiṃ mayā evaṃ vutte ayaṃ pañho yutto bhaveyya. Kissa nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāroti, bhante, ayaṃ viññāṇāhāro katamassa dhammassa paccayoti attho. Tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇanti tasmiṃ evaṃ pucchite pañhe imaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ yuttaṃ ‘‘viññāṇāhāro āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā paccayo’’ti. Ettha ca viññāṇāhāroti paṭisandhicittaṃ. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti teneva viññāṇena sahuppannanāmarūpaṃ. Tasmiṃ bhūte sati saḷāyatananti tasmiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattisaṅkhāte nāmarūpe jāte sati saḷāyatanaṃ hotīti attho.
“以六处为缘而有触”:在此,世尊也为进一步的提问留出余地,以此结束开示。因为见行者无法提出新的问题,只会执取已被指明的部分来发问,所以世尊才给予他机会。至于所有语句的含义,都应按前面所说的方法来理解。“尊者,谁存在?”——他为什么不这么问呢?因为见行者抱着“所谓众生,即已生起的存在”这种执见,所以不问与自己的执见相冲突的问题。此外,也因为许多地方已经说过“以此为缘而有此”这样的话,他已然领会,所以也不问。导师心想:“此人即使再问很多,也不会满足,只会问些空洞无实的问题。”于是从这时起,便将开示连贯地宣说出来。“只是六”等等:在开示承接之处,他紧扣此句,将开示次第展开。在这部经中,识与名色之间有一处衔接,受与爱之间有一处衔接,有与生之间有一处衔接。第二。显示巴利原文
Saḷāyatanapaccayāphassoti idhāpi bhagavā uttari pañhassa okāsaṃ dento desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Diṭṭhigatiko hi navapucchaṃ uppādetuṃ na sakkoti, niddiṭṭhaṃ niddiṭṭhaṃyeva pana gaṇhitvā pucchati, tenassa bhagavā okāsaṃ adāsi. Attho panassa sabbapadesu vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. ‘‘Ko nu kho, bhante, bhavatī’’ti kasmā na pucchati? Diṭṭhigatikassa hi satto nāma bhūto nibbattoyevāti laddhi, tasmā attano laddhiviruddhaṃ idanti na pucchati. Apica idappaccayā idaṃ idappaccayā idanti bahūsu ṭhānesu kathitattā saññattiṃ upagato, tenāpi na pucchati. Satthāpi ‘‘imassa bahuṃ pucchantassāpi titti natthi, tucchapucchameva pucchatī’’ti ito paṭṭhāya desanaṃ ekābaddhaṃ katvā desesi. Channaṃ tvevāti yato paṭṭhāya desanāruḷhaṃ, tameva gahetvā desanaṃ vivaṭṭento evamāha. Imasmiṃ pana sutte viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānaṃ antare eko, bhavajātīnaṃ antare ekoti. Dutiyaṃ.
《沙门婆罗门经》注释显示巴利原文
3. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
13 第十三。在第三部经中,“沙门、婆罗门”指的是那些不能通达诸圣谛的外道沙门、婆罗门。“不了知老死”等语句:不了知老死,是就苦圣谛而言;不了知老死集,是指伴随爱而有生,生就是老死的集,是就集圣谛而言;不了知老死灭,是就灭圣谛而言;不了知道,是就道圣谛而言。不了知生,是就苦圣谛而言;不了知生集,是指伴随爱而有有,有就是生的集,是就集圣谛而言。如此,将集与爱连结起来,一切语句的含义都应依四圣谛来理解。“沙门义、婆罗门义”:在此,圣道即是沙门义和婆罗门义;而两者的义,应知就是指圣果。就这样,世尊在这部经中,于十一处宣说了四圣谛。第三。显示巴利原文
13. Tatiye samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vāti saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthā bāhirakasamaṇabrāhmaṇā. Jarāmaraṇaṃ nappajānantītiādīsu jarāmaraṇaṃ na jānanti dukkhasaccavasena , jarāmaraṇasamudayaṃ na jānanti saha taṇhāya jāti jarāmaraṇassa samudayoti samudayasaccavasena, jarāmaraṇanirodhaṃ na jānanti nirodhasaccavasena, paṭipadaṃ na jānanti maggasaccavasena. Jātiṃ na jānanti dukkhasaccavasena, jātisamudayaṃ na jānanti saha taṇhāya bhavo jātisamudayoti samudayasaccavasena. Evaṃ saha taṇhāya samudayaṃ yojetvā sabbapadesu catusaccavasena attho veditabbo. Sāmaññatthaṃ vā brahmaññatthaṃ vāti ettha ariyamaggo sāmaññañceva brahmaññañca. Ubhayatthāpi pana attho nāma ariyaphalaṃ veditabbaṃ. Iti bhagavā imasmiṃ sutte ekādasasu ṭhānesu cattāri saccāni kathesīti. Tatiyaṃ.
《第二沙门婆罗门经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
14 第十四。在第四部经中,详细解说了“这些法具体指哪些法”之后,依随有能力通达开示之人的心意,宣说了“不了知这些法”等语句。其余部分与前面所说相似。第四。显示巴利原文
14. Catutthe ime dhamme katame dhammeti ettakaṃ papañcaṃ katvā kathitaṃ, desanaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthānaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayena ime dhamme nappajānantītiādi vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ purimasadisameva. Catutthaṃ.
《迦旃延姓经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Kaccānagottasuttavaṇṇanā
15 第五部经中,“正见”与“正见者”:他将智者、天、人在种种场合所说的正见,概括为两个词语来问。“依于二者”:意思是依于两部分。“大部分”:此词指除圣者以外的其余大众。“有”:指常见。“无”:指断见。“世间集”:世间即行世间,此处指它的产生。“以正慧观者”:正慧即与观相应的道慧,以此慧观照的人。“世间中无”:在行世间中,于种种法生起显现时,若认为“这些都不存在”而生断见,此事不会发生。“世间灭”:指诸行的坏灭。“世间中有”:在行世间中,于种种法坏灭时,若认为“这些都有”而生常见,此事不会发生。显示巴利原文
15. Pañcame sammādiṭṭhi sammādiṭṭhīti yaṃ paṇḍitā devamanussā tesu tesu ṭhānesu sammādassanaṃ vadanti, sabbampi taṃ dvīhi padehi saṅkhipitvā pucchati. Dvayanissitoti dve koṭṭhāse nissito. Yebhuyyenāti iminā ṭhapetvā ariyapuggale sesamahājanaṃ dasseti. Atthitanti sassataṃ. Natthitanti ucchedaṃ. Lokasamudayanti loko nāma saṅkhāraloko, tassa nibbatti. Sammappaññāya passatoti sammāpaññā nāma savipassanā maggapaññā, tāya passantassāti attho. Yā loke natthitāti saṅkhāraloke nibbattesu dhammesu paññāyantesveva yā natthīti ucchedadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hotīti attho. Lokanirodhanti saṅkhārānaṃ bhaṅgaṃ. Yāloke atthitāti saṅkhāraloke bhijjamānesu dhammesu paññāyantesveva yā atthīti sassatadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya , sā na hotīti attho.
此外,“世间集”即顺缘起。“世间灭”即逆缘起。当一个人观察世间所依(即缘)时,由于见到缘不灭,从而见到缘所生亦不灭;若此时以为“这是无”而生断见,此事不会发生。同样,当观察缘灭时,由于见到缘灭而缘所生亦灭;若此时以为“这是有”而生常见,此事也不会发生。以上含义亦包含于此句中。显示巴利原文
Apica lokasamudayanti anulomapaccayākāraṃ. Lokanirodhanti paṭilomapaccayākāraṃ. Lokanissaye passantassāpi hi paccayānaṃ anucchedena paccayuppannassa anucchedaṃ passato yā natthīti ucchedadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hoti. Paccayanirodhaṃ passantassāpi paccayanirodhena paccayuppannanirodhaṃ passato yā atthīti sassatadiṭṭhi uppajjeyya, sā na hotīti ayampettha attho.
“依著、取、倾向而被系缚”:即被依著、被取、被倾向所系缚。其中,“依著”有两种:爱著与见著。“取”等亦同此理。因为爱和见以“这是我的”、“这是我”等方式,亲近、执取三界诸法,故称为“依著”。又因为它们对这些法执取不舍、深心倾向,故也称为“取”和“倾向”。整个世间正是被这些爱和见所系缚的。因此,经中说“依著、取、倾向而被系缚”。显示巴利原文
Upayupādānābhinivesavinibandhoti upayehi ca upādānehi ca abhinivesehi ca vinibandho. Tattha upayāti dve upayā taṇhupayo ca diṭṭhupayo ca. Upādānādīsupi eseva nayo. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo hi yasmā ahaṃ mamantiādīhi ākārehi tebhūmakadhamme upenti upagacchanti, tasmā upayāti vuccanti. Yasmā pana te dhamme upādiyanti ceva abhinivisanti ca, tasmā upādānāti ca abhinivesāti ca vuccanti. Tāhi cāyaṃ loko vinibandho. Tenāha ‘‘upayupādānābhinivesavinibandho’’ti.
「而此」:即指对于那种依著与取,这位圣弟子……「心之住立处」:指作为心的安住处与依托处。「倾向与随眠」:指成为强烈执取倾向与潜伏烦恼的东西。因为不善心即扎根于贪爱与邪见之中,而贪爱与邪见又不断地执取那不善心,并如睡眠般潜伏其中。因此,贪爱与邪见这两者,便被称为心的住立处,亦被称为倾向与随眠。「不接近」:即不再去亲近。「不取」:即不再去抓取。「不立为我所」:即不再执取,也就是不再认为“这是我的我”。他清楚地了知“唯是苦”——除了五取蕴的集合体外,别无其他。「不疑」:他不会生起这样的疑惑:“唯有苦生起,唯有苦灭去,这里根本不存在一个可称为众生的东西。”「不犹豫」:即不会生起犹豫不决的心。显示巴利原文
Tañcāyanti tañca upayupādānaṃ ayaṃ ariyasāvako. Cetaso adhiṭṭhānanti cittassa patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Abhinivesānusayanti abhinivesabhūtañca anusayabhūtañca. Taṇhādiṭṭhīsu hi akusalacittaṃ patiṭṭhāti, tā ca tasmiṃ abhinivisanti ceva anusenti ca, tasmā tadubhayaṃ cetaso adhiṭṭhānaṃ abhinivesānusayanti ca āha. Na upetīti na upagacchati. Na upādiyatīti na gaṇhāti. Nādhiṭṭhātīti na adhiṭṭhāti, kinti? Attā meti. Dukkhamevāti pañcupādānakkhandhamattameva. Na kaṅkhatīti ‘‘dukkhameva uppajjati, dukkhaṃ nirujjhati, na añño ettha satto nāma atthī’’ti kaṅkhaṃ na karoti. Na vicikicchatīti na vicikicchaṃ uppādeti.
「不依他」:并非依靠他人,也不是由于他人的证悟;在此处,纯然是凭借他自己亲证的智慧。「迦旃延,到此为正见」:如此,因舍弃了“有众生”之想,达到这样的程度,即名为正见,这是就“混合的正见”而说。「这是一端」:这是第一个极端的、低劣的见解,也就是常见。「这是第二端」:这是第二个极端的见解,认为“一切都不存在”的断灭见,是另一种低劣的极端,也就是断见。其余文句于此皆浅显易懂。第五个问题结束。显示巴利原文
Aparappaccayāti na parappaccayena, aññassa apattiyāyetvā attapaccakkhañāṇamevassa ettha hotīti. Ettāvatākho, kaccāna, sammādiṭṭhi hotīti evaṃ sattasaññāya pahīnattā ettakena sammādassanaṃ nāma hotīti missakasammādiṭṭhiṃ āha. Ayameko antoti esa eko nikūṭanto lāmakanto paṭhamakaṃ sassataṃ. Ayaṃ dutiyoti esa dutiyo sabbaṃ natthīti uppajjanakadiṭṭhisaṅkhāto nikūṭanto lāmakanto dutiyako ucchedoti attho. Sesamettha uttānamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.
《说法者经注》显示巴利原文
6. Dhammakathikasuttavaṇṇanā
16 第六个问题。「为厌离」:是为了厌离的目的。「为离欲」:是为了离染的目的。「为灭」:是为了灭尽的目的。「是行道者」:此处应知,从持戒开始,直至阿拉汉道,皆称为行道者。「法随法行道者」:意思是,所行道为与出世间涅槃法相随顺的修行道。「成为随法」:意思是成为随顺、相应之法。「由于厌离、离欲、灭」:即由厌离、由离欲、由灭尽。「无取著而解脱」:不执取任何一法,从四种取中完全解脱出来。「见法涅槃者」:指的是于此现法即证涅槃的人。「值得被称说」:意思是,他堪能这样被称说,这是恰如其分的;这是它的含义。如此,在这里以单一方式说明了说法者的提问,又以两种方式予以区分,开示了有学与无学的阶段。第六个问题结束。显示巴利原文
16. Chaṭṭhe nibbidāyāti nibbindanatthāya. Virāgāyāti virajjanatthāya. Nirodhāyāti nirujjhanatthāya. Paṭipanno hotīti ettha sīlato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā paṭipannoti veditabbo. Dhammānudhammappaṭipannoti lokuttarassa nibbānadhammassa anudhammabhūtaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipanno. Anudhammabhūtanti anurūpasabhāvabhūtaṃ. Nibbidā virāgā nirodhāti nibbidāya ceva virāgena ca nirodhena ca. Anupādā vimuttoti catūhi upādānehi kiñci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvā vimutto. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānappattoti diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānappatto. Alaṃ vacanāyāti, evaṃ vattabbataṃ arahati, yutto anucchavikoti attho . Evamettha ekena nayena dhammakathikassa pucchā kathitā, dvīhi taṃ visesetvā sekkhāsekkhabhūmiyo niddiṭṭhāti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《裸形迦叶经注》显示巴利原文
7. Acelakassapasuttavaṇṇanā
17 第七个问题。「裸形者迦叶」:从外形上看,他是赤身裸体的裸形者,名叫迦叶。「从远处」:他看到世尊被大比丘僧团围绕着走来,远远地便看见了。「某件事」:指某个理由、某个原因。「机会」:指回答问题的时间、时机。「屋内」:在“我不支肘坐在屋内”这条学处中,指住所的内部;在“我将垂下眼帘行走于屋内”这条学处中,则指从门槛开始进入村落之内的范围。此处所指也是后者。「当你想问的时候」:即当你想发问的时候。显示巴利原文
17. Sattame acelo kassapoti liṅgena acelo niccelo, nāmena kassapo. Dūratovāti mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena parivutaṃ āgacchantaṃ dūrato eva addasa. Kiñcideva desanti kiñcideva kāraṇaṃ. Okāsanti pañhabyākaraṇassa khaṇaṃ kālaṃ. Antaragharanti ‘‘na pallatthikāya antaraghare nisīdissāmī’’ti ettha antonivesanaṃ antaragharaṃ. ‘‘Okkhittacakkhu antaraghare gamissāmī’’ti ettha indakhīlato paṭṭhāya antogāmo. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Yadākaṅkhasīti yaṃ icchasi.
然而,世尊虽想说,为何却要一连拒绝三次呢?这是为了让他们生起恭敬心。因为那些怀有恶见的人,如果很快为他们说法,他们不会生起恭敬,反而会想:“要接近沙门乔达摩、向他提问,实在太容易了,他只是一被问就立刻说法。”他们也不会信受这样的话。但是,当被拒绝两三次之后,他们就会生起恭敬心,会想:“要接近沙门乔达摩、提出问题,真是难遇啊。”这样,当他们恳请到第三次,世尊才说法时,他们才会认真倾听、才会信受。如此,世尊知道“此时他会认真听、会信受了”,便让他们恳请三次,然后才说法。再者,好比一位良医在熬制油或糖浆时,会等待嫩熟或硬熟的火候,他不会错过那个恰到好处的时机才将药取出。同样地,世尊在等待众生智慧的成熟,他知道“经过这样一段时间,这个人的智慧就会成熟”,因此才让他们恳请三次。显示巴利原文
Kasmā pana bhagavā kathetukāmo yāvatatiyaṃ paṭikkhipīti? Gāravajananatthaṃ. Diṭṭhigatikā hi khippaṃ kathiyamāne gāravaṃ na karonti, ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitumpi pucchitumpi sukaraṃ, pucchitamatteyeva kathetī’’ti vacanampi na saddahanti. Dve tayo vāre paṭikkhitte pana gāravaṃ karonti, ‘‘samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamitumpi pañhaṃ pucchitumpi dukkara’’nti yāvatatiyaṃ yācite kathiyamānaṃ sussūsanti saddahanti. Iti bhagavā ‘‘ayaṃ sussūsissati saddahissatī’’ti yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpetvā kathesi. Apica yathā bhisakko telaṃ vā phāṇitaṃ vā pacanto mudupākakharapākānaṃ pākakālaṃ āgamayamāno pākakālaṃ anatikkamitvāva otāreti. Evaṃ bhagavā sattānaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ āgamayamāno ‘‘ettakena kālena imassa ñāṇaṃ paripākaṃ gamissatī’’ti ñatvāva yāvatatiyaṃ yācāpesi.
「莫如此说,迦叶!」意思是:迦叶,你不应这样说。因为说“苦是自作”是不正确的,这表明:并没有一个所谓的“我”来造作苦。对于“他作”的说法,也是同样的道理。「无因生」是指没有原因、随意而生的。当迦叶被这样问时,他为什么这么说呢?据说他是这样想的:“当他问我‘苦是自作’这些问题时,他却说‘莫如此说’;当我说‘没有’时,他又说‘有’;当我问‘难道乔达摩尊师不知不见苦吗?’他又说‘我确实知道’。也许是我不该这样问?”于是他从头检讨自己的提问,就这样问了。至于“请为我解说,尊者!世尊!”在这里,迦叶对导师生起了恭敬心,所以他不再称“尊师”,而称“世尊”。显示巴利原文
Mā hevaṃ, kassapāti, kassapa, mā evaṃ bhaṇi. Sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti hi vattuṃ na vaṭṭati, attā nāma koci dukkhassa kārako natthīti dīpeti. Paratopi eseva nayo. Adhiccasamuppannanti akāraṇena yadicchāya uppannaṃ. Iti puṭṭho samānoti kasmā evamāha? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ ‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’ntiādinā puṭṭho ‘mā heva’nti vadati, ‘natthī’ti puṭṭho ‘atthī’ti vadati. ‘Bhavaṃ gotamo dukkhaṃ na jānāti na passatī’ti puṭṭho ‘jānāmi khvāha’nti vadati. Kiñci nu kho mayā virajjhitvā pucchito’’ti mūlato paṭṭhāya attano pucchameva sodhento evamāha. Ācikkhatu ca me, bhante, bhagavāti idha satthari sañjātagāravo ‘‘bhava’’nti avatvā ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vadati.
“他造作”等语,是为了破斥“苦是自作”的邪见而说。此处的“sato”一词虽为主格,实表位格之义,故应如此理解:“他造作,他感受”——迦叶,正因为最初便存在此种说法,后来才产生了“苦是自作”的邪见。这里的“苦”指轮回之苦。至于“这样说时”(itīti)中的“iti”,与前文的“等”(ādi)及紧随其后的“常见”一词相关联。“宣示、执取”是此处需补充的隐含文句,完整的意思是:若如此说,则从一开始便宣示常见、执取常见。何以故?因为这种见地会导致执取造作者与感受者为同一,从而落入常见。显示巴利原文
So karotītiādi, ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca satoti idaṃ bhummatthe sāmivacanaṃ, tasmā evamattho daṭṭhabbo – so karoti so paṭisaṃvedayatīti kho, kassapa, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati pacchā sayaṃkataṃ dukkhanti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Ettha ca dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ adhippetaṃ. Iti vadanti etassa purimena ādisaddena anantarena ca sassatasaddena sambandho hoti. ‘‘Dīpeti gaṇhātī’’ti ayaṃ panettha pāṭhaseso. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – iti evaṃ vadanto āditova sassataṃ dīpeti, sassataṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, kārakañca vedakañca ekameva gaṇhantaṃ etaṃ sassataṃ upagacchatīti attho.
“他人造作”等语,则是为了破斥“苦是他作”的邪见而说。而“从最初就存在”一句,此处也应当引用。其含义为:“他人造作,他人感受”——迦叶,正因为最初就存在这样的说法,到后来,当某人被与断见相应的感受所侵袭、所恼害而处于这种状态时,便会产生“造作者在此灭尽,他所造之苦由他人感受”的断见,进而形成“苦是他作”的邪见。至于“如此说”等处,应按前文所述的结构来理解。连贯的意旨是:若如此说,则从一开始便宣示断灭见、执取断灭见。何以故?因其见地导致此结果,执取这断灭见,即落入断灭见。显示巴利原文
Añño karotītiādi pana ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ādito sato’’ti idaṃ pana idhāpi āharitabbaṃ. Ayañhettha attho – añño karoti añño paṭisaṃvediyatīti kho pana, kassapa, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati, pacchā ‘‘kārako idheva ucchijjati, tena kataṃ añño paṭisaṃvediyatī’’ti evaṃ uppannāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ sampayuttāya vedanāya abhitunnassa viddhassa sato ‘‘paraṃkataṃ dukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hotīti. Iti vadantiādi vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – evañca vadanto āditova ucchedaṃ dīpeti, ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ ucchedaṃ upagacchatīti attho.
“此二者”即被称为常见与断灭见的两种极端。如来不趋近、不舍弃、不执取此二者,立于中道而说法,即以中道宣说法。若问是何法?即“无明缘行”等。其中,如来唯从因以显示果,亦由因之息灭以示果之息灭,全然未指出任何造作者或感受者。至此,其余问题也都被否定了。须知,正是以“不接近两种极端”一语,否定了第三个问题;而以“无明缘行”的阐述,否定了“无因生”及“不知”的主张。显示巴利原文
Ete teti ye sassatucchedasaṅkhāte ubho ante (anupagamma tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, ete te, kassapa, ubho ante) anupagamma pahāya anallīyitvā majjhena tathāgato dhammaṃ deseti, majjhimāya paṭipadāya ṭhito desetīti attho. Kataraṃ dhammanti ce? Yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti. Ettha hi kāraṇato phalaṃ, kāraṇanirodhena cassa nirodho dīpito, na koci kārako vā vedako vā niddiṭṭho. Ettāvatā sesapañhā paṭisedhitā honti. Ubho ante anupagammāti iminā hi tatiyapañho paṭikkhitto. Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāti iminā adhiccasamuppannatā ceva ajānanañca paṭikkhittanti veditabbaṃ.
“愿我获得”这句话,是迦叶渴望于世尊座下获得比丘身份时所说。那时,世尊忆及《犍度》中所制定的外道别住规定:凡先前为外道者,处于沙弥位时,应这样求取——“尊者!我名某某,先前为外道,今于此法律中希求具足戒。尊者!我向僧团乞求四个月的别住。”并履行别住。世尊正是依此规定,才说“迦叶!凡先前为外道者……”这番话。这里说“出家”,是顺应语言表述的方便。实则,即使不经过别住,亦可出家。然而,希求具足戒者,在圆满完成八项义务之前,不可过早进入村落等处,方能进行别住。“心已确立”,是指因圆满履行八项义务而心生喜悦。这是此处的略说。详细内容,则应依《一切善见》律注中《出家犍度》的解释(《大品》注释86)所述的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Labheyyanti idaṃ so bhagavato santike bhikkhubhāvaṃ patthayamāno āha. Atha bhagavā yonena khandhake titthiyaparivāso (mahāva. 86) paññatto, yaṃ aññatitthiyapubbo sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, itthannāmo aññatitthiyapubbo imasmiṃ dhammavinaye ākaṅkhāmi upasampadaṃ. Svāhaṃ, bhante, saṅghaṃ cattāro māse parivāsaṃ yācāmī’’tiādinā nayena samādiyitvā parivasati, taṃ sandhāya yo kho, kassapa, aññatitthiyapubbotiādimāha. Tattha pabbajjanti vacanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vuttaṃ. Aparivasitvāyeva hi pabbajjaṃ labhati. Upasampadatthikena pana nātikālena gāmappavesanādīni aṭṭha vattāni pūrentena parivasitabbaṃ. Āraddhacittāti aṭṭhavattapūraṇena tuṭṭhacittā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato panesa titthiyaparivāso samantapāsādikāya vinayaṭṭhakathāya pabbajjakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 86) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
“还有,我……”是此处的经文,他处则作“还有,我在这里……”。“了知人的差别”,即了知个体的种种不同。他将“此人应别住,此人不应别住”向我清楚揭示。于是迦叶心想:“啊!佛陀的教法真是奇妙!在其中如此研磨、筛选,唯取合适者,舍弃不合适者。”由此,他对出家生起了更强烈的意欲,便说:“若蒙开许,尊者……”等等。世尊知其意强烈,亦知迦叶实不需别住,便吩咐一位比丘:“去吧,比丘!为迦叶沐浴、剃度,令其出家,然后带来。”那位比丘照办,为他出家后,带回世尊面前。世尊于僧众中坐下,亲自为他授具足戒。因此经中说:“裸形者迦叶得于世尊座下出家,得受具足戒。”至于“受具足戒未久……”等其余内容,即如《婆罗门相应》(《相应部》1.187)中所说。这是第七个问题。显示巴利原文
Apica mayāti ayamettha pāṭho, aññattha pana ‘‘apica metthā’’ti. Puggalavemattatā viditāti puggalanānattaṃ viditaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ puggalo parivāsāraho, ayaṃ na parivāsāraho’’ti idaṃ mayhaṃ pākaṭanti dasseti. Tato kassapo cintesi – ‘‘aho acchariyaṃ buddhasāsanaṃ, yattha evaṃ ghaṃsitvā koṭṭetvā yuttameva gaṇhanti, ayuttaṃ chaḍḍentī’’ti. Tato suṭṭhutaraṃ pabbajjāya sañjātussāho sace, bhantetiādimāha. Atha bhagavā tassa tibbacchandataṃ viditvā ‘‘na kassapo parivāsaṃ arahatī’’ti aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi – ‘‘gaccha, bhikkhu, kassapaṃ nahāpetvā pabbājetvā ānehī’’ti. So tathā katvā taṃ pabbājetvā bhagavato santikaṃ agamāsi. Bhagavā gaṇe nisīditvā upasampādesi. Tena vuttaṃ alattha kho acelo kassapo bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, alattha upasampadanti. Acirūpasampannotiādi sesaṃ brāhmaṇasaṃyutte (saṃ. ni. 1.187) vuttamevāti. Sattamaṃ.
第八 丁跋路迦经注释显示巴利原文
8. Timbarukasuttavaṇṇanā
18 在第八经中,“那受”等语,是为了遮破“苦乐自作”的邪见而说。这里的“sato”一词,同样形为属格,义则为处格。释义如下:倘若一开始就以为“那受,即是那感受者”——丁跋路迦!那么“苦乐是自作”的见解便会生起。因为如此,受便成了由受所造作的。而这种说法,等同于承认此受在过去也已存在,这便是在宣扬常见、执取常见。何以故?持此见解,即陷此过,落入常见。“我不这样说”,意即:我不说“那受即是那感受者”,亦不说“苦乐是自作”这样的话。显示巴利原文
18. Aṭṭhame sā vedanātiādi ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti laddhiyā nisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Etthāpi satoti bhummattheyeva sāmivacanaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ atthadīpanā – ‘‘sā vedanā, so vediyatī’’ti kho, timbaruka, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Evañhi sati vedanāya eva vedanā katā hoti. Evañca vadanto imissā vedanāya pubbepi atthitaṃ anujānāti, sassataṃ dīpeti sassataṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ sassataṃ upagacchatīti attho. Purimañhi atthaṃ sandhāyevetaṃ bhagavatā vuttaṃ bhavissati, tasmā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ taṃ yojetvāvassa attho dīpito. Evampāhaṃ na vadāmīti ahaṃ ‘‘sā vedanā, so vediyatī’’ti evampi na vadāmi. ‘‘Sayaṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti evampi na vadāmīti attho.
「受是一者,感受者是另一者」等语句,是为了否定「苦乐是他作」这一邪见而说。在此,亦应如此释义:丁跋路咖!若一开始便认为「受是一者,感受者是另一者」,那么,在前一种情形中作为造作者的那个受便已灭尽。而当此人被这种与生起的断见相应、结合的受所折磨时,便会生起「苦乐是他作」的见解。作此说者,是在表明造作者已灭尽,而由另一者执取了结生,这便是在宣说断灭、执取断灭。何以故?因为他的这种见解即是「这是其他」,即他趋入此断灭,这是其含义。在此,这些文句于注释书中亦被引述而连缀解释。这部经讨论了与受相关的苦乐,而这里所说的苦乐,仅指由业报产生的苦乐。第八篇注释结束。显示巴利原文
Aññā vedanātiādi ‘‘paraṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti laddhiyā paṭisedhanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Idhāpi ayaṃ atthayojanā –‘‘aññā vedanā añño vediyatī’’ti kho, timbaruka, ādimhiyeva evaṃ sati pacchā yā purimapakkhe kārakavedanā, sā ucchinnā. Tāya pana kataṃ añño vediyatīti evaṃ uppannāya ucchedadiṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ sampayuttāya vedanāya abhitunnassa sato ‘‘paraṃkataṃ sukhadukkha’’nti ayaṃ laddhi hoti. Evañca vadanto kārako ucchinno, aññena paṭisandhi gahitāti ucchedaṃ dīpeti, ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Kasmā? Tassa hi taṃ dassanaṃ etaṃ pareti, etaṃ ucchedaṃ upagacchatīti attho. Idhāpi hi imāni padāni aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āharitvā yojitāneva. Imasmiṃ sutte vedanāsukhadukkhaṃ kathitaṃ. Tañca kho vipākasukhadukkhameva vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九 愚者与贤者经注释显示巴利原文
9. Bālapaṇḍitasuttavaṇṇanā
19 在第九篇中,「被无明所障碍」的意思,即是指被无明所障碍的人。「这个身体就这样生起」的意思是:正因这个身体被无明所障碍,且与渴爱相结合,它才得以产生。「而且这个身体」,指的是他自己这个有意识的身体;「以及外在的名色」,则是指外界其他众生的有意识的身体。无论自他的这一层含义,亦应由五蕴、六处来阐明。因此,「这便是所谓的“二法”」,意思是:如此,这便成为一对二法。「因为有了这二法,触便生起」,在其他地方,是基于眼与色等二法而说眼触等,但在此处,则是指内在与外在的处。据说这便叫作「大二法」。「即是六触处」,意思就是此六处是触的处所,也就是触的因缘。「被那些触所接触的人」,是指被由这些作为因缘的处所生起的触所接触。「由其中任何一种」,在此,应理解为圆满而说的「任何一种」。「在此」,是指在愚者与贤者的身体如何产生等这一主题上。「什么称作过分的努力」,就是问:怎样的用功才算过度?显示巴利原文
19. Navame avijjānīvaraṇassāti avijjāya nivāritassa. Evamayaṃ kāyo samudāgatoti evaṃ avijjāya nivāritattā taṇhāya ca sampayuttattāyeva ayaṃ kāyo nibbatto. Ayañceva kāyoti ayañcassa attano saviññāṇako kāyo. Bahiddhā ca nāmarūpanti bahiddhā ca paresaṃ saviññāṇako kāyo. Attano ca parassa ca pañcahi khandhehi chahi āyatanehi cāpi ayaṃ attho dīpetabbova. Itthetaṃ dvayanti evametaṃ dvayaṃ. Dvayaṃ paṭicca phassoti aññattha cakkhurūpādīni dvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā, idha pana ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Mahādvayaṃ nāma kiretaṃ. Saḷevāyatanānīti saḷeva phassāyatanāni phassakāraṇāni. Yehi phuṭṭhoti yehi kāraṇabhūtehi āyatanehi uppannena phassena phuṭṭho. Aññatarenāti ettha paripuṇṇavasena aññataratā veditabbā. Tatrāti tasmiṃ bālapaṇḍitānaṃ kāyanibbattanādimhi. Ko adhippayāsoti ko adhikapayogo.
「以世尊为根本」的意思:因为世尊是这些法的根本,所以这些法被称为「以世尊为根本」。这是在说:尊者!我们这些法,先前是由迦叶正自觉者所创立的。在他般涅槃之后,在佛灭后的一段无佛时期里,没有任何沙门或婆罗门有能力再开示这些法。而如今,这些法是由世尊您为我们开示的。我们正是依靠世尊您,才能够了解、证悟这些法。因此,尊者!我们的这些法,是「以世尊为根本」的。「以世尊为导引者」的意思:世尊是诸法的引导者、调御者与善巧的带领者,他如实依每一法的特性,分别掌握其具体称谓,并向我们指示出来。因此,这些法被称为「以世尊为导引者」。「以世尊为依止处」的意思:是指四地的法在进入一切知智的领域时,都依止于世尊。所以说「以世尊为依止处」,「依止」就是汇集、融入的意思。另外还有一种解释:当世尊坐在大菩提树下时,凭借证悟的力量,触来到他面前,仿佛在问:“世尊,我名叫什么?”世尊回答:“你因为‘接触’这个意义,所以名叫‘触’。”接着,受、想、行、识也依次前来问自己的名称,世尊一一回答:“你因为‘了别’的意义,所显示巴利原文
Bhagavaṃmūlakāti bhagavā mūlaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime, bhante, amhākaṃ dhammā pubbe kassapasammāsambuddhena uppāditā, tasmiṃ parinibbute ekaṃ buddhantaraṃ añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ime dhamme uppādetuṃ samattho nāma nāhosi, bhagavatā pana no ime dhammā uppāditā. Bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmāti evaṃ bhagavaṃmūlakā no, bhante, dhammāti. Bhagavaṃnettikāti bhagavā hi dhammānaṃ netā vinetā anunetā, yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gahetvā dassetāti dhammā bhagavaṃnettikā nāma honti. Bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇāti catubhūmakadhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa āpāthaṃ āgacchamānā bhagavati paṭisaranti nāmāti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarantīti samosaranti. Apica mahābodhimaṇḍe nisinnassa bhagavato paṭivedhavasena phasso āgacchati ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāmo’’ti? Tvaṃ phusanaṭṭhena phasso nāma. Vedanā, saññā, saṅkhārā, viññāṇaṃ āgacchati ‘‘ahaṃ bhagavā kinnāma’’nti, tvaṃ vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇaṃ nāmāti evaṃ catubhūmakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvato pāṭiyekkaṃ pāṭiyekkaṃ nāmaṃ gaṇhanto bhagavā dhamme paṭisaratīti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Bhagavantaṃyeva paṭibhātūti bhagavatova etassa bhāsitassa attho upaṭṭhātu, tumheyeva no kathetvā dethāti attho.
“那也就是无明”这句:虽然,那无明与渴爱在催发业力速行、牵引新的结生之后,自身便已灭去。但如同人们至今仍会说“昨天喝的药,今天吃的还是那饭”一样,这是由于前后事物具有同类性,故仍以“那”来指称。此处亦然,因为同类性,所以说“那也就是无明,那也就是渴爱”。“梵行”:在此指能导向最终目标的“道梵行”。“为了苦的灭尽”:意为为了彻底断除流转于生死的苦。“成为有身的托负者”:指还要进入另一个结生之身的存在者。“也就是所谓的梵行住”:指安住于道梵行,以此显示贤者相较于愚者的优胜。如此,在这部经中,所有还带有结生的凡夫,皆被称为“愚者”;而止息了结生的诸漏尽者,则被称为“贤者”。至于入流者、一来者、不来者,他们既不可直称为“贤者”,也不可称为“愚者”;不过,若从归属上说,他们是属于贤者这一边的。第九篇注释结束。显示巴利原文
Sāceva avijjāti ettha kiñcāpi sā avijjā ca taṇhā ca kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhitvā niruddhā, yathā pana ajjāpi yaṃ hiyyo bhesajjaṃ pītaṃ, tadeva bhojanaṃ bhuñjāti sarikkhakattena tadevāti vuccati, evamidhāpi sā ceva avijjā sā ca taṇhāti idampi sarikkhakattena vuttaṃ. Brahmacariyanti maggabrahmacariyaṃ. Dukkhakkhayāyāti vaṭṭadukkhassa khayatthāya. Kāyūpago hotīti aññaṃ paṭisandhikāyaṃ upagantā hoti. Yadidaṃ brahmacariyavāsoti yo ayaṃ maggabrahmacariyavāso, ayaṃ bālato paṇḍitassa visesoti dasseti. Iti imasmiṃ sutte sabbopi sapaṭisandhiko puthujjano ‘‘bālo’’ti, appaṭisandhiko khīṇāsavo ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vutto. Sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino pana ‘‘paṇḍitā’’ti vā ‘‘bālā’’ti vā na vattabbā, bhajamānā pana paṇḍitapakkhaṃ bhajanti. Navamaṃ.
第十 缘经注释显示巴利原文
10. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
20 第二十篇中,“诸比丘,我将教导缘起,也将教导缘生法”——导师于此经中开示:“我将教导缘及缘所生的自性法”,因此从这两方面开示。“无论如来们出现与否”:即使如来出现,或佛陀出现或不出现,生都是老死的缘,生本身就是老死的缘。“那界是安住的”:此缘的自性本就安住,在任何时候,生都不会不是老死的缘。“法住性、法定性”这两个词也是在说明缘。由于依靠缘,缘所生的法得以安住,故缘被称为“法住性”;缘能决定法,故被称为“法定性”。“此缘性”:老死等的这些缘,叫做“此缘”;“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”。“彼(缘)”:即那个缘。“遍觉”:以智慧遍觉。“遍知”:以智慧遍知。“说示”:即讲说。“教导”:即显示。“开显”:即令人知晓。“安立”:即安置于智慧的门前。“开阐”:即打开后显示。“分别”:即从各方面显示。“令明了”:即使之清楚明显。“且说:你们看!”:他说“你们看!”,并接着说。如何说呢?即“诸比丘,以生为缘而有老死”等。显示巴利原文
20. Dasame paṭiccasamuppādañca vo bhikkhave, desessāmi paṭiccasamuppanne ca dhammeti satthā imasmiṃ sutte paccaye ca paccayanibbatte ca sabhāvadhamme desessāmīti ubhayaṃ ārabhi. Uppādā vā tathāgatānanti tathāgatānaṃ uppādepi, buddhesu uppannesu anuppannesupi jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ, jātiyeva jarāmaraṇassa paccayo. Ṭhitāva sā dhātūti ṭhitova so paccayasabhāvo, na kadāci jāti jarāmaraṇassa paccayo na hoti. Dhammaṭṭhitatā dhammaniyāmatāti imehipi dvīhi paccayameva katheti. Paccayena hi paccayuppannā dhammā tiṭṭhanti, tasmā paccayova ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā’’ti vuccati. Paccayo dhamme niyameti, tasmā ‘‘dhammaniyāmatā’’ti vuccati. Idappaccayatāti imesaṃ jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayāva idappaccayatā. Tanti taṃ paccayaṃ. Abhisambujjhatīti ñāṇena abhisambujjhati. Abhisametīti ñāṇena abhisamāgacchati. Ācikkhatīti katheti. Desetīti dasseti. Paññāpetīti jānāpeti. Paṭṭhapetīti ñāṇamukhe ṭhapeti. Vivaratīti vivaritvā dasseti. Vibhajatīti vibhāgato dasseti. Uttānīkarotīti pākaṭaṃ karoti. Passathāti cāhāti passatha iti ca vadati. Kinti? Jātipaccayā, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇantiādi.
“诸比丘,如是”:比丘们,便是如此。“彼处所有”:指在“以生为缘而有老死”等处所说的那些。“如性”等词都是缘相的同义词。由于每一种法都依于那不多不少的各种缘而生起,故称“如性”;当各种缘聚合时,由此所生的法即使在刹那也不会不产生,故称“不虚如性”;不会由其他法的缘而生起另一种法,故称“不异如性”;或者因为它是老死等的缘,或是缘的集合,故称“此缘性”。此处解释词义:这些缘即是“此缘”,“此缘”本身就是“此缘性”,或者这众多缘的集合即是“此缘性”。然而,这里的特征应依声论书去了知。显示巴利原文
Itikho, bhikkhaveti evaṃ kho, bhikkhave. Yā tatrāti yā tesu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’ntiādīsu. Tathatātiādīni paccayākārasseva vevacanāni. So tehi tehi paccayehi anūnādhikeheva tassa tassa dhammassa sambhavato tathatāti, sāmaggiṃ upagatesu paccayesu muhuttampi tato nibbattānaṃ dhammānaṃ asambhavābhāvato avitathatāti, aññadhammapaccayehi aññadhammānuppattito anaññathatāti, jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paccayato vā paccayasamūhato vā idappaccayatāti vutto. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – imesaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā, idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatā. Lakkhaṇaṃ panettha saddasatthato veditabbaṃ.
「无常」:以存在后归于无之义,故称无常。此处并非说老死本身即是无常,而是由于具无常性的诸蕴有老死,才名为无常。「有为」等也同此理。其中,「有为」是由诸缘和合而造作;「缘生」是依于缘而生起;「灭法」是具有坏灭性质的法;「衰灭法」是具有消失性质的法;「离染法」是具有离染性质的法;「寂灭法」是具有寂灭性质的法。对于生,也应当同样依所说之理了知无常等。再者,由于能生之缘发生作用的刹那可以被观察到,依这一理趣,「无常」等在此处也相宜。有等也是如此,即无常等的性质。显示巴利原文
Aniccanti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ. Ettha ca aniccanti na jarāmaraṇaṃ aniccaṃ, aniccasabhāvānaṃ pana khandhānaṃ jarāmaraṇattā aniccaṃ nāma jātaṃ. Saṅkhatādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca saṅkhatanti paccayehi samāgantvā kataṃ. Paṭiccasamuppannanti paccaye nissāya uppannaṃ. Khayadhammanti khayasabhāvaṃ. Vayadhammanti vigacchanakasabhāvaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanakasabhāvaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nirujjhanakasabhāvaṃ. Jātiyāpi vuttanayeneva aniccatā veditabbā. Janakapaccayānaṃ vā kiccānubhāvakkhaṇe diṭṭhattā ekena pariyāyenettha aniccātiādīni yujjantiyeva. Bhavādayo aniccādisabhāvāyeva.
「以正慧」:即与观相应的道慧。「前际」即过去,指过去的时间。在「我过去曾存在吗?未曾存在吗?」等问题中,基于常见或无因生起的观念,而对过去自身的存在与否生起疑惑。至于「何种原因」这一句,不必多说,愚钝的凡夫如同疯子一般,只是胡乱猜测。「我曾是什么?」:从出身、性别、投生处等方面,疑惑:「我曾是刹帝利吗?还是婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家者、出家者、天人、人中的某一种?」「我曾是怎样?」:从形态相貌方面,疑惑:「我曾是高的吗?矮的、白的、黑的、有限的、无限的等其中的某一种?」也有说:从自在天的创造等,疑惑「我曾是由什么原因而有的?」即从原因上起疑。「成为什么之后,又成为什么?」:从出身等,对自己的相续疑惑:「成为刹帝利之后,又成为婆罗门吗?……成为天人之后,又成为人吗?」在所有这些情况中,「时」都是指时间。「后际」即未来。「我将来会有吗?没有吗?」:基于常见和断灭见的观念,对未来自己的存在与否生疑。其余内容也应如前所说来理解。显示巴利原文
Sammappaññāyāti savipassanāya maggapaññāya. Pubbantanti purimaṃ atītanti attho. Ahosiṃ nu khotiādīsu ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho nanu kho’’ti sassatākārañca adhiccasamuppattiākārañca nissāya atīte attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Kiṃ kāraṇanti na vattabbaṃ, ummattako viya bālaputhujjano yathā vā tathā vā pavattati. Kiṃ nu kho ahosinti jātiliṅgupapattiyo nissāya ‘‘khattiyo nu kho ahosiṃ, brāhmaṇavessasuddagahaṭṭhapabbajitadevamanussānaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Kathaṃ nu khoti saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu kho ahosiṃ rassaodātakaṇhapamāṇikaappamāṇikādīnaṃ aññataro’’ti kaṅkhati. Keci pana ‘‘issaranimmānādīni nissāya ‘kena nu kho kāraṇena ahosi’nti hetuto kaṅkhatī’’ti vadanti. Kiṃ hutvā kiṃ ahosinti jātiādīni nissāya ‘‘khattiyo hutvā nu kho brāhmaṇo ahosiṃ…pe… devo hutvā manusso’’ti attano paramparaṃ kaṅkhati. Sabbattheva pana addhānanti kālādhivacanametaṃ. Aparantanti anāgataṃ antaṃ. Bhavissāmi nu kho nanu khoti sassatākārañca ucchedākārañca nissāya anāgate attano vijjamānatañca avijjamānatañca kaṅkhati. Sesamettha vuttanayameva.
「或于现在时」:现在,即从结生开始,直至死亡的边际,取一切正在经历的时间。「于自身将成为犹豫者」:即对于自身的诸蕴成为疑惑者。「我存在吗?」:对自身的存在生疑。然而,这合宜吗?合宜还是不合宜,此处有什么可思量的呢?而且,这里还举出一个事例:据说,小母的儿子是秃头的,大母的儿子是不秃头的。人们把那孩子剃了发,他起来后心想:「我是小母的儿子吗?」这样便有了「我存在吗?」的疑惑。「我不存在吗?」:对自身的不存在生疑。对此也有事例:据说,有一人在捉鱼时,因久站水中,自己的大腿变冷,他想:「这是鱼!」便拍打了一下。另一人在坟场边看守田地,因恐惧蜷缩着入睡,醒来时,以为自己的双膝是两个夜叉,便拍打了一下。这样便有了「我不存在吗?」的疑惑。显示巴利原文
Etarahivā paccuppannaṃ addhānanti idāni vā paṭisandhimādiṃ katvā cutipariyantaṃ sabbampi vattamānakālaṃ gahetvā. Ajjhattaṃ kathaṃkathī bhavissatīti attano khandhesu vicikicchī bhavissati. Ahaṃ nu khosmīti attano atthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Yuttaṃ panetanti? Yuttaṃ ayuttanti kā ettha cintā. Apicettha idaṃ vatthumpi udāharanti – cūḷamātāya kira putto muṇḍo, mahāmātāya putto amuṇḍo, taṃ puttaṃ muṇḍesuṃ, so uṭṭhāya ‘‘ahaṃ nu kho cūḷamātāya putto’’ti cintesi. Evaṃ ahaṃ nu khosmīti kaṅkhā hoti. No nu khosmīti attano natthibhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Tatrāpi idaṃ vatthu – eko kira macche gaṇhanto udake ciraṭṭhānena sītibhūtaṃ attano ūruṃ macchoti cintetvā pahari. Aparo susānapasse khettaṃ rakkhanto bhīto saṅkuṭito sayi, so paṭibujjhitvā attano jaṇṇukāni dve yakkhāti cintetvā pahari. Evaṃ no nu khosmīti kaṅkhati.
“我是什么?”自己明明身为刹帝利,却对自己的刹帝利身份生起疑惑。其他种类也是如此。然而,身为天人却不知自己是天人,这样的事情并不存在;但他仍会以“我是有色的吗?还是无色的呢?”等方式生疑。为什么刹帝利等不知道呢?因为他们在这样那样的家族中出生,并非现量可知。在家者如布商等,有误以为自己是出家者的情况;而出家者也会以“我的戒破损了吗?”等形式,误以为自己是居家者。人们也会像国王那样,对自己生起“我是天人”的想法。“我是怎样的?”如前所述。此处,有人执取内在有命者,依其形态相貌而疑:“我是长的吗?短的?四方的?六方的?八方的?十六方的?还是其它某种形态?”应知这就是“我是怎样的?”之疑。然而,没有人会不知道当下身体的形态。“他从何处来,他将往何处去?”即对有身的来处与去处生疑,如此而疑。“圣弟子”此处指入流者,其余三种圣者同样不在此障碍之列。第十篇。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ nu khosmīti khattiyova samāno attano khattiyabhāvaṃ kaṅkhati. Eseva nayo sesesupi. Devo pana samāno devabhāvaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi, sopi pana ‘‘ahaṃ rūpī nu kho arūpī nu kho’’tiādinā nayena kaṅkhati. Khattiyādayo kasmā na jānantīti ce? Apaccakkhā tesaṃ tattha tattha kule uppatti. Gahaṭṭhāpi ca potthalikādayo pabbajitasaññino, pabbajitāpi ‘‘kuppaṃ nu kho me kamma’’ntiādinā nayena gahaṭṭhasaññino. Manussāpi ca rājāno viya attani devasaññino honti. Kathaṃ nu khosmīti vuttanayameva. Kevalañhettha abbhantare jīvo nāma atthīti gahetvā tassa saṇṭhānākāraṃ nissāya ‘‘dīgho nu khosmi rassacaturassachaḷaṃsaaṭṭhaṃsasoḷasaṃsādīnaṃ aññatarappakāro’’ti kaṅkhanto kathaṃ nu khosmīti? Kaṅkhatīti veditabbo. Sarīrasaṇṭhānaṃ pana paccuppannaṃ ajānanto nāma natthi. Kuto āgato so kuhiṃ gāmī bhavissatīti attabhāvassa āgatigatiṭṭhānaṃ kaṅkhanto evaṃ kaṅkhati. Ariyasāvakassāti idha sotāpanno adhippeto, itarepi pana tayo avāritāyevāti. Dasamaṃ.
3. 十力品。显示巴利原文
3. Dasabalavaggo
1. 《第一十力经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Dasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
21 21. 《十力品》的第一篇,即是第二篇的概要。显示巴利原文
21. Dasabalavaggassa paṭhamaṃ dutiyasseva saṅkhepo.
2. 《第二十力经》的注释显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyadasabalasuttavaṇṇanā
22 第二部经是世尊随顺自己意乐而说的。其中,“具足十力”意为具足十种力。所谓的力,有两种:身力与智力。二者之中,如来的身力应依象的种属来了解。古德曾这样说过:显示巴利原文
22. Dutiyaṃ bhagavatā attano ajjhāsayassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha dasabalasamannāgatoti dasahi balehi samannāgato. Balañca nāmetaṃ duvidhaṃ kāyabalañca ñāṇabalañca. Tesu tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ hatthikulānusārena veditabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ porāṇehi –
“迦罗婆迦象、恒河象、般荼罗象、昙跋象、宾伽罗象、
香象、吉祥象、雪山象、布萨象与六牙象,这十种。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāḷāvakañca gaṅgeyyaṃ, paṇḍaraṃ tambapiṅgalaṃ; Gandhamaṅgalahemañca, uposathachaddantime dasā’’ti.(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148; vibha. aṭṭha. 760); –
这便是十种象族。其中,“迦罗婆迦”应视为普通象族。十名男子的身力,等于一头迦罗婆迦象之力;十头迦罗婆迦象之力,等于一头恒河象之力;十头恒河象之力,等于一头般荼罗象之力;十头般荼罗象之力,等于一头昙跋象之力;十头昙跋象之力,等于一头宾伽罗象之力;十头宾伽罗象之力,等于一头香象之力;十头香象之力,等于一头吉祥象之力;十头吉祥象之力,等于一头雪山象之力;十头雪山象之力,等于一头布萨象之力;十头布萨象之力,等于一头六牙象之力;十头六牙象之力,等于一位如来之力。这也称为那罗延坚固力。若以普通象的数量计算,相当于千亿头象之力;若以男子的数量计算,则相当于十万亿男子之力。这便是如来的身力。然而,“具足十力”这一说法,并不包含这种身力,因为身力是外在的、低劣的,连畜生道的狮子等也具备。依靠身力,并不能遍知苦、断除集、修习道、证得果。此外,还有一种在十种层面上不可动摇、能作支撑的意义上称为“力”的十种智力。正是针对这种智力,才说“具足十力”。显示巴利原文
Imāni dasa hatthikulāni. Tattha kāḷāvakanti pakatihatthikulaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ dasannaṃ purisānaṃ kāyabalaṃ, taṃ ekassa kāḷāvakassa hatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ kāḷāvakānaṃ balaṃ, taṃ ekassa gaṅgeyyassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gaṅgeyyānaṃ, taṃ ekassa paṇḍarassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ paṇḍarānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tambassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ tambānaṃ, taṃ ekassa piṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ piṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa gandhahatthino. Yaṃ dasannaṃ gandhahatthīnaṃ, taṃ ekassa maṅgalassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ maṅgalānaṃ, taṃ ekassa hemavatassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ hemavatānaṃ, taṃ ekassa uposathassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ uposathānaṃ, taṃ ekassa chaddantassa. Yaṃ dasannaṃ chaddantānaṃ, taṃ ekassa tathāgatassa. Nārāyanasaṅghātabalantipi idameva vuccati. Tadetaṃ pakatihatthigaṇanāya hatthīnaṃ koṭisahassānaṃ, purisagaṇanāya dasannaṃ purisakoṭisahassānaṃ balaṃ hoti. Idaṃ tāva tathāgatassa kāyabalaṃ. ‘‘Dasabalasamannāgato’’ti ettha pana etaṃ saṅgahaṃ na gacchati. Etañhi bāhirakaṃ lāmakaṃ tiracchānagatānaṃ sīhādīnampi hoti. Etañhi nissāya dukkhapariññā vā samudayappahānaṃ vā maggabhāvanā vā phalasacchikiriyā vā natthi. Aññaṃ pana dasasu ṭhānesu akampanatthena upatthambhanatthena ca dasavidhaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ nāma atthi. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato’’ti.
那么,是哪十种智力呢?即如实了知处与非处等。具体而言:如实了知处为处、非处为非处,这是第一力;如实了知过去、未来、现在所造诸业,依其处所与原因而感得的果报,这是第二力;了知通往一切处的行道,这是第三力;了知具种种界、种种差异的世间,这是第四力;了知其他众生、其他补特伽罗的种种意乐,这是第五力;了知那些众生、他们补特伽罗的根器利钝,这是第六力;了知禅那、解脱、定、等至的染污、清净与出离,这是第七力;宿命智,这是第八力;众生死生智,这是第九力;漏尽智,这是第十力。而在阿毗达摩中——显示巴利原文
Katamaṃ pana tanti? Ṭhānāṭṭhānādīnaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānanaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ – ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato jānanaṃ ekaṃ, atītānāgatapaccuppannānaṃ kammasamādānānaṃ ṭhānaso hetuso yathābhūtaṃ vipākajānanaṃ ekaṃ, sabbatthagāminipaṭipadājānanaṃ ekaṃ, anekadhātunānādhātulokajānanaṃ ekaṃ, parasattānaṃ parapuggalānaṃ nānādhimuttikatājānanaṃ ekaṃ, tesaṃyeva indriyaparopariyattajānanaṃ ekaṃ, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattīnaṃ saṃkilesavodānavuṭṭhānajānanaṃ ekaṃ, pubbenivāsajānanaṃ ekaṃ, sattānaṃ cutūpapātajānanaṃ ekaṃ, āsavakkhayajānanaṃ ekanti. Abhidhamme pana –
于此,如来如实了知处是处、非处是非处。如来如实了知处是处、非处是非处,这便是如来所具有的如来力之一。依于此力,如来宣称处于如牛王般的立处,在大众中作狮子吼,转动梵轮。显示巴利原文
‘‘Idha tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Yampi tathāgato ṭhānañca ṭhānato aṭṭhānañca aṭṭhānato yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti. Idampi tathāgatassa tathāgatabalaṃ hoti, yaṃ balaṃ āgamma tathāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti , parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavattetī’’ti.
这些内容,从开头(《分别论》760)所依的方法起,就已详细给出。其义释也在《分别论注释》(《分别注释》760)和《中部注释》(《破除迷执》,中部注释1.148)中,从一切方面作了说明。应依照其中所述的方法来理解。显示巴利原文
Ādinā (vibha. 760) nayena vitthārato āgatāneva. Atthavaṇṇanāpi nesaṃ vibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyañceva (vibha. aṭṭha. 760) papañcasūdaniyā ca majjhimaṭṭhakathāya (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.148) sabbākārato vuttā. Sā tattha vuttanayeneva gahetabbā.
以四无畏:在此,「无畏」是畏惧的反面;这是指观察于四种情况中的无畏状态时,所生起的伴随喜悦之智的名称。是哪四种情况?即面对‘你自称是正自觉者,这些法你并未正觉’之类的诘难之处。那里有经文——显示巴利原文
Catūhi ca vesārajjehīti ettha sārajjapaṭipakkhaṃ vesārajjaṃ, catūsu ṭhānesu vesārajjabhāvaṃ paccavekkhantassa uppannasomanassamayañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Katamesu catūsu? ‘‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’’tiādīsu codanāvatthūsu. Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi –
“比丘们,有这四种如来的无畏……哪四种?‘你自称是正自觉者,而这些法你并未正觉’——比丘们,我不见世间有沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天或任何众生,能如法地以此责难于我的迹象。比丘们,我不见此迹象,便安住于安稳、无畏。‘你自称是漏尽者,而这些漏你并未遍尽’——比丘们,我不见……‘所说的那些障碍法,若随行它们,实不能形成障碍’——比丘们,我不见……‘你为了利益他人而说的法,并不能令随行之人正确地导向苦的灭尽’——比丘们,我不见世间有沙门、婆罗门……安住于无畏。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa vesārajjāni…pe…. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Sammāsambuddhassa te paṭijānato ime dhammā anabhisambuddhā’ti tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā devo vā māro vā brahmā vā koci vā lokasmiṃ saha dhammena paṭicodessatīti nimittametaṃ, bhikkhave, na samanupassāmi. Etamahaṃ, bhikkhave, nimittaṃ asamanupassanto khemappatto abhayappatto vesārajjappatto viharāmi. ‘Khīṇāsavassa te paṭijānato ime āsavā aparikkhīṇā’ti tatra vata maṃ…pe… ‘ye kho pana te antarāyikā dhammā vuttā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāyā’ti tatra vata maṃ…pe… ‘yassa kho pana te atthāya dhammo desito, so na niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāyā’ti tatra vata maṃ samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā…pe… vesārajjappatto viharāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.8).
“如牛王立处”:意即最胜之处、无上之处;或者,过去的诸佛即是牛王,此为他们所立之处。又,百牛之主称为usabha(牛王),千牛之主称为vasabha(牛王);或在百牛群中最胜者名usabha,在千牛群中最胜者名vasabha。在一切牛中最胜、能忍一切困苦、色白、庄严、能负重担、纵闻百雷之声亦不动摇者,称为nisabha(领导公牛),而此处指的正是usabha,此为其同义词。“āsabha”意为“属于usabha(牛王)的”。“立处”指以四足压住大地而安立。此“如牛王立处”即如同牛王那样:正如那称为领导公牛的牛王,具足牛王之力,以四足压住大地,以不可动摇的姿势站立;同样,如来也具足十种如来力,以四种无畏之足压住八众大地,在含括天人的世间中,不为任何敌人、怨敌所动摇,以不可动摇的姿势站立。当他如此站立时,他便宣称、达到、毫不否认地将“如牛王立处”归于自身。因此说“宣称如牛王立处”。显示巴利原文
Āsabhaṃ ṭhānanti seṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ uttamaṭṭhānaṃ. Āsabhā vā pubbabuddhā, tesaṃ ṭhānanti attho. Apica gavasatajeṭṭhako usabho, gavasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, vajasatajeṭṭhako vā usabho, vajasahassajeṭṭhako vasabho, sabbagavaseṭṭho sabbaparissayasaho seto pāsādiko mahābhāravaho asanisatasaddehipi asampakampiyo nisabho, so idha usabhoti adhippeto. Idampi hi tassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Usabhassa idanti āsabhaṃ. Ṭhānanti catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā avaṭṭhānaṃ (ma. ni. 1.150). Idaṃ pana āsabhaṃ viyāti āsabhaṃ. Yatheva hi nisabhasaṅkhāto usabho usabhabalena samannāgato catūhi pādehi pathaviṃ uppīḷetvā acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ tathāgatopi dasahi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato catūhi vesārajjapādehi aṭṭhaparisapathaviṃ uppīḷetvā sadevake loke kenaci paccatthikena paccāmittena akampiyo acalaṭṭhānena tiṭṭhati. Evaṃ tiṭṭhamāno ca taṃ āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti upagacchati na paccakkhāti, attani āropeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānātī’’ti.
“于众中”:即于八众之中。“舍利弗,有八众。哪八众?刹帝利众、婆罗门众、居士众、沙门众、四大王天众、三十三天众、魔众、梵天众”——即于此八众中。“作狮子吼”:即作最胜之吼、无畏之吼,或发出类似狮子吼的声音。其含义应依《狮子吼经》来了知。又,如同狮子因能忍耐、能杀害而得名,如来亦因能忍耐世间法、能摧毁外道之说而被称为狮子。如此所称的狮子之吼,即为狮子吼。如同狮子具足狮子力,于一切处无畏、无惧、毛发不竖,作狮子吼;同样,如来狮子亦具足如来力,于八众中无畏、无惧、毛发不竖,以“色如是”等方式,发出具足种种说法庄严的狮子吼。因此说“于众人中作狮子吼”。显示巴利原文
Parisāsūti ‘‘aṭṭha kho imā, sāriputta, parisā. Katamā aṭṭha? Khattiyaparisā brāhmaṇaparisā gahapatiparisā samaṇaparisā cātumahārājikaparisā tāvatiṃsaparisā māraparisā brahmaparisā’’ti, imāsu aṭṭhasu parisāsu. Sīhanādaṃ nadatīti seṭṭhanādaṃ abhītanādaṃ nadati, sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadati. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena dīpetabbo. Yathā vā sīho sahanato ceva hananato ca sīhoti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgato lokadhammānaṃ sahanato parappavādānañca hananato sīhoti vuccati. Evaṃ vuttassa sīhassa nādaṃ sīhanādaṃ. Tattha yathā sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso, ‘‘iti rūpa’’ntiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadatī’’ti.
“转梵轮”:此处,“梵”意为最胜、无上,是对清净法轮的尊称。此法轮有两种:证悟智与教说智。其中,由般若所引发、能成就自身圣果的,是证悟智;由悲悯所引发、能成就声闻圣果的,是教说智。证悟智又分为“正生起”与“已生起”两种:从出离起,直至阿拉汉道为“正生起”,在证果刹那为“已生起”;或从兜率天起,直至大菩提座上的阿拉汉道为“正生起”,果刹那为“已生起”;或从燃灯佛时起,直至阿拉汉道为“正生起”,果刹那为“已生起”。教说智也有“正转”与“已转”两种:直至阿若憍陈如的入流道为“正转”,果刹那为“已转”。其中,证悟智是出世间的,教说智是世间的。然而,这两种智皆为诸佛亲传之智,不与其他人共。显示巴利原文
Brahmacakkaṃ pavattetīti ettha brahmanti seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ, visuddhassa dhammacakkassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ pana dhammacakkaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti paṭivedhañāṇañca desanāñāṇañca. Tattha paññāpabhāvitaṃ attano ariyaphalāvahaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ, karuṇāpabhāvitaṃ sāvakānaṃ ariyaphalāvahaṃ desanāñāṇaṃ. Tattha paṭivedhañāṇaṃ uppajjamānaṃ uppannanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi abhinikkhamanato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Tusitabhavanato vā yāva mahābodhipallaṅke arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Dīpaṅkarato vā paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā uppajjamānaṃ , phalakkhaṇe uppannaṃ nāma. Desanāñāṇampi pavattamānaṃ pavattanti duvidhaṃ. Tañhi yāva aññāsikoṇḍaññassa sotāpattimaggā pavattamānaṃ, phalakkhaṇe pavattaṃ nāma. Tesu paṭivedhañāṇaṃ lokuttaraṃ, desanāñāṇaṃ lokiyaṃ. Ubhayampi panetaṃ aññehi asādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva orasañāṇaṃ.
现在,为了显示具备此智而作狮子吼,他开始说“色是这样”等。其中,“色是这样”是指:这是色,仅此分量的色,过此更无色;从变坏的自性及大种与所造色的分类入手,依相、味、现起、足处,无遗地把握一切色。“色的集是这样”:即以此方式说明如此把握的色之集。这里的“这样”意为“集是这样生起的”。其详释应如此了知:“由无明集而有色集,由渴爱集、业集、食集而有色集;见到生起相的人,便见到色蕴的生起。”(《无碍解道》1.50)。对于灭也同样:“由无明灭而有色灭……见到变坏相的人,便见到色蕴的灭。”这是详释。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ iminā ñāṇena samannāgato sīhanādaṃ nadati, taṃ dassetuṃ iti rūpantiādimāha. Tattha iti rūpanti idaṃ rūpaṃ ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, ito uddhaṃ rūpaṃ natthīti ruppanasabhāvañceva bhūtupādāyabhedañca ādiṃ katvā lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasena anavasesarūpapariggaho vutto. Iti rūpassa samudayoti iminā evaṃ pariggahitassa rūpassa samudayo vutto. Tattha itīti evaṃ samudayo hotīti attho. Tassa vitthāro ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo taṇhāsamudayā, kammasamudayā āhārasamudayā rūpasamudayoti nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa udayaṃ passatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) evaṃ veditabbo. Atthaṅgamepi ‘‘avijjānirodhā rūpanirodho…pe… vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi rūpakkhandhassa nirodhaṃ passatī’’ti ayaṃ vitthāro.
“受如此”等也是如此:这是受,仅此分量的受,过此更无受;这是想,这些是行,这是识,仅此分量的识,过此更无识。从感受、认知、造作、了别的自性入手,以及从乐等、色想等、触等、眼识等分类入手,依相、味、现起、足处,无余地把握受、想、行、识。而“受之集如此”等,则是说明如此把握的受、想、行、识之集。这里,“如此”亦指“集如是”的意思。对其的详说,应如同在色部分所说那样,以“由无明集而有受集”(《无碍解道》1.50)等方式来了知。但此处略有不同:在三蕴中,不应说“由食集”,而应说“由触集”;在识蕴中,则应说“由名色集”。“灭”这个词也应依它们来配合。这是此处的纲要。至于生灭的详细抉择,已在《清净道论》中以一切行相圆满地宣说。显示巴利原文
Iti vedanātiādīsupi ayaṃ vedanā ettakā vedanā, ito uddhaṃ vedanā natthi, ayaṃ saññā, ime saṅkhārā, idaṃ viññāṇaṃ ettakaṃ viññāṇaṃ , ito uddhaṃ viññāṇaṃ natthīti vedayitasañjānanaabhisaṅkharaṇavijānanasabhāvañceva sukhādirūpasaññādiphassādicakkhuviññāṇādibhedañca ādiṃ katvā lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānavasena anavasesavedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇapariggaho vutto. Iti vedanāya samudayotiādīhi pana evaṃ pariggahitānaṃ vedanāsaññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ samudayo vutto. Tatrāpi itīti evaṃ samudayo hotīti attho. Tesampi vitthāro ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) rūpe vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana viseso – tīsu khandhesu ‘‘āhārasamudayā’’ti avatvā ‘‘phassasamudayā’’ti vattabbaṃ, viññāṇakkhandhe ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā’’ti. Atthaṅgamapadampi tesaṃyeva vasena yojetabbaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārato pana udayabbayavinicchayo sabbākāraparipūro visuddhimagge vutto.
“此有时,彼有”等是另一种狮子吼。其义为:当此无明等缘存在时,那些行等果便存在。“由此生起,彼生起”:由此无明等缘的生起,那些行等果便生起。“此无有时,彼无有”:当此无明等缘不存在时,那些行等果便不存在。“由此灭,彼灭”:由此无明等缘的灭,那些行等果便灭去。现在,为了详细显示如何存在与如何灭去,他宣说:“即此缘无明而有行”等等。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃsati idaṃ hotīti ayampi aparo sīhanādo. Tassattho – imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjati. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye asati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ na hoti. Imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa nirodhā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ nirujjhati. Idāni yathā taṃ hoti ceva nirujjhati ca, taṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ yadidaṃ avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārātiādimāha.
“善说”:指以分析五蕴等方式,妥善、清楚地宣说出来。“法”:指五蕴及其缘起的法。“坦露的”:未被遮盖、隐藏。“敞开的”:打开而显露。“显了的”:如同灯火般照耀、辉耀,明显彰显。“碎布衣”:所谓碎布,是指破烂、撕裂、处处缝补打结的旧衣。不穿那样的衣,而穿着八肘或九肘长、未经割截的衣,便称为“碎布衣者”。此法也是如此——其中并没有被欺诈等方式所撕破、割裂、缝补打结的情况。再者,小布片也可叫做碎布;若没有那样的碎布,而拥有八肘、九肘的大布,也可称为“碎布衣者”,意思是已脱离碎布的人。此法正是这样。好比有人拿着一块四肘长的布来受持使用,左拉右扯,弄得自己疲惫不堪;外道的出家人便是如此,他们对于自己少许的法,以“当此存在时,彼便存在”的方式不断地构想、不断地扩展,把自己弄得疲惫不堪。而如同有人以八肘或九肘的布来受持,可以随心所欲地披着,不会感到疲惫——那里没有拉扯扩展的麻烦。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ svākkhātoti evaṃ pañcakkhandhavibhajanādivasena suṭṭhu akkhāto kathito. Dhammoti pañcakkhandhapaccayākāradhammo. Uttānoti anikujjito. Vivaṭoti vivaritvā ṭhapito. Pakāsitoti dīpito jotito. Chinnapilotikoti pilotikā vuccati chinnaṃ bhinnaṃ tattha tattha sibbitagaṇṭhitaṃ jiṇṇavatthaṃ, taṃ yassa natthīti aṭṭhahatthaṃ navahatthaṃ vā ahatasāṭakaṃ nivattho, so chinnapilotiko nāma. Ayampi dhammo tādiso. Na hettha kohaññādivasena chinnabhinnasibbitagaṇṭhitabhāvo atthi. Apica khuddakasāṭakopi pilotikāti vuccati, sā yassa natthi, aṭṭhanavahattho mahāpaṭo atthi, sopi chinnapilotiko, apagatapilotikoti attho. Tādiso ayaṃ dhammo. Yathā hi catuhatthaṃ sāṭakaṃ gahetvā pariggahaṇaṃ karonto puriso ito cito ca añchanto kilamati, evaṃ bāhirakasamaye pabbajitā attano parittakaṃ dhammaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sati evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti kappetvā kappetvā vaḍḍhentā kilamanti. Yathā pana aṭṭhahatthanavahatthena pariggahaṇaṃ karonto yathāruci pārupati na kilamati, natthi tattha añchitvā vaḍḍhanakiccaṃ; evaṃ imasmimpi dhamme kappetvā kappetvā vibhajanakiccaṃ natthi, tehi tehi kāraṇehi mayāva ayaṃ dhammo suvibhatto suvitthāritoti idampi sandhāya ‘‘chinnapilotiko’’ti āha. Apica kacavaropi pilotikāti vuccati, imasmiñca sāsane samaṇakacavaraṃ nāma patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhati. Tenevāha –
应当扬弃糠稗,除去污秽;
然后吹去秕糠——那些非沙门而自称沙门者。
除去那些恶欲者、恶行恶境者之后,
清净者应与清净者共住,保持具念;
然后,和合而明智的你们,将作苦之边际。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamatha, kasambuṃ apakassatha; Tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānine. ‘‘Niddhamitvāna pāpicche, pāpaācāragocare; Suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ, kappayavho patissatā; Tato samaggā nipakā, dukkhassantaṃ karissathā’’ti. (a. ni. 8.10);
因此,由于沙门的垢秽已被截断,此法即名为“碎布衣”(chinnapilotiko)。显示巴利原文
Iti samaṇakacavarassa chinnattāpi ayaṃ dhammo chinnapilotiko nāma hoti.
“足够”(Alameva)即确实合适。“以信出家者”(Saddhāpabbajitena)指因信心而出家的人。“善男子”(Kulaputtena)有两种:行善男子与生善男子。其中,无论从何种家族出家,能圆满戒等五法蕴者,称为行善男子;而如耶舍善男子等,从出身高贵的家族出家者,称为生善男子。此处所指为行善男子。然而,若生善男子具足德行,则为最上。像这样的善男子,“发起精进”(Vīriyaṃ ārabhitunti)即修习四支具足的精进。为说明此四支,故说“即使只剩皮肤……”等。在此,皮肤为一支,筋为一支,骨为一支,肉与血合为一支。再者,当决意修习这四支具足的精进时,应于九种状况中保持专注:食前、食后、初夜、中夜、后夜、行时、立时、坐时、卧时。显示巴利原文
Alamevāti yuttameva. Saddhāpabbajitenāti saddhāya pabbajitena. Kulaputtenāti dve kulaputtā ācārakulaputto jātikulaputto ca. Tattha yo yato kutoci kulā pabbajitvā sīlādayo pañca dhammakkhandhe pūreti, ayaṃ ācārakulaputto nāma. Yo pana yasakulaputtādayo viya jātisampannakulā pabbajito, ayaṃ jātikulaputto nāma. Tesu idha ācārakulaputto adhippeto. Sace pana jātikulaputto ācāravā hoti, ayaṃ uttamoyeva. Evarūpena kulaputtena. Vīriyaṃ ārabhitunti caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ kātuṃ. Idānissa caturaṅgaṃ dassento kāmaṃ taco cātiādimāha. Ettha hi taco ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, nhāru ekaṃ, aṭṭhi ekaṃ, maṃsalohitaṃ ekanti. Idañca pana caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahantena navasu ṭhānesu samādhātabbaṃ purebhatte pacchābhatte purimayāme majjhimayāme pacchimayāme gamane ṭhāne nisajjāya sayaneti.
“比丘们,懈怠者住于苦”:在此教法中,凡懈怠之人,即住于苦;而在外道中,懈怠者却住于乐。“混杂”即混合一处。“自利”指殊胜之义或自身之义,二者皆意指阿罗汉果。“退失”即令其退失、不能证得。懈怠之人不守护六根门,三种业不清净,以正命为第八支的戒不清净,活命不正,成为亲近俗家者。他如同落入同梵行者眼中的尘垢,成为损害者而住于苦,既是压坏座位者,也是满腹粪秽者,不能领解导师的心意,错失难遇的时机,因此他所受用的国土施食亦无大果报。显示巴利原文
Dukkhaṃ, bhikkhave, kusīto viharatīti imasmiṃ sāsane yo kusīto puggalo, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Bāhirasamaye pana yo kusīto, so sukhaṃ viharati. Vokiṇṇoti missībhūto. Sadatthanti sobhanaṃ vā atthaṃ sakaṃ vā atthaṃ, ubhayenāpi arahattameva adhippetaṃ. Parihāpetīti hāpeti na pāpuṇāti. Kusītapuggalassa hi cha dvārāni aguttāni honti, tīṇi kammāni aparisuddhāni, ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ sīlaṃ apariyodātaṃ, bhinnājīvo kulūpako hoti. So sabrahmacārīnaṃ akkhimhi patitarajaṃ viya upaghātakaro hutvā dukkhaṃ viharati, pīṭhamaddano ceva hoti laṇḍapūrako ca, satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti, dullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ virādheti, tena bhutto raṭṭhapiṇḍopi na mahapphalo hoti.
“比丘们,精进者”:精进之人唯于此教法中住于乐,而外道中的精进者却住于苦。“远离”即出离、超脱而住。“圆满自利”即证得阿拉汉果。精进者六根门守护善密,三业清净,具足以正命为第八的戒行,极为清净。在同梵行者眼中,他犹如极清凉的眼药,又如涂身之栴檀,成为令人欢喜者,住于安乐,并能把握导师的心意。导师确实……显示巴利原文
Āraddhavīriyo ca kho, bhikkhaveti āraddhavīriyo puggalo imasmiṃyeva sāsane sukhaṃ viharati. Bāhirasamaye pana yo āraddhavīriyo, so dukkhaṃ viharati. Pavivittoti vivitto viyutto hutvā. Sadatthaṃ paripūretīti arahattaṃ pāpuṇāti. Āraddhavīriyassa hi cha dvārāni suguttāni honti, tīṇi kammāni parisuddhāni, ājīvaṭṭhamakaṃ sīlaṃ pariyodātaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ akkhimhi susītalañjanaṃ viya dhātugatacandanaṃ viya ca manāpo hutvā sukhaṃ viharati, satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti. Satthā hi –
“大雄啊,请您长久住世!大牟尼啊,请您住世一劫!”——显示巴利原文
‘‘Ciraṃ jīva mahāvīra, kappaṃ tiṭṭha mahāmunī’’ti –
乔达弥这样礼敬后,世尊拒绝她说:“乔达弥,不应如此礼敬如来。”随后,应她的请求,世尊开示了应当礼敬的方式,而说道:显示巴利原文
Evaṃ gotamiyā vandito, ‘‘na kho, gotami, tathāgatā evaṃ vanditabbā’’ti paṭikkhipitvā tāya yācito vanditabbākāraṃ ācikkhanto evamāha –
那些精勤勇猛、志向坚定、恒常坚毅精进的人——请看,那些和合的声闻弟子!这即是对诸佛的礼敬。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āraddhavīriye pahitatte, niccaṃ daḷhaparakkame;
如此精勤者便能领会导师的心意,不错失难得的时机。因为对他来说,佛陀出世、教法开示、僧伽如法修行,才会有益增长;他所受用的国中施食也因此具有大果报。显示巴利原文
Samagge sāvake passa, esā buddhāna vandanā’’ti. (apa. therī 2.2.171);
“以低劣者成就最上者”:凭借低劣的信、低劣的精进、低劣的念、低劣的定、低劣的慧,不可能获得那称为最上的阿罗汉果。而“以最上者成就最上者”:凭借最上的信等,获得最上的阿罗汉果。“精华可饮”:就令人净信而言称为“精华”,就应当饮用而言称为“可饮”。因为如果饮用了某种东西后,倒在路中间、不省人事,连自己的衣物等属于谁都无从知晓,那么即使它清净,也不应饮用;但我的教法既如此清净,又应当饮用。为了说明这一点,他才说“精华可饮”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āraddhavīriyo satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkoti, dullabhaṃ khaṇaṃ na virādheti. Tassa hi buddhuppādo dhammadesanā saṅghasuppaṭipatti saphalā hoti saudrayā, raṭṭhapiṇḍopi tena bhutto mahapphalo hoti.
在此,“精华”有三种——“教法精华”、“接受者精华”、“梵行精华”。什么是“教法精华”?即对四圣谛的宣说、开示、施设、安立、开显、分别、显明,以及对四念处……乃至对圣八支道的宣说……显明,这就是“教法精华”。什么是“接受者精华”?即比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女、天、人,以及其他任何能了知者,这就是“接受者精华”。什么是“梵行精华”?即此圣八支道,也就是:正见……正定,这就是“梵行精华”。此外,也应以“信根是胜解精华,不信是渣滓;舍弃不信的渣滓,饮用信根的胜解精华”等方式理解此处的意义。“世尊现前”是一句说明理由的措辞。因为世尊现前,所以应当策励精进而饮此精华。外用的药精华,若医生不在面前,饮用者便生疑虑:“我们不知剂量,也不知会上冲还是下泻。”而医生在面前时,则无所疑虑,确信“医生自会知晓”,从而饮用。同样地,我们的法主——世尊正在面前,因此应当策励精进,饮用精华。为了劝勉他们饮用精华,世尊便说“因此,诸比丘……”等。其中,“有利益的”指具有功德利益,“有增长的”指具有增进。显示巴利原文
Hīnenaaggassāti hīnāya saddhāya hīnena vīriyena hīnāya satiyā hīnena samādhinā hīnāya paññāya aggasaṅkhātassa arahattassa patti nāma na hoti. Aggena ca khoti aggehi saddhādīhi aggassa arahattassa patti hoti. Maṇḍapeyyanti pasannaṭṭhena maṇḍaṃ, pātabbaṭṭhena peyyaṃ. Yañhi pivitvā antaravīthiyaṃ patito visaññī attano sāṭakādīnampi assāmiko hoti, taṃ pasannampi na pātabbaṃ, mayhaṃ pana sāsanaṃ evaṃ pasannañca pātabbañcāti dassento ‘‘maṇḍapeyya’’nti āha.
这里,“精华”有三种——“教法精华”、“接受者精华”、“梵行精华”。什么是“教法精华”?宣说、开示、施设、开显、分别、显明四圣谛,宣说……乃至……显明四念处,宣说……乃至……显明圣八支道,这就是“教法精华”。什么是“接受者精华”?比丘、比丘尼、近事男、近事女、天、人,或其他任何能了知者,这就是“接受者精华”。什么是“梵行精华”?即此圣八支道,也就是:正见……乃至……正定,这就是“梵行精华”。此外,依“信根是胜解精华,不信是渣滓;舍弃不信的渣滓,饮用信根的胜解精华”等法理,此处的意义也应如此理解。“世尊现前”是此处的理由之辞。因为世尊现前,所以应当策励精进而饮此精华。外用的药精华,若不在医生面前饮用,便会有不知剂量、不知引发作用、不知排泄的疑虑;而在医生面前,则无此顾虑,心想“医生自会知道”而饮用。同样地,“我们的法主世尊现前”,为了让弟子们策励精进而饮用,在教导他们饮精华时,便说“因此,诸比丘”等。此中,“有果”即具有利益,“有增长”即具有增进。显示巴利原文
Tattha tividho maṇḍo – desanāmaṇḍo, paṭiggahamaṇḍo, brahmacariyamaṇḍoti. Katamo desanāmaṇḍo? Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ ācikkhanā desanā paññāpanā paṭṭhapanā vivaraṇā vibhajanā uttānīkammaṃ, catunnaṃ satipaṭṭhānānaṃ…pe… ariyassa aṭṭhaṅgikassa maggassa ācikkhanā…pe… uttānīkammaṃ, ayaṃ desanāmaṇḍo. Katamo paṭiggahamaṇḍo? Bhikkhū bhikkhuniyo upāsakā upāsikāyo devā manussā ye vā panaññepi keci viññātāro, ayaṃ paṭiggahamaṇḍo. Katamo brahmacariyamaṇḍo? Ayameva ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo, seyyathidaṃ – sammādiṭṭhi…pe… sammāsamādhi, ayaṃ brahmacariyamaṇḍo. Apica adhimokkhamaṇḍo saddhindriyaṃ, assaddhiyaṃ kasaṭo, assaddhiyaṃ kasaṭaṃ chaḍḍetvā saddhindriyassa adhimokkhamaṇḍaṃ pivatīti maṇḍapeyyantiādināpi (paṭi. ma. 1.238) nayenettha attho veditabbo. Satthā sammukhībhūtoti idamettha kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā satthā sammukhībhūto, tasmā vīriyasampayogaṃ katvā pivatha etaṃ maṇḍaṃ. Bāhirakañhi bhesajjamaṇḍampi vejjassa asammukhā pivantānaṃ pamāṇaṃ vā uggamanaṃ vā niggamanaṃ vā na jānāmāti āsaṅkā hoti. Vejjasammukhā pana ‘‘vejjo jānissatī’’ti nirāsaṅkā pivanti. Evameva amhākaṃ dhammassāmi satthā sammukhībhūtoti vīriyaṃ katvā pivathāti maṇḍapāne nesaṃ niyojento tasmātiha, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha saphalāti sānisaṃsā. Saudrayāti savaḍḍhi. Idāni niyojanānurūpaṃ sikkhitabbataṃ niddisanto attatthaṃ vā hi, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha attatthanti attano atthabhūtaṃ arahattaṃ. Appamādena sampādetunti appamādena sabbakiccāni kātuṃ. Paratthanti paccayadāyakānaṃ mahapphalānisaṃsaṃ. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 《近因经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Upanisasuttavaṇṇanā
23 第三经中,“我知”等语:“知”指了知者,“见”指看见者。这两个词意义相同,仅为文辞之别。尽管如此,说“知”是依智慧的特性来指称个人,因为智慧的特性就是了知。说“见”则是依智慧的威德来指称,因为智慧的威德即是能见;具足智慧之人,犹如具眼者以眼见色,能以智慧观见已显明之法。此处的“诸漏尽”:诸漏的断除、不再生起、灭尽状态、不存在,皆称为漏尽;甚至坏灭,乃至道、果、涅槃,也都可以称为漏尽。因为在“诸漏尽故,漏尽心解脱”等中,所说的即是灭尽状态。而在“诸漏的尽、衰、破、溃散、无常、消失”中,则是指坏灭。显示巴利原文
23. Tatiye ‘‘jānato aha’’ntiādīsu jānatoti jānantassa. Passatoti passantassa. Dvepi padāni ekatthāni, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘jānato’’ti ñāṇalakkhaṇaṃ upādāya puggalaṃ niddisati. Jānanalakkhaṇañhi ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Passato’’ti ñāṇappabhāvaṃ upādāya. Passanappabhāvañhi ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇasamaṅgīpuggalo cakkhumā viya cakkhunā rūpāni , ñāṇena vivaṭe dhamme passati. Āsavānaṃ khayanti ettha āsavānaṃ pahānaṃ asamuppādo khīṇākāro natthibhāvoti ayampi āsavakkhayoti vuccati, bhaṅgopi maggaphalanibbānānipi. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā anāsavaṃ cetovimutti’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.438; vibha. 831) hi khīṇākāro āsavakkhayoti vuccati. ‘‘Yo āsavānaṃ khayo vayo bhedo paribhedo aniccatā antaradhāna’’nti (vibha. 354) ettha bhaṅgo.
对于有学、正在修学、随顺正道而行者,
于漏尽中,最初是智,其后是无间智。(《如是语》62)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sekkhassa sikkhamānassa, ujumaggānusārino; Khayasmiṃ paṭhamaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tato aññā anantarā’’ti. (itivu. 62); –
此处“漏尽”指的是道。因为道是在断除、止息诸漏时生起,故说为“漏尽”。而在“由漏尽而为沙门”中,“漏尽”则指果。因为果是在诸漏灭尽时生起,故说为“漏尽”。显示巴利原文
Ettha maggo. So hi āsave khepento vūpasamento uppajjati, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vutto. ‘‘Āsavānaṃ khayā samaṇo hotī’’ti ettha phalaṃ. Tañhi āsavānaṃ khīṇante uppajjati, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttaṃ.
‘‘Āsavā tassa vaḍḍhanti, ārā so āsavakkhayā’’ti; (Dha. pa. 253) –
这里的「漏尽」指的是涅槃。因为依止涅槃,诸漏灭尽,故称「漏尽」。但在此处,实际所指是道与果。「非对不了知者、非对不见者」:意思是,不为不了知、不见的人宣说。由此,便否定了那些声称即使不了知、不见,仅凭轮回等便得清净的外道。前面两个词指示了方法,这个词则否定了非方法。显示巴利原文
Ettha nibbānaṃ. Tañhi āgamma āsavā khīyanti, tasmā āsavānaṃ khayoti vuttaṃ. Idha pana maggaphalāni adhippetāni. No ajānato no apassatoti yo pana na jānāti na passati, tassa no vadāmīti attho. Etena ye ajānato apassatopi saṃsārādīhiyeva suddhiṃ vadanti, te paṭikkhittā honti. Purimena padadvayena upāyo vutto, iminā anupāyaṃ paṭisedheti.
现在,为了说明对于了知者漏尽如何发生,而问道:「那么,比丘们,了知什么?」此处的「了知」有多种。确实,有些比丘天生就会制作伞盖,有些则擅长制作衣等,但如果是在戒律规定之外从事这些事,那样的了知并不能成为生天、修道、证果的基础,对此不应宣说。然而,有人在教法中出家后,懂得行医等事,对于这样的了知,诸漏只会增长。因此,为了显示对于「了知且见」者漏尽如何发生,才说「如是色」等。「诸比丘,如此了知」:即如此了知五蕴的生灭。「漏尽」:因为是在漏尽时生起的,所以得到漏尽之名的阿拉汉果。显示巴利原文
Idāni yaṃ jānato āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, taṃ dassetukāmo kiñca, bhikkhave, jānatoti pucchaṃ ārabhi. Tattha jānanā bahuvidhā. Dabbajātiko eva hi koci bhikkhu chattaṃ kātuṃ jānāti, koci cīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, tassa īdisāni kammāni vattasīse ṭhatvā karontassa sā jānanā saggamaggaphalānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ na hotīti na vattabbaṃ. Yo pana sāsane pabbajitvā vejjakammādīni kātuṃ jānāti, tassevaṃ jānato āsavā vaḍḍhantiyeva. Tasmā yaṃ jānato passato ca āsavānaṃ khayo hoti, tadeva dassento iti rūpantiādimāha. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, jānatoti evaṃ pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ jānantassa. Āsavānaṃ khayo hotīti āsavānaṃ khayante jātattā ‘‘āsavānaṃ khayo’’ti laddhanāmaṃ arahattaṃ hoti.
如此以阿拉汉果为极致结束说法后,为显示漏尽者所应至的前行道,而说:“诸比丘,而彼之……”。其中,“于漏尽中有漏尽智”:即在证得名为漏尽的阿拉汉果时,生起省察智。因此智于名为阿拉汉果的漏尽中,在第一刹那后生起,故称“漏尽智”。“有近因”:即具原因、具缘。“解脱”:指阿拉汉果的解脱。彼之此解脱以亲依止缘为缘。同样,此后对于所获诸法,也应当依此法了知此缘的关系。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā idāni khīṇāsavassa āgamanīyaṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadaṃ dassetuṃ yampissa taṃ, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha khayasmiṃ khayeñāṇanti āsavakkhayasaṅkhāte arahattaphale paṭiladdhe sati paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Tañhi arahattaphalasaṅkhāte khayasmiṃ paṭhamavāraṃ uppanne pacchā uppannattā khayeñāṇanti vuccati. Saupanisanti sakāraṇaṃ sappaccayaṃ. Vimuttīti arahattaphalavimutti. Sā hissa upanissayapaccayena paccayo hoti. Evaṃ ito paresupi labbhamānavasena paccayabhāvo veditabbo.
“离染”:即道。因此道于使烦恼褪尽、灭尽时生起,故称“离染”。“厌离”:指厌离智,以此显示强力观。强力观即:怖畏现起智、过患随观智、欲解脱智、行舍智,此四种智的名称。“如实知见”:指如实了知自性的见,以此显示弱力观。弱力观即:名色限定智、度疑智、思惟智、道非道智,此四种智的名称。“定”:指基础禅那之定,此为弱力观的缘。“乐”:指安止之前行乐,此为基础禅那的缘。“轻安”:指不安之平息,此为安止前行乐的缘。“喜”:指强力喜,此为不安平息的缘。“欢悦”:指弱力喜,此为强力喜的缘。“信”:指数数生起之信,此为弱力喜的缘。“苦”:指轮回之苦,此为数数生起信的缘。“生”:指变异之蕴的生,此为轮回苦的缘。“有”:指业有,此为变异之生的缘。以此方法,其余诸句亦应如此了知。显示巴利原文
Virāgoti maggo. So hi kilese virājento khepento uppanno, tasmā virāgoti vuccati. Nibbidāti nibbidāñāṇaṃ. Etena balavavipassanaṃ dasseti. Balavavipassanāti bhayatūpaṭṭhāne ñāṇaṃ ādīnavānupassane ñāṇaṃ muñcitukamyatāñāṇaṃ saṅkhārupekkhāñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Yathābhūtañāṇadassananti yathāsabhāvajānanasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ. Etena taruṇavipassanaṃ dasseti. Taruṇavipassanā hi balavavipassanāya paccayo hoti. Taruṇavipassanāti saṅkhāraparicchede ñāṇaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇe ñāṇaṃ sammasane ñāṇaṃ maggāmagge ñāṇanti catunnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Samādhīti pādakajjhānasamādhi. So hi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti. Sukhanti appanāya pubbabhāgasukhaṃ. Tañhi pādakajjhānassa paccayo hoti. Passaddhīti darathapaṭippassaddhi. Sā hi appanāpubbabhāgassa sukhassa paccayo hoti. Pītīti balavapīti. Sā hi darathapaṭippassaddhiyā paccayo hoti. Pāmojjanti dubbalapīti. Sā hi balavapītiyā paccayo hoti. Saddhāti aparāparaṃ uppajjanasaddhā. Sā hi dubbalapītiyā paccayo hoti. Dukkhanti vaṭṭadukkhaṃ. Tañhi aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hoti. Jātīti savikārā khandhajāti . Sā hi vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo hoti. Bhavoti kammabhavo. (So hi savikārāya jātiyā paccayo hoti.) Etenupāyena sesapadānipi veditabbāni.
“粗大雨滴”:指大滴。于“山、山洞、裂缝、支流”等词中:山洞,指被名为“迦”的水所切割、被水冲开的山间地带,亦称为“山腰”或“河坑”;裂缝,指八个月降雨时地面出现裂纹之处;支流,指汇入溪流的小水渠;小池,指小洼坑;大池,指大洼坑;小溪,指小河;大河,指恒河、阎牟那河等大河流。同样地,诸比丘,在“以无明为近因,生起诸行”等句中,无明应被视为山,诸行为云,识等轮回应视为这些山洞,解脱为大海。显示巴利原文
Thullaphusitaketi mahāphusitake. Pabbatakandarapadarasākhāti ettha kandaraṃ nāma ‘ka’ntiladdhanāmena udakena dārito udakabhinno pabbatapadeso, yo ‘‘nitambo’’tipi ‘‘nadīkuñcho’’tipi vuccati. Padaraṃ nāma aṭṭhamāse deve avassante phalito bhūmippadeso. Sākhāti kusumbhagāminiyo khuddakamātikāyo. Kusobbhāti khuddakaāvāṭā. Mahāsobbhāti mahāāvāṭā. Kunnadiyoti khuddakanadiyo. Mahānadiyoti gaṅgāyamunādikā mahāsaritā. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, avijjūpanisā saṅkhārātiādīsu avijjā pabbatoti daṭṭhabbā. Abhisaṅkhārā meghoti, viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ kandarādayoti, vimutti sāgaroti.
犹如雨降山顶,次第充满山涧、溪谷,最终汇入大海;应知在无明之顶上,诸行之云降雨也是如此。因为无闻的愚痴凡夫,依无明而不知,依渴爱而起欲,造作善与不善业;那善与不善业成为结生识的缘;结生识等又成为名色等的缘。如此,恰似山顶降雨,充满山涧等处,抵大海而止;同样,从无明山顶降下的诸行之云,由辗转相依的缘起,次第充满识等轮回诸支而安住。然而,即使经中未直接出现佛语,依“于此,如来出现于世,从在家而出家”等经文,当知佛语已摄其中。因为他在家中的出生,即是从业有之缘而产生的变凡夫。他亲近佛陀或佛弟子,听闻揭示轮回过患、具足种种相征的佛法言说,从而被轮回所逼;如此,他的变异有蕴之生成为轮回苦的缘。他为轮回苦所迫,辗转生起信心,从在家而出家;如此,他的轮回苦成为他屡屡生信的缘。他并不满足于仅仅出家,在不满五年的时期中,依止师长,圆满义务与行持,精通两部母论,学习何者应作、何者不应作,乃至为证阿拉汉果而解开缠结,取得业处,住于林野,开始修习地遍等禅修。由于他的业处,微弱的喜生起。显示巴利原文
Yathā pabbatamatthake devo vassitvā pabbatakandarādīni pūrento anupubbena mahāsamuddaṃ sāgaraṃ pūreti, evaṃ avijjāpabbatamatthake tāva abhisaṅkhārameghassa vassanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Assutavā hi bālaputhujjano avijjāya aññāṇī hutvā taṇhāya abhilāsaṃ katvā kusalākusalakammaṃ āyūhati, taṃ kusalākusalakammaṃ paṭisandhiviññāṇassa paccayo hoti, paṭisandhiviññāṇādīni nāmarūpādīnaṃ. Iti pabbatamatthake vuṭṭhadevassa kandarādayo pūretvā mahāsamuddaṃ āhacca ṭhitakālo viya avijjāpabbatamatthake vuṭṭhassa abhisaṅkhārameghassa paramparapaccayatāya anupubbena viññāṇādivaṭṭaṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo. Buddhavacanaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ agahitampi ‘‘idha tathāgato loke uppajjati, agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajatī’’ti imāya pāḷiyā vasena gahitamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yā hi tassa kulagehe nibbatti, sā kammabhavapaccayā savikārā jāti nāma. So buddhānaṃ vā buddhasāvakānaṃ vā sammukhībhāvaṃ āgamma vaṭṭadosadīpakaṃ lakkhaṇāhaṭaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā vaṭṭavasena pīḷito hoti, evamassa savikārā khandhajāti vaṭṭadukkhassa paccayo hoti. So vaṭṭadukkhena pīḷito aparāparaṃ saddhaṃ janetvā agārasmā anagāriyaṃ pabbajati, evamassa vaṭṭadukkhaṃ aparāparasaddhāya paccayo hoti. So pabbajjāmatteneva asantuṭṭho ūnapañcavassakāle nissayaṃ gahetvā vattapaṭipattiṃ pūrento dvemātikā paguṇaṃ katvā kammākammaṃ uggahetvā yāva arahattā nijjaṭaṃ katvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā araññe vasanto pathavīkasiṇādīsu kammaṃ ārabhati, tassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ nissāya dubbalapīti uppajjati. Tadassa saddhūpanisaṃ pāmojjaṃ, taṃ balavapītiyā paccayo hoti. Balavapīti darathapaṭippassaddhiyā, sā appanāpubbabhāgasukhassa, taṃ sukhaṃ pādakajjhānasamādhissa. So samādhinā cittakallataṃ janetvā taruṇavipassanāya kammaṃ karoti. Iccassa pādakajjhānasamādhi taruṇavipassanāya paccayo hoti, taruṇavipassanā balavavipassanāya, balavavipassanā maggassa, maggo phalavimuttiyā, phalavimutti paccavekkhaṇañāṇassāti . Evaṃ devassa anupubbena sāgaraṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo viya khīṇāsavassa vimuttisāgaraṃ pūretvā ṭhitakālo veditabboti. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 《外道经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Aññatitthiyasuttavaṇṇanā
24 第四偈中的“pāvisī”,意思是“已进入”。但他并非那时才进入,而是因为想着“我要进入”便出发了,方才如此说。好比有人想着“我要去村子”就出发,虽尚未到达那个村子,但当被问起“某某人在哪里”时,人们却说“去村子了”一样。“Atippago”:据说那天长老出发时极其早,那些一早出发的比丘们,在菩提场、塔庙场、着衣处等处,于乞食时间前做一些琐碎事务。长老心想:“在乞食时刻到来前,我要与游方者进行一两个话题的交谈。”于是他想:“我何不……?”“游方者们的园”:据说那座园位于南门与竹林精舍之间。“在此处”:指在这四种论说之中。“持何说、持何宣说?”:意思是问:“沙门乔达摩主张什么?教导什么?对此,沙门乔达摩的见解如何?”“我们应宣说法与随法”:我们应当阐释与法相应、随顺于法的道理,即宣说乔达摩尊者所持理由的随顺理由。“与法相应的论随转”:指以他人所提的理由作为自己的理由,让沙门乔达摩的论说得以随转、发起,这样又怎会招致任何显示巴利原文
24. Catutthe pāvisīti paviṭṭho. So ca na tāva paviṭṭho, ‘‘pavisissāmī’’ti nikkhantattā pana evaṃ vutto. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā ‘‘gāmaṃ gamissāmī’’ti nikkhantapuriso taṃ gāmaṃ appattopi ‘‘kahaṃ itthannāmo’’ti vutte ‘‘gāmaṃ gato’’ti vuccati, evaṃ. Atippagoti tadā kira therassa atippagoyeva nikkhantadivaso ahosi, atippagoyeva nikkhantabhikkhū bodhiyaṅgaṇe cetiyaṅgaṇe nivāsanapārupanaṭṭhāneti imesu ṭhānesu yāva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, tāva papañcaṃ karonti. Therassa pana ‘‘yāva bhikkhācāravelā hoti, tāva paribbājakehi saddhiṃ ekadvekathāvāre karissāmī’’ti cintayato yaṃnūnāhanti etadahosi. Paribbājakānaṃ ārāmoti so kira ārāmo dakkhiṇadvārassa ca veḷuvanassa ca antarā ahosi. Idhāti imesu catūsu vādesu. Kiṃvādī kimakkhāyīti kiṃ vadati kiṃ ācikkhati, kiṃ ettha samaṇassa gotamassa dassananti pucchanti. Dhammassa cānudhammaṃ byākareyyāmāti, bhotā gotamena yaṃ vuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ, tassa anukāraṇaṃ katheyyāma. Sahadhammiko vādānupātoti parehi vuttakāraṇena sakāraṇo hutvā samaṇassa gotamassa vādānupāto vādappavatti viññūhi garahitabbaṃ kāraṇaṃ koci appamattakopi kathaṃ nāgaccheyya? Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kathaṃ sabbākārenapi samaṇassa gotamassa vāde gārayhaṃ kāraṇaṃ na bhaveyyāti?
“Itivadanti”指他们这样说,即他们说“以触为缘而有苦”。“在那里”:指在那四种论说当中。“他们确实除了触以外……”此句,是对承认“那也是以触为缘”这一主张所作的论证性话语。因为离开触而感受苦确实不存在,故当知:“那也是以触为缘”,这正是此处所要表达的核心要义。显示巴利原文
Itivadanti phassapaccayā dukkhanti evaṃ vadantoti attho. Tatrāti tesu catūsu vādesu. Te vata aññatra phassāti idaṃ ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti paṭiññāya sādhakavacanaṃ. Yasmā hi na vinā phassena dukkhapaṭisaṃvedanā atthi, tasmā jānitabbametaṃ yathā ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“善哉,善哉,阿难!”——这声赞叹是给予舍利弗长老的,而世尊同时也与阿难长老交谈。“有一次……”中的“idha”仅是一个无义的虚词,意思是“一时”。这句话是为了说明:“并非只有舍利弗进入过王舍城,我也曾进入;并非只有他生起过这样的想法,我也曾生起;并非只有他与游方者们有过那样的对话,我也曾有过。”显示巴利原文
Sādhu, sādhu, ānandāti ayaṃ sādhukāro sāriputtattherassa dinno, ānandattherena pana saddhiṃ bhagavā āmantesi. Ekamidāhanti ettha idhāti nipātamattaṃ, ekaṃ samayanti attho. Idaṃ vacanaṃ ‘‘na kevalaṃ sāriputtova rājagahaṃ paviṭṭho, ahampi pāvisiṃ. Na kevalañca tassevāyaṃ vitakko uppanno, mayhampi uppajji. Na kevalañca tasseva sā titthiyehi saddhiṃ kathā jātā, mayhampi jātapubbā’’ti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
“稀有!未曾有!”这两种说法都是表示惊叹。不过,在此它们的词义是:值得合掌赞叹,故称“稀有”;前所未有而今发生,故称“未曾有”。
“以一句”:即“以触为缘而有苦”这一句。因为这一句已经表达了否定一切论说的意思。
“就是这个意思”:即“以触为缘而有苦”这一缘起的道理。
“这个意义应该在这里显现出来”:意思是这个意义应当在此处呈现。现在,长老为了把关于老死等的缘起说法阐释为义理甚深且显现甚深,在说了“如果我,尊者……”等之后,抓住这些话题所依的根本语句,开示还灭的道理,说“只是六……”等。其余的内容都浅显易懂。第四经。显示巴利原文
Acchariyaṃabbhutanti ubhayampetaṃ vimhayadīpanameva. Vacanattho panettha accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti acchariyaṃ. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti abbhutaṃ. Ekena padenāti ‘‘phassapaccayā dukkha’’nti iminā ekena padena. Etena hi sabbavādānaṃ paṭikkhepattho vutto. Esevatthoti esoyeva phassapaccayā dukkhanti paṭiccasamuppādattho. Taññevettha paṭibhātūti taññevettha upaṭṭhātu. Idāni thero jarāmaraṇādikāya paṭiccasamuppādakathāya taṃ atthagambhīrañceva gambhīrāvabhāsañca karonto sace maṃ, bhantetiādiṃ vatvā yaṃmūlakā kathā uppannā, tadeva padaṃ gahetvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento channaṃtvevātiādimāha. Sesaṃ uttānamevāti. Catutthaṃ.
第五经:浮弥佐经注显示巴利原文
5. Bhūmijasuttavaṇṇanā
25-26 25-26. 第五经中的“浮弥佐”,是那位长老的名字。其余的内容,这里也应当按照前面那一经所说的方式来理解。不过有一个特殊之处:因为此苦与乐并不仅仅以触为缘而生起,它也可以通过身而被造作,通过语,通过意;可以由自己造作,由他人造作;由有正知者造作,由无正知者造作。因此,为了显示它还有其他缘的差别,而说了:“阿难,如果在身上……”等等。
“以身思为因”:意思是以通过身门生起的思为因。对于语思和意思,也是如此。在这里,通过身门,依欲界的善与不善,有二十种思;同样,通过语门也有二十种。通过意门,加上九种色界和无色界的思,共有二十九种。如此,三门合计有六十九种思。以这些思为缘,便显示出果报的苦乐。而“以无明为缘”这句话,是为了说明那些思也是以无明为缘的。
然而,那些如前所述由种种思构成的身行、语行、意行,在没有人督促时,自己以无行的心来造作;在受人督促时,也会以有行的心来造作。又比如,知道“他造作了这样的业,此业的果报将是如此这般”,既了知业、亦了知果报而造作。显示巴利原文
25-26. Pañcame bhūmijoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Sesamidhāpi purimasutte vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Ayaṃ pana viseso – yasmā idaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ na kevalaṃ phassapaccayā uppajjati, kāyenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, vācāyapi manasāpi, attanāpi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, parenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, sampajānenapi kariyamānaṃ karīyati, asampajānenapi, tasmā tassa aparampi paccayavisesaṃ dassetuṃ kāye vā hānanda, satītiādimāha. Kāyasañcetanāhetūti kāyadvāre uppannacetanāhetu. Vacīsañcetanāmanosañcetanāsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca kāyadvāre kāmāvacarakusalākusalavasena vīsati cetanā labbhanti, tathā vacīdvāre. Manodvāre navahi rūpārūpacetanāhi saddhiṃ ekūnatiṃsāti tīsu dvāresu ekūnasattati cetanā honti, tappaccayaṃ vipākasukhadukkhaṃ dassitaṃ. Avijjāpaccayā cāti idaṃ tāpi cetanā avijjāpaccayā hontīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana taṃ yathāvuttacetanābhedaṃ kāyasaṅkhārañceva vacīsaṅkhārañca manosaṅkhārañca parehi anussāhito sāmaṃ asaṅkhārikacittena karoti, parehi kāriyamāno sasaṅkhārikacittenāpi karoti, ‘‘idaṃ nāma kammaṃ karoti, tassa evarūpo nāma vipāko bhavissatī’’ti, evaṃ kammañca vipākañca jānantopi karoti, mātāpitūsu cetiyavandanādīni karontesu anukarontā dārakā viya kevalaṃ kammameva jānanto ‘‘imassa pana kammassa ayaṃ vipāko’’ti vipākaṃ ajānantopi karoti, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ sāmaṃ vā taṃ, ānanda, kāyasaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharotītiādi vuttaṃ.
“阿难,在这些法中”:指的是在“阿难,或者自己造作那身行”等四种场合所说的七十六种思法,或说两百种思法。在这些法中,无明以亲依止的方式遍满。因为这一切思法,都含摄于“以无明为缘而有行”这一句中。现在,为了显示还灭,而说“无明灭尽……”等。
“那个身不存在”:当那个身存在时,以身思为缘,内心会产生苦乐;当那个身不存在时,便不会产生。语和意也是如此。此外,这里的“身”,也可指由思构成的行为之身,“语”指由思构成的语言,“意”指由业构成的意念。或者,“身”可理解为作为门的身体。语和意同理。
那么,对于一位漏尽者,他同样会礼敬塔庙,讲说佛法,作意业处,为何却说他的身、语、意不存在呢?因为他不感果报。漏尽者所造作的业,既非善,亦非不善,它不产生果报,唯停留在唯作的状态,因此说他的身、语、意不存在。显示巴利原文
Imesu, ānanda, dhammesūti ye ime ‘‘sāmaṃ vā taṃ, ānanda, kāyasaṅkhāra’’ntiādīsu catūsu ṭhānesu vuttā chasattati dvesatā cetanādhammā, imesu dhammesu avijjā upanissayakoṭiyā anupatitā. Sabbepi hi te ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento avijjāya tvevātiādimāha. So kāyo na hotīti yasmiṃ kāye sati kāyasañcetanāpaccayaṃ ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ uppajjati, so kāyo na hoti. Vācāmanesupi eseva nayo. Apica kāyoti cetanākāyo, vācāpi cetanāvācā, manopi kammamanoyeva. Dvārakāyo vā kāyo. Vācāmanesupi eseva nayo. Khīṇāsavo cetiyaṃ vandati, dhammaṃ bhaṇati, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karoti, kathamassa kāyādayo na hontīti? Avipākattā. Khīṇāsavena hi kataṃ kammaṃ neva kusalaṃ hoti nākusalaṃ. Avipākaṃ hutvā kiriyāmatte tiṭṭhati, tenassa te kāyādayo na hontīti vuttaṃ.
在“那个田不存在”等说法中:以生长的意义而言,那个田不存在;以依止的意义而言,事不存在;以缘的意义而言,处不存在;以因由的意义而言,诤事也不存在。实际上,以思为根本的内生苦乐应当生起,但由于那些思不具有生长等意义,所以对于那种苦乐来说,既不是田,也不是事,不是处,不是诤事。在这部经中,在谈到感受等的时候,只说了苦乐,而且那只是指果报。第五经。显示巴利原文
Khettaṃ taṃ na hotītiādīsupi viruhanaṭṭhena taṃ khettaṃ na hoti, patiṭṭhānaṭṭhena vatthu na hoti, paccayaṭṭhena āyatanaṃ na hoti, kāraṇaṭṭhena adhikaraṇaṃ na hoti. Sañcetanāmūlakañhi ajjhattaṃ sukhadukkhaṃ uppajjeyya, sā sañcetanā etesaṃ viruhanādīnaṃ atthānaṃ abhāvena tassa sukhadukkhassa neva khettaṃ, na vatthu na āyatanaṃ, na adhikaraṇaṃ hotīti. Imasmiṃ sutte vedanādīsu sukhadukkhameva kathitaṃ, tañca kho vipākamevāti. Pañcamaṃ.
第六《优波婆那经》内容浅显易懂。然而此处只讲述了流转的苦。第六经。显示巴利原文
Chaṭṭhaṃ upavāṇasuttaṃ uttānameva. Ettha pana vaṭṭadukkhameva kathitanti. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
《缘经》注释显示巴利原文
7. Paccayasuttavaṇṇanā
27-28 第七经中,按次第解说诸经时,取末句而说:“诸比丘,何谓老死?”等。“如此了知缘”,即如此依苦谛了知缘。缘的集等,亦应理解为唯依集谛等而说。“具见者”,指具备道见者。“见成就”,为其同义语。“已来此正法”,指已来到道之正法。“见”,即唯见道之正法。“以有学智”,即唯以道智。“以有学明”,即唯以道明。“入法流”,即唯入名为道之法流。“圣”,指已超越凡夫地者。“有决择慧”,指具备决择慧者。“触甘露门而住”:所谓甘露是涅槃,其门为圣道;触证圣道后而安住。第八经文义明显。第七经、第八经。显示巴利原文
27-28. Sattame paṭipāṭiyā vuttesu pariyosānapadaṃ gahetvā katamañca, bhikkhave, jarāmaraṇantiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ paccayaṃ pajānātīti evaṃ dukkhasaccavasena paccayaṃ jānāti. Paccayasamudayādayopi samudayasaccādīnaṃyeva vasena veditabbā. Diṭṭhisampannoti maggadiṭṭhiyā sampanno. Dassanasampannoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Āgato imaṃ saddhammanti maggasaddhammaṃ āgato. Passatīti maggasaddhammameva passati. Sekkhena ñāṇenāti maggañāṇeneva. Sekkhāya vijjāyāti maggavijjāya eva. Dhammasotaṃ samāpannoti maggasaṅkhātameva dhammasotaṃ samāpanno. Ariyoti puthujjanabhūmiṃ atikkanto. Nibbedhikapaññoti nibbedhikapaññāya samannāgato. Amatadvāraṃ āhaccatiṭṭhatīti amataṃ nāma nibbānaṃ, tassa dvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ āhacca tiṭṭhatīti. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva. Sattamaaṭṭhamāni.
《沙门婆罗门经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Samaṇabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
29-30 第九经是随顺诵经比丘们的意乐而说。因为他们于说法时,加入前缀“遍”(parī),便能通达。第九经。显示巴利原文
29-30. Navamaṃ akkharabhāṇakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ajjhāsayena vuttaṃ. Te hi parīti upasaggaṃ pakkhipitvā vuccamāne paṭivijjhituṃ sakkonti. Navamaṃ.
第十经,一切皆明显。于此二经中,唯阐述四圣谛的通达。第十经。显示巴利原文
Dasame sabbaṃ uttānameva. Imesu dvīsu suttesu catusaccapaṭivedhova kathito. Dasamaṃ.
迦罗罗刹帝利品显示巴利原文
4. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggo
《已生经》注释显示巴利原文
1. Bhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
31 在《迦罗罗刹帝利品》的第一经中,「阿逸多所问」指阿逸多青年所问的问题。「已数法」指已经了知、衡量、确定的法。「有学」指七种有学。「众多」即针对那七人而说「众多」。「于此」指在这教法中。「贤善者」:所谓贤善是智慧,因具足智慧而称为贤善者。他请求说:‘您是智者,请说。’‘行仪’指生活方式、行为方式、活动范围、住处、修行方式。‘君’是对世尊的称呼。‘我向您请问有学、已数法者及诸漏尽者的行道,尊者,您是智者,请为我开示。’这是此处的大意。显示巴利原文
31. Kaḷārakhattiyavaggassa paṭhame ajitapañheti ajitamāṇavena pucchitapañhe. Saṅkhātadhammāseti saṅkhātadhammā vuccanti ñātadhammā tulitadhammā tīritadhammā. Sekkhāti satta sekkhā. Puthūti teyeva satta jane sandhāya puthūti vuttaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Nipakoti nepakkaṃ vuccati paññā, tāya samannāgatattā nipako, tvaṃ paṇḍito pabrūhīti yācati. Iriyanti vuttiṃ ācāraṃ gocaraṃ vihāraṃ paṭipattiṃ. Mārisāti bhagavantaṃ ālapati. Sekkhānañca saṅkhātadhammānañca khīṇāsavānañca paṭipattiṃ mayā pucchito paṇḍita, mārisa, mayhaṃ kathehīti ayamettha saṅkhepattho.
「默然」指:为什么直到被问了三次,他还是默然不语?是对问题有疑惑,还是对意乐有疑惑?实则是对意乐有疑惑,并非对问题。据说,他这样思惟:‘导师想让我为他讲说有学与无学所应到达的修行之道,而这可以从诸多方面解说,如依蕴、界、处、缘起等。我该如何讲说,才能契合导师的意乐呢?’此时,导师思惟:‘除我之外,在诸持钵弟子中,论智慧无有能及舍利弗者。然而我问他,问到第三次,他仍默然。他是在对问题疑惑,还是对意乐疑惑?’随后了知他是‘对意乐有疑惑’。于是为了给他指出解说问题的门径,便说:‘舍利弗,你看见“这是已生”吗?’显示巴利原文
Tuṇhī ahosīti kasmā yāva tatiyaṃ puṭṭho tuṇhī ahosi? Kiṃ pañhe kaṅkhati, udāhu ajjhāsayeti? Ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati, no pañhe. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘satthā maṃ sekkhāsekkhānaṃ āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ kathāpetukāmo; sā ca khandhavasena dhātuvasena āyatanavasena paccayākāravasenāti bahūhi kāraṇehi sakkā kathetuṃ. Kathaṃ kathento nu kho satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti? Atha satthā cintesi – ‘‘ṭhapetvā maṃ añño pattaṃ ādāya caranto sāvako nāma paññāya sāriputtasamo natthi. Ayampi mayā pañhaṃ puṭṭho yāva tatiyaṃ tuṇhī eva. Pañhe nu kho kaṅkhati, udāhu ajjhāsaye’’ti. Atha ‘‘ajjhāsaye’’ti ñatvā pañhakathanatthāya nayaṃ dadamāno bhūtamidanti, sāriputta, passasīti āha.
此处,“已生”指已生起、已存在,乃是五蕴的称谓。如此,导师便以五蕴为纲,给予尊者提示:“舍利弗,你依此来解说这个问題!”由于获得了提示,对于尊者而言,问题的解答便如站在岸边的人,眼前展开一望无际的大海一般,以百种、千种门径清晰地呈现出来。于是他便解答道:“尊者,‘这是已生’等。”其中,“这是已生”指此已存在的五蕴。“以正慧看见”是指与观相应之道慧,正确地照见。“已行道”是指从持戒开始,直至阿拉汉道,为了厌离等目的而践行之道。“它是因食而生起的”:为何从此说起?此五蕴依食而住,为说明此义,故说“因食而生起”,由此开始。如此,便说明了有学者的行道。“由彼食之灭”指由于那些食的灭尽。为何从此说起?因这五蕴随着食的灭而灭,为说明此义,故说“由食灭而生”,由此开始。如此,也就说明了有学者的行道。“厌离”等语,皆应理解为表示原因之辞。“无取著而解脱”指不以四种取著执取任何事物,从而解脱。“善哉!善哉!”:世尊以此对尊者的解答表示随喜后,自己显示巴利原文
Tattha bhūtanti jātaṃ nibbattaṃ, khandhapañcakassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Iti satthā ‘‘pañcakkhandhavasena, sāriputta, imaṃ pañhaṃ kathehī’’ti therassa nayaṃ deti. Sahanayadānena pana therassa tīre ṭhitapurisassa vivaṭo ekaṅgaṇo mahāsamuddo viya nayasatena nayasahassena pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ byākaronto bhūtamidanti, bhantetiādimāha. Tattha bhūtamidanti idaṃ nibbattaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ. Sammappaññāya passatīti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya sammā passati. Paṭipanno hotīti sīlato paṭṭhāya yāva arahattamaggā nibbidādīnaṃ atthāya paṭipanno hoti. Tadāhārasambhavanti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Etaṃ khandhapañcakaṃ āhāraṃ paṭicca ṭhitaṃ, tasmā taṃ āhārasambhavaṃ nāma katvā dassetuṃ idaṃ ārabhi. Iti imināpi pariyāyena sekkhapaṭipadā kathitā hoti. Tadāhāranirodhāti tesaṃ āhārānaṃ nirodhena. Idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Tañhi khandhapañcakaṃ āhāranirodhā nirujjhati, tasmā taṃ āhāranirodhasambhavaṃ nāma katvā dassetuṃ idaṃ ārabhi. Iti imināpi pariyāyena sekkhasseva paṭipadā kathitā. Nibbidāti ādīni sabbāni kāraṇavacanānīti veditabbāni. Anupādā vimuttoti catūhi upādānehi kañci dhammaṃ agahetvā vimutto. Sādhu sādhūti iminā therassa byākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsetvā sayampi tatheva byākaronto puna ‘‘bhūtamida’’ntiādimāhāti. Paṭhamaṃ.
《迦罗罗经》注释显示巴利原文
2. Kaḷārasuttavaṇṇanā
32 第二经中,“迦罗罗刹帝利”是那位长老的名字。他的牙齿黄褐且形状不平,因此被称为“迦罗罗”。“退转于低劣”的意思是为了低劣的在家人生活而退转回去。“未得安息”意思是确实没有得到安息、依靠与立足之处,这表明他肯定未曾证得三道与三果。若已证得那些,他绝无可能舍弃学处,退转于低贱。这是长老的本意。“贤友,我不疑惑”意思是:“贤友,对于‘是否已得安息’,我并无疑惑。”因为长老以声闻波罗蜜智为依归,所以他不感疑惑。而“贤友,未来”一句,是询问他是否证得阿拉汉果,即询问:“你们未来的结生已被断除,还是未被断除?”“贤友,我不疑惑”通过这句,长老表明了自己对此无有疑惑的状态。显示巴利原文
32. Dutiye kaḷārakhattiyoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Dantā panassa kaḷārā visamasaṇṭhānā, tasmā ‘‘kaḷāro’’ti vuccati. Hīnāyāvattoti hīnassa gihibhāvassa atthāya nivatto. Assāsamalatthāti assāsaṃ avassayaṃ patiṭṭhaṃ na hi nūna alattha, tayo magge tīṇi ca phalāni nūna nālatthāti dīpeti. Yadi hi tāni labheyya, na sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvatteyyāti ayaṃ therassa adhippāyo. Na khvāhaṃ, āvusoti ahaṃ kho, āvuso, ‘‘assāsaṃ patto, na patto’’ti na kaṅkhāmi. Therassa hi sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ avassayo, tasmā so na kaṅkhati. Āyatiṃ panāvusoti iminā ‘‘āyatiṃ paṭisandhi tumhākaṃ ugghāṭitā, na ugghāṭitā’’ti arahattappattiṃ pucchati. Na khvāhaṃ, āvuso, vicikicchāmīti iminā thero tattha vicikicchābhāvaṃ dīpeti.
“前往世尊处”意思是:“我要把这听闻的因缘禀告世尊”,于是便前往。“已记说了证智”即记说了证得阿拉汉果。“生已尽”并非由长老亲口如此记说,而是这位长老满心欢喜、心满意足,如此添上词句说出来罢了。导师听闻后便思惟:“舍利弗智慧深邃、善巧沉稳。他不会无缘无故地这样说。不过,问题将会被简略地回答。我去将他唤来,让他解答这个问题吧。”于是便吩咐一位置比丘。显示巴利原文
Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti ‘‘imaṃ sutakāraṇaṃ bhagavato ārocessāmī’’ti upasaṅkami. Aññā byākatāti arahattaṃ byākataṃ. Khīṇā jātīti na therena evaṃ byākatā, ayaṃ pana thero tuṭṭho pasanno evaṃ padabyañjanāni āropetvā āha. Aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesīti taṃ sutvā satthā cintesi – ‘‘sāriputto dhīro gambhīro. Na so kenaci kāraṇena evaṃ byākarissati. Saṃkhittena pana pañho byākato bhavissati. Pakkosāpetvā naṃ pañhaṃ byākarāpessāmī’’ti aññataraṃ bhikkhuṃ āmantesi.
“舍利弗,假如你……”这一段,是世尊为了让他宣说证悟而这样问的,他心想:“他不会依自己的习性宣说证悟,我先问他这个问题,他一面解说,一面就会宣说证悟。”“贤友,生以什么为缘”意思是:“贤友,所谓生,它以什么为缘?因为那个缘的灭尽,我已知‘当生的缘灭尽了,生这种果也就灭尽了’。”这里,长老并非对问题有疑惑,而是对世尊的内心意图有疑惑。据说他当时这样想:“所谓证悟,可以用‘渴爱灭尽’‘取灭尽’‘有灭尽’‘缘灭尽’‘烦恼灭尽’等多种理由来回答;但怎样的解说才能把握导师的内心意图呢?”显示巴利原文
Sace taṃ sāriputtāti idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘na esa attano dhammatāya aññaṃ byākarissati, pañhametaṃ pucchissāmi, taṃ kathentova aññaṃ byākarissatī’’ti aññaṃ byākarāpetuṃ evaṃ pucchi. Yaṃnidānāvuso, jātīti, āvuso, ayaṃ jāti nāma yaṃpaccayā, tassa paccayassa khayā khīṇasmiṃ jātiyā paccaye jātisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ khīṇanti viditaṃ. Idhāpi ca thero pañhe akaṅkhitvā ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati. Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘aññā nāma taṇhā khīṇā, upādānaṃ khīṇaṃ, bhavo khīṇo, paccayo khīṇo, kilesā khīṇātiādīhi bahūhi kāraṇehi sakkā byākātuṃ, kathaṃ kathento pana satthu ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti.
虽然他对世尊的内心意图仍有疑惑,但他并没有将问题搁置一旁,而是依缘起的方式来回答。导师也正是希望他以缘起的方式回答,因此他在回答的同时也把握了世尊的内心意图。他立刻了知:“我已把握了导师的内心意图。”于是,这个问题的解答便以百种方式、千种方式在他心中呈现。然而因为世尊又进一步提问,应知世尊对此解答是随喜的。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi evaṃ ajjhāsaye kaṅkhati, pañhaṃ pana aṭṭhapetvāva paccayākāravasena byākāsi. Satthāpi paccayākāravaseneva byākarāpetukāmo, tasmā esa byākarontova ajjhāsayaṃ gaṇhi. Tāvadeva ‘‘gahito me satthu ajjhāsayo’’ti aññāsi. Athassa nayasatena nayasahassena pañhabyākaraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāsi. Yasmā pana bhagavā uttari pañhaṃ pucchati, tasmā tena taṃ byākaraṇaṃ anumoditanti veditabbaṃ.
那么,为什么要引出“如何了知你……”这一段呢?是为了让他在自己擅长的领域作狮子吼。据说,长老曾在须卡那卡塔列那洞门口,当世尊为长爪游方者开示《受取受经》时,他手执扇子为导师扇风,站在一旁总摄三种受,从而证得了声闻波罗蜜智。这正是他擅长的领域。世尊知道他将安住于此领域作狮子吼,因此特意问了他这个问题。“无常”:因为存在后又归于无,所以称为无常。“凡无常者,是苦”:在此,乐受在持续时为乐,在变异时则为苦;苦受在持续时为苦,在变异时则为乐;不苦不乐受在觉知时为乐,在不觉知时为苦。然而,若从变异的边际来看,一切受皆称为苦。“了知”:因为如此了知这三种受都是苦,这表明在此情况下渴爱不会生起。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃjānato pana teti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Savisaye sīhanādaṃ nadāpetuṃ. Thero kira sūkaranikhātaleṇadvāre dīghanakhaparibbājakassa vedanāpariggahasutte kathiyamāne tālavaṇṭaṃ gahetvā satthāraṃ bījayamāno ṭhito tisso vedanā pariggahetvā sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ adhigato, ayamassa savisayo. Imasmiṃ savisaye ṭhito sīhanādaṃ nadissatīti naṃ sandhāya satthā idaṃ pañhaṃ pucchi. Aniccāti hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā. Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhanti ettha kiñcāpi sukhā vedanā ṭhitisukhā vipariṇāmadukkhā, dukkhā vedanā ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhā, adukkhamasukhā ñāṇasukhā aññāṇadukkhā, vipariṇāmakoṭiyā pana sabbāva dukkhā nāma jātā. Viditanti yasmā evaṃ vedanāttayaṃ dukkhanti viditaṃ, tasmā yā tattha taṇhā, sā na upaṭṭhāsīti dasseti.
“善哉,善哉”是对尊者能辨别诸受的随喜赞叹。因为尊者虽未被直接告知受是一、二、三或四种,却依世尊所说的方法,自己了知了受的三种区分,因此世尊欢喜地这样赞叹。“于苦中”这一段,世尊的意图是这样的:“舍利弗,你以‘由于这个原因,渴爱不会在诸受中生起’来回答,这是善答。但你在分别三受时,说得过于详尽;即使你只回答‘于苦中’,也同样是善答。因为只要了知‘凡感受皆苦’,渴爱便不会住着于诸受。”显示巴利原文
Sādhusādhūti therassa vedanāparicchedajānane sampahaṃsanaṃ. Thero hi vedanā ekāti vā dve tisso catassoti vā avuttepi vuttanayena tāsaṃ tissoti paricchedaṃ aññāsi, tena taṃ bhagavā sampahaṃsanto evamāha. Dukkhasminti idaṃ bhagavā iminā adhippāyena āha – ‘‘sāriputta, yaṃ tayā ‘iminā kāraṇena vedanāsu taṇhā na upaṭṭhāsī’ti byākataṃ, taṃ subyākataṃ. ‘Tisso vedanā’ti vibhajantena pana te atippapañco kato, taṃ ‘dukkhasmi’nti byākarontenapi hi te subyākatameva bhaveyya. Yaṃkiñci vedayitaṃ, taṃ dukkhanti ñātamattepi hi vedanāsu taṇhā na tiṭṭhati’’.
“如何解脱”的意思是:哪些解脱?你通过哪一种解脱而宣称证悟?“内解脱”指以内解脱,即通过把握内在诸行而证得阿拉汉果。这里应知有四种情况:内倾向内出起、内倾向外出起、外倾向外出起、外倾向内出起。的确,心倾向于内之后,也须观察外在的诸法;倾向于外之后,也须观察内在的诸法。因此,有些比丘将慧投向内在诸行,决断它们之后又转向外部,把握外部后再转向内部,当观察内在诸行时,道便生起。这称为内倾向内出起。有些比丘将慧投向内在诸行,决断它们之后转向外部,当观察外在诸行时,道便生起。这称为内倾向外出起。有些比丘将慧投向外在诸行,决断它们之后转向内部,把握内部后再转向外部,当观察外在诸行时,道便生起。这称为外倾向外出起。有些比丘将慧投向外在诸行,决断它们之后转向内部,当观察内在诸行时,道便生起。这称为外倾向内出起。尊者为了表明:‘我通过把握内在诸行,在决断它们时,以道的出起证得阿拉汉果’,因此说:‘贤友,我以内解脱……’显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ vimokkhāti katarā vimokkhā, katarena vimokkhena tayā aññā byākatāti attho? Ajjhattaṃ vimokkhāti ajjhattavimokkhena, ajjhattasaṅkhāre pariggahetvā pattaarahattenāti attho. Tattha catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ – ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ, ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ, bahiddhā abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ, bahiddhā abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānanti. Ajjhattañhi abhinivesitvā bahiddhādhammāpi daṭṭhabbāyeva, bahiddhā abhinivesitvā ajjhattadhammāpi. Tasmā koci bhikkhu ajjhattaṃ saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā bahiddhā otāreti, bahiddhāpi pariggahetvā puna ajjhattaṃ otāreti, tassa ajjhatta saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci ajjhattaṃ saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā bahiddhā otāreti, tassa bahiddhā saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti ajjhattaṃ abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci bahiddhā saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā, te vavatthapetvā ajjhattaṃ otāreti, ajjhattampi pariggahetvā puna bahiddhā otāreti, tassa bahiddhā saṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti bahiddhā abhiniveso bahiddhā vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Koci bahiddhā saṅkhāresu ñāṇaṃ otāretvā te vavatthapetvā ajjhattaṃ otāreti, tassa ajjhattasaṅkhāre sammasanakāle maggavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti. Iti bahiddhā abhiniveso ajjhattaṃ vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Tatra thero ‘‘ajjhattasaṅkhāre pariggahetvā tesaṃ vavatthānakāle maggavuṭṭhānena arahattaṃ pattosmī’’ti dassento ajjhattaṃ vimokkhā khvāhaṃ, āvusoti āha.
“由一切取的灭尽”:指四种取完全灭尽。“我如此具念而住”:我以那样的方式具足正念而安住。“如此具念而住者”:以那样的方式具足正念而安住的我。“诸漏不流注”:对于眼所见之色等,那些依六门于六所缘上流注、漏出的欲漏、有漏等烦恼,不再流注、亦不增长,也就是说它们不会在我心中生起。“也不轻视自己”:我不轻视自己。这表明他已断除慢心。如此,此了知便转化为清净的信心。显示巴利原文
Sabbupādānakkhayāti sabbesaṃ catunnampi upādānānaṃ khayena. Tathā sato viharāmīti tenākārena satiyā samannāgato viharāmi. Yathā sataṃ viharantanti yenākārena maṃ satiyā samannāgataṃ viharantaṃ. Āsavā nānussavantīti cakkhuto rūpe savanti āsavanti sandanti pavattantīti evaṃ chahi dvārehi chasu ārammaṇesu savanadhammā kāmāsavādayo āsavā nānussavanti nānuppavaḍḍhanti, yathā me na uppajjantīti attho. Attānañca nāvajānāmīti attānañca na avajānāmi. Iminā omānapahānaṃ kathitaṃ. Evañhi sati pajānanā pasannā hoti.
“沙门”:指佛陀沙门。“于彼我不疑”:对于这些漏,我不怀疑“什么是欲漏,什么是有漏,什么是见漏,什么是无明漏”的各自差别,也不怀疑“有四漏”的数量界定。“它们已被我断除,我无有疑”:它们已为我所断除,我不再生起疑惑。世尊说这段话,是为了表明:“你即使这样回答,也算善答;但你说‘贤友,我以内解脱……’等,便过于繁琐了。”显示巴利原文
Samaṇenāti buddhasamaṇena. Tesvāhaṃ na kaṅkhāmīti tesu ahaṃ ‘‘kataro kāmāsavo, kataro bhavāsavo, kataro diṭṭhāsavo, kataro avijjāsavo’’ti evaṃ sarūpabhedatopi, ‘‘cattāro āsavā’’ti evaṃ gaṇanaparicchedatopi na kaṅkhāmi. Te me pahīnāti na vicikicchāmīti te mayhaṃ pahīnāti vicikicchaṃ na uppādemi. Idaṃ bhagavā ‘‘evaṃ byākarontenapi tayā subyākataṃ bhaveyya ‘ajjhattaṃ vimokkhā khvāhaṃ, āvuso’tiādīni pana te vadantena atippapañco kato’’ti dassento āha.
“从座而起入精舍”:即从铺设好的殊胜佛座起身,走入精舍内的香室,而当时大众尚未散去。为何如此?因为佛陀在说法未结束、大众未散时,从座起身进入香室,或是为了赞叹某人,或是为了赞叹法。若为赞叹人物而入,导师会这样思惟:“我简略宣说了纲要,但未详细解释这个法,那些领受法义的比丘们,会去亲近阿难或迦旃延而请问,他们会与我的智慧相应而开解,随后那些受法者又回来问我。那时我将赞叹他们说:‘比丘们,阿难说得好,迦旃延说得好。就算你们来问我这个道理,我也会作完全一样的解说。’以此赞叹这些人物。比丘们因此生起恭敬,便去亲近他们,而这些比丘也会在义与法上策励他们,受策励者将圆满三学,最终灭尽众苦。”显示巴利原文
Uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisīti paññattavarabuddhāsanato uṭṭhahitvā vihāraṃ antomahāgandhakuṭiṃ pāvisi asambhinnāya eva parisāya. Kasmā? Buddhā hi aniṭṭhitāya desanāya asambhinnāya parisāya uṭṭhāyāsanā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisantā puggalathomanatthaṃ vā pavisanti dhammathomanatthaṃ vā. Tattha puggalathomanatthaṃ pavisanto satthā evaṃ cintesi – ‘‘imaṃ mayā saṃkhittena uddesaṃ uddiṭṭhaṃ vitthārena ca avibhattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakā bhikkhū uggahetvā ānandaṃ vā kaccāyanaṃ vā upasaṅkamitvā pucchissanti, te mayhaṃ ñāṇena saṃsandetvā kathessanti, tatopi dhammapaṭiggāhakā puna maṃ pucchissanti. Tesamahaṃ ‘sukathitaṃ, bhikkhave, ānandena, sukathitaṃ kaccāyanena, maṃ cepi tumhe etamatthaṃ puccheyyātha, ahampi naṃ evameva byākareyya’nti evaṃ te puggale thomessāmi. Tato tesu gāravaṃ janetvā bhikkhū upasaṅkamissanti, tepi bhikkhū atthe ca dhamme ca niyojessanti, te tehi niyojitā tisso sikkhā paripūretvā dukkhassantaṃ karissantī’’ti.
或者,导师又想:“我离开之后,他将显示自己的威力,随后我也同样赞叹他。比丘们听了我的赞叹而生起恭敬,就会认为应当亲近他,应当听闻并信受他的话,这将长夜为他们带来利益和安乐。”若为赞叹法而入,则如《法嗣经》中所思的那样。在那里,他这样想:“我进入精舍之后,就呵斥执着财物为继承,而赞叹以法为继承的舍利弗,他正坐在这大众中说法。如此,我们二者以同一意乐、同一智慧所宣说的教法,将变得最崇高、最受尊重,犹如石板伞盖一般。”显示巴利原文
Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – ‘‘esa mayi pakkante attano ānubhāvaṃ karissati, atha naṃ ahampi tatheva thomessāmi, taṃ mama thomanaṃ sutvā gāravajātā bhikkhū imaṃ upasaṅkamitabbaṃ, vacanañcassa sotabbaṃ saddhātabbaṃ maññissanti, taṃ tesaṃ bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti dhammathomanatthaṃ pavisanto evaṃ cintesi yathā dhammadāyādasutte cintesi. Tatra hissa evaṃ ahosi – ‘‘mayi vihāraṃ paviṭṭhe āmisadāyādaṃ garahanto dhammadāyādañca thomento imissaṃyeva parisati nisinno sāriputto dhammaṃ desessati, evaṃ dvinnampi amhākaṃ ekajjhāsayāya matiyā desitā ayaṃ desanā aggā ca garukā ca bhavissati pāsāṇacchattasadisā’’ti.
然而在此,世尊为了称赞个人——即为了称扬、彰显尊者舍利弗,并将他树立起来——而从座起身,进入精舍。应当知道,在如此的情形中,世尊正是于所坐之座便隐没身形,以心念进入精舍。因为如果以身体走过去,全体大众都会围绕世尊一同跟去;而大众一旦散开,便极难再聚集起来,所以世尊以不可见的身体,唯以心念而入。显示巴利原文
Idha pana āyasmantaṃ sāriputtaṃ ukkaṃsetvā pakāsetvā ṭhapetukāmo puggalathomanatthaṃ uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ pāvisi. Īdisesu ṭhānesu bhagavā nisinnāsaneyeva antarahito cittagatiyā vihāraṃ pavisatīti veditabbo. Yadi hi kāyagatiyā gaccheyya, sabbā parisā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā gaccheyya, sā ekavāraṃ bhinnā puna dussannipātā bhaveyyāti bhagavā adissamānena kāyena cittagatiyā eva pāvisi.
世尊如此进入之后,尊者舍利弗便想发出与世尊心意相应的狮子吼。那时,在世尊离去后不久,尊者舍利弗告诉比丘们。“‘先前未了知’:指的是将要被问及的这个问题,之前我未曾知晓、未曾认识到。‘第一个问题’:即‘舍利弗,若有人这样问您:“贤友舍利弗,您如何知、如何见,而能记说‘生已尽’呢?”’这便是第一个问题。‘迟缓’:为了了知导师的心意而显得迟缓,不迅速。‘随喜第一个问题’:即在问第二个问题‘贤友舍利弗,生以什么为缘?’时,随喜了那个已经解答的第一问——‘贤友,生以……为缘’。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paviṭṭhe pana bhagavati bhagavato adhippāyānurūpameva sīhanādaṃ naditukāmo tatra kho āyasmā sāriputto acirapakkantassa bhagavato bhikkhū āmantesi. Pubbe appaṭisaṃviditanti idaṃ nāma pucchissatīti pubbe mayā aviditaṃ aññātaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ pañhanti, ‘‘sace taṃ, sāriputta, evaṃ puccheyyuṃ kathaṃ jānatā pana tayā, āvuso sāriputta, kathaṃ passatā aññā byākatā khīṇā jātī’’ti imaṃ paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ. Dandhāyitattanti satthu āsayajānanatthaṃ dandhabhāvo asīghatā. Paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodīti, ‘‘jāti panāvuso sāriputta, kiṃnidānā’’ti imaṃ dutiyaṃ pañhaṃ pucchanto, ‘‘yaṃnidānāvuso, jātī’’ti evaṃ vissajjitaṃ paṭhamaṃ pañhaṃ anumodi.
‘于是心生此念’:因为世尊随喜之后,凭借百种理趣、千种理趣,这个问题变得通彻明朗,所以生起此念。‘即使整日,我也能为世尊解说此义’:即使被问一整天,我也能以种种词句,为世尊解说这缘起之义。‘便去世尊那里’:据说他这样想:‘这位长老发出了广大的狮子吼,此事甚善,我当前往禀告十力者。’于是便去世尊那里。显示巴利原文
Etadahosīti bhagavatā anumodite nayasatena nayasahassena pañhassa ekaṅgaṇikabhāvena pākaṭībhūtattā etaṃ ahosi. Divasampāhaṃ bhagavato etamatthaṃ byākareyyanti sakaladivasampi ahaṃ bhagavato etaṃ paṭiccasamuppādatthaṃ puṭṭho sakaladivasampi aññamaññehi padabyañjanehi byākareyyaṃ. Yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘thero uḷārasīhanādaṃ nadati, sukāraṇaṃ etaṃ, dasabalassa naṃ ārocessāmī’’ti. Tasmā yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami.
“比丘!所谓‘舍利弗的法界’”:此处“法界”指能照见缘相开显的声闻波罗蜜智。声闻的波罗蜜智,实与一切知智同一趣向。正如诸佛对过去、未来、现在的一切法,于一切知智中悉皆明见,同样地,长老的声闻波罗蜜智也了知声闻智境中的一切法。第二(经结束)。显示巴利原文
Sā hi bhikkhu sāriputtassa dhammadhātūti ettha dhammadhātūti paccayākārassa vivaṭabhāvadassanasamatthaṃ sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ. Sāvakānañhi sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇagatikameva hoti. Yathā buddhānaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppannā dhammā sabbaññutaññāṇassa pākaṭā honti, evaṃ therassa sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ sabbepi sāvakañāṇassa gocaradhamme jānātīti. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 智事经注释显示巴利原文
3. Ñāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
33 第三:“听那个”——即听那个智事的开示。“智事”:于此应知,智本身即是智事。在“于老死智”等四种中,第一种有四种智:闻所成智、思察智、证得智、观察智,这是适宜的;第二种也是如此。第三种则除去思察智,唯有三种;第四种也是如此。因为在出世间法中,并无思察这回事。在“于生智”等中,道理相同。“以此法”:即以此四谛法,或以此道智法。显示巴利原文
33. Tatiye taṃ suṇāthāti taṃ ñāṇavatthudesanaṃ suṇātha. Ñāṇavatthūnīti cettha ñāṇameva ñāṇavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Jarāmaraṇe ñāṇantiādīsu catūsu paṭhamaṃ savanamayañāṇaṃ sammasanañāṇaṃ paṭivedhañāṇaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇanti catubbidhaṃ vaṭṭati, tathā dutiyaṃ. Tatiyaṃ pana ṭhapetvā sammasanañāṇaṃ tividhameva hoti, tathā catutthaṃ. Lokuttaradhammesu hi sammasanaṃ nāma natthi. Jātiyā ñāṇantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Iminā dhammenāti iminā catusaccadhammena vā maggañāṇadhammena vā.
在“所见”等语中:“所见”指以智眼所见;“所知”指以慧所了知;“无时的”指不待时日,于证得后即刻授予果;“已得”指已证得;“深入”指以慧彻入、以慧深解。“于过去未来运用理趣”:即依“凡有……”等理趣,于过去、未来运用之。于此,并非能以四谛法或道智法去运用过去未来,而是以道智证得四谛之后,随后有观察智生起。应知是以彼观察智来运用理趣。“曾证知”:即证知、了知。“如我今”:如同我今依四谛所了知。“随顺智”:即随顺之智,随法智而行的智,这是观察智的别名。“于法智”:指道智。此经中宣说了漏尽者的有学地。第三(经结束)。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhenātiādīsu diṭṭhenāti ñāṇacakkhunā diṭṭhena. Viditenāti paññāya viditena. Akālikenāti kiñci kālaṃ anatikkamitvā paṭivedhānantaraṃyeva phaladāyakena. Pattenāti adhigatena. Pariyogāḷhenāti pariyogāhitena paññāya anupaviṭṭhena. Atītānāgate nayaṃ netīti ‘‘ye kho kecī’’tiādinā nayena atīte ca anāgate ca nayaṃ neti. Ettha ca na catusaccadhammena vā maggañāṇadhammena vā sakkā atītānāgate nayaṃ netuṃ, catusacce pana maggañāṇena paṭividdhe parato paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ nāma hoti. Tena nayaṃ netīti veditabbā. Abbhaññaṃsūti abhiaññaṃsu jāniṃsu. Seyyathāpāhaṃ, etarahīti yathā ahaṃ etarahi catusaccavasena jānāmi. Anvaye ñāṇanti anuaye ñāṇaṃ, dhammañāṇassa anugamane ñāṇaṃ, paccavekkhaṇañāṇassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Dhamme ñāṇanti maggañāṇaṃ. Imasmiṃ sutte khīṇāsavassa sekkhabhūmi kathitā hoti. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 第二智事经注释显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyañāṇavatthusuttavaṇṇanā
34 第四段。“sattasattarī”即七处与七观。据说,那些比丘是专精于文句的持诵者,当以丰富文句宣说时,他们便能证悟,因此为顺应他们的意乐而说此经。“法住智”即对缘相(paccayākāra)的智。缘相乃是诸法生起与安住的原因,故称为法住;对此的智即是法住智,这其实是那六种智的异名。“灭尽法”即具有灭尽的性质。“灭法”即具有坏灭的性质。“离贪法”即具有离染的性质。“止灭法”即具有止灭的性质。“七处七观”即于每一处作七种观察,于十一处作此观,即成七处七观。于此经中,宣说了观与对观(vipassanāpaṭivipassanā)。第四段。显示巴利原文
34. Catutthe sattasattarīti satta ca sattari ca. Byañjanabhāṇakā kira te bhikkhū, bahubyañjanaṃ katvā vuccamāne paṭivijjhituṃ sakkonti, tasmā tesaṃ ajjhāsayena idaṃ suttaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ. Paccayākāro hi dhammānaṃ pavattiṭṭhitikāraṇattā dhammaṭṭhitīti vuccati, ettha ñāṇaṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, etasseva chabbidhassa ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khayadhammanti khayagamanasabhāvaṃ. Vayadhammanti vayagamanasabhāvaṃ. Virāgadhammanti virajjanasabhāvaṃ. Nirodhadhammanti nirujjhanasabhāvaṃ. Sattasattarīti ekekasmiṃ satta satta katvā ekādasasu padesu sattasattari. Imasmiṃ sutte vipassanāpaṭivipassanā kathitā. Catutthaṃ.
无明缘经的注释。显示巴利原文
5. Avijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
35 第五段。“集起存在”:导师在此便终止了说法。是何缘故呢?是为了给予那位见行者提问的机会。因为在那集会中,有一位心存质问之意的见行者,他将提出问题,届时我将为他解答——为了给予他机会,便在此终止了说法。“不适当的提问”即不合宜的提问,意思是这是个恶问。难道“尊者,什么是老死?”这样问就是善问吗?虽说这本身是善问,但如同在价值十万金钱的金钵中盛满美味佳肴,顶上却放了一小团粪,所有食物都变成了不得不丢弃的秽食;同样地,“那么,这老死属于谁呢?”这一蕴含着执著有情之论的话语,就像那粪团一样,使整个提问沦为恶问,正如那食物变成秽食一般。显示巴利原文
35. Pañcame samudayo hotīti satthā idheva desanaṃ osāpesi. Kiṃkāraṇāti? Diṭṭhigatikassa okāsadānatthaṃ. Tassañhi parisati upārambhacitto diṭṭhigatiko atthi, so pañhaṃ pucchissati, athassāhaṃ vissajjessāmīti tassa okāsadānatthaṃ desanaṃ osāpesi. No kallo pañhoti ayutto pañho. Duppañho esoti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘katamaṃ nu kho, bhante, jarāmaraṇa’’nti? Idaṃ supucchitanti. Kiñcāpi supucchitaṃ, yathā pana satasahassagghanike suvaṇṇathāle vaḍḍhitassa subhojanassa matthake āmalakamattepi gūthapiṇḍe ṭhapite sabbaṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ hoti chaḍḍetabbaṃ, evameva ‘‘kassa ca panidaṃ jarāmaraṇa’’nti? Iminā sattūpaladdhivādapadena gūthapiṇḍena taṃ bhojanaṃ dubbhojanaṃ viya ayampi sabbo duppañhova jātoti.
“梵行住”即圣道住。“彼命即是彼身”:若有人持此见者,即如是执取——“当命被断灭时,身亦被断灭;当身被断灭时,命亦被断灭”。当他如此执取时,此见由于执取了“有情被断灭”,故称之为断见。然而,若他执取“唯诸行生起并灭去”,那么这便成为教法范围内的正见。再者,所说的圣道,是为灭轮回、为截断轮转而生的;若执取断见的那种情形真实成立,那么轮回便已无需修道而灭去,如此则修道徒劳无益。因此说“梵行住不存在”。显示巴利原文
Brahmacariyavāsoti ariyamaggavāso. Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīranti yassa hi ayaṃ diṭṭhi, so ‘‘jīve ucchijjamāne sarīraṃ ucchijjati, sarīre ucchijjante jīvitaṃ ucchijjatī’’ti gaṇhāti. Evaṃ gaṇhato sā diṭṭhi ‘‘satto ucchijjatī’’ti gahitattā ucchedadiṭṭhi nāma hoti . Sace pana saṅkhārāva uppajjanti ceva nirujjhanti cāti gaṇheyya, sāsanāvacarā sammādiṭṭhi nāma bhaveyya. Ariyamaggo ca nāmeso vaṭṭaṃ nirodhento vaṭṭaṃ samucchindanto uppajjati , tadeva taṃ vaṭṭaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhiyā gahitākārassa sambhave sati vināva maggabhāvanāya nirujjhatīti maggabhāvanā niratthakā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmacariyavāso na hotī’’ti.
第二种解释。“命异身异”:凡持此见者,执取“身在此处断灭,命却不断灭,命犹如笼中之鸟,随心所欲而去”。如此执取时,此见因执取“命从此世去往他世”而被称为常见。然而,此圣道是为了令三界轮回转向而生起的;若有一法是恒常、稳固、永恒的,那么即使圣道生起,也不能令轮回转向,修道便徒劳无益。因此说:“若比丘持有‘命异身异’之见,则梵行住便不存在。”显示巴利原文
Dutiyanaye aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti yassa ayaṃ diṭṭhi, so ‘‘sarīraṃ idheva ucchijjati, na jīvitaṃ, jīvitaṃ pana pañjarato sakuṇo viya yathāsukhaṃ gacchatī’’ti gaṇhāti. Evaṃ gaṇhato sā diṭṭhi ‘‘imasmā lokā jīvitaṃ paralokaṃ gata’’nti gahitattā sassatadiṭṭhi nāma hoti. Ayañca ariyamaggo tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭento uppajjati, so ekasaṅkhārepi nicce dhuve sassate sati uppannopi vaṭṭaṃ vivaṭṭetuṃ na sakkotīti maggabhāvanā niratthakā hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīranti vā bhikkhu diṭṭhiyā sati brahmacariyavāso na hotī’’ti.
“visūkāyikānī”等,都是邪见的同义词。此邪见因能穿刺正见而如同针棘,且自我障蔽,故称 visūkāyika;因不随顺正见、与正见相违而生起,故称 visevita;因时而执取断灭、时而执取常住,故称为种种动摇、种种翻腾(virūpaṃ phanditaṃ vipphanditaṃ)。“已作多罗树桩”即如同多罗树桩一般被作成,意思是:如同被截去顶梢的多罗树不能再生长,如同连根拔除多罗树后形成树桩那样,被做成不再生起的状态。“已作无有”即已使其成为无有。这是第五段。显示巴利原文
Visūkāyikānītiādi sabbaṃ micchādiṭṭhivevacanameva. Sā hi sammādiṭṭhiyā vinivijjhanaṭṭhena visūkamiva attānaṃ āvaraṇato visūkāyikaṃ, sammādiṭṭhiṃ ananuvattitvā tassā virodhena pavattanato visevitaṃ, kadāci ucchedassa kadāci sassatassa gahaṇato virūpaṃ phanditaṃ vipphanditanti vuccati. Tālāvatthukatānīti tālavatthu viya katāni, puna aviruhaṇaṭṭhena matthakacchinnatālo viya samūlaṃ tālaṃ uddharitvā tassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ viya ca katānīti attho. Anabhāvaṃkatānīti anuabhāvaṃ katānīti. Pañcamaṃ.
第二部无明缘经的注释。显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyaavijjāpaccayasuttavaṇṇanā
36 第六段。“比丘们,或者有人这样说”:在那集会中,有一位见行者想要提问,但他禀性缺乏自信,不能站起来向十力者提问。因此,随顺他的意乐,导师亲自提出问难并加以解答,而说了这番话。这是第六段。显示巴利原文
36. Chaṭṭhe iti vā, bhikkhave, yo vadeyyāti tassaṃ parisati diṭṭhigatiko pañhaṃ pucchitukāmo atthi, so pana avisāradadhātuko uṭṭhāya dasabalaṃ pucchituṃ na sakkoti, tasmā tassa ajjhāsayena sayameva pucchitvā vissajjento satthā evamāha. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
第七经《非汝等所应经》的注释显示巴利原文
7. Natumhasuttavaṇṇanā
37 第七段。关于“非汝等所有”(na tumhākaṃ):如果有“我”,才会有“我所”。然而“我”即不存在,因此世尊说“非汝等所有”。关于“亦非他人所有”(napi aññesaṃ):所谓“他人”,是指其他众生的“我”;若他人的“我”存在,才可说属于他人所有,但此亦非有,故说“亦非他人所有”。“比丘们,这是旧业”(purāṇamidaṃ, bhikkhave, kammaṃ):这并非就是旧业本身,但这个身体是由旧业引生的,因此依缘起的惯用语而作此说。至于“所造作的”(abhisaṅkhataṃ)等词,也是依业的惯用语,为了与前者性类一致而说。在此,“所造作的”意指由诸缘所造,应当这样看待。“所筹划的”(abhisañcetayitaṃ),意指以思为事、以思为根本,应当这样看待。“所感受的”(vedaniyaṃ),意指感受的立足处,应当这样看待。第七段结束。显示巴利原文
37. Sattame na tumhākanti attani hi sati attaniyaṃ nāma hoti. Attāyeva ca natthi, tasmā ‘‘na tumhāka’’nti āha. Napi aññesanti añño nāma paresaṃ attā, tasmiṃ sati aññesaṃ nāma siyā, sopi natthi, tasmā ‘‘napi aññesa’’nti āha. Purāṇamidaṃ, bhikkhave, kammanti nayidaṃ purāṇakammameva, purāṇakammanibbatto panesa kāyo, tasmā paccayavohārena evaṃ vutto. Abhisaṅkhatantiādi kammavohārasseva vasena purimaliṅgasabhāgatāya vuttaṃ, ayaṃ panettha attho – abhisaṅkhatanti paccayehi katoti daṭṭhabbo. Abhisañcetayitanti cetanāvatthuko cetanāmūlakoti daṭṭhabbo. Vedaniyanti vedaniyavatthūti daṭṭhabbo. Sattamaṃ.
第八经《思经》的注释显示巴利原文
8. Cetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
38 第八段。“比丘们,且说他思惟什么”(yañca, bhikkhave, ceteti):意思是,他思惟那个思(cetanā),令它转起。“且说他筹划什么”(yañca pakappeti):他筹划那个筹划(pakappana),令它转起。“且说他随眠什么”(yañca anuseti):他随眠那个随眠(anusaya),令它转起。这里,“他思惟”(ceteti)是摄取了三地的善与不善思;“他筹划”(pakappeti)是指在八种与贪俱行的心中,以渴爱和邪见所作的种种妄想;“他随眠”(anuseti)是指以俱生分和亲依止分,摄取了与那些十二种思相应的随眠。“这便成为所缘”(ārammaṇametaṃ hoti):意思是,这整个思等法的集合就成了缘(因为当这些法生起后,便无法阻止业识的产生)。在这里,缘被称为“所缘”。“为了识的住立”(viññāṇassa ṭhitiyā):是指为了让业识安住。“当有所缘时”(ārammaṇaṃ sati…)显示巴利原文
38. Aṭṭhame yañca, bhikkhave, cetetīti yaṃ cetanaṃ ceteti, pavattetīti attho. Yañca pakappetīti yaṃ pakappanaṃ pakappeti, pavatteticceva attho. Yañca anusetīti yañca anusayaṃ anuseti, pavatteticceva attho. Ettha ca cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā gahitā, pakappetīti aṭṭhasu lobhasahagatacittesu taṇhādiṭṭhikappā gahitā, anusetīti dvādasannaṃ cetanānaṃ sahajātakoṭiyā ceva upanissayakoṭiyā ca anusayo gahito. Ārammaṇametaṃ hotīti (cetanādidhammajāte sati kammaviññāṇassa uppattiyā avāritattā) etaṃ cetanādidhammajātaṃ paccayo hoti. Paccayo hi idha ārammaṇanti adhippetā. Viññāṇassa ṭhitiyāti kammaviññāṇassa ṭhitatthaṃ. Ārammaṇe satīti tasmiṃ paccaye sati. Patiṭṭhā viññāṇassa hotīti tassa kammaviññāṇassa patiṭṭhā hoti. Tasmiṃ patiṭṭhite viññāṇeti tasmiṃ kammaviññāṇe patiṭṭhite. Virūḷheti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya nibbattamūle jāte. Punabbhavābhinibbattīti punabbhavasaṅkhātā abhinibbatti.
“比丘们,如果他不这样思惟”(no ce, bhikkhave, ceteti):这句显示了三地思不再转起的刹那。“如果不这样筹划”(no ce pakappeti):这句显示了渴爱和邪见的妄想不再转起的刹那。“但如果仍这样随眠”(atha ce anuseti):这句是说,在三地果报、少许唯作心以及色界中,随眠以“尚未断除”的方式被摄取。“这便成为所缘”(ārammaṇametaṃ hoti):只要随眠还在,由于无法阻止业识的生起,这随眠的集合自身就成了缘。显示巴利原文
Noce, bhikkhave, cetetīti iminā tebhūmakacetanāya appavattanakkhaṇo vutto. No ce pakappetīti iminā taṇhādiṭṭhikappānaṃ appavattanakkhaṇo. Atha ce anusetīti iminā tebhūmakavipākesu parittakiriyāsu rūpeti ettha appahīnakoṭiyā anusayo gahito. Ārammaṇametaṃhotīti anusaye sati kammaviññāṇassa uppattiyā avāritattā etaṃ anusayajātaṃ paccayova hoti.
在“不思惟,不筹划,却随眠”(no ceva ceteti, no ca pakappeti, anuseti ce)等句当中:第一句否定了三地的善、不善思;第二句否定了八种心所摄的渴爱与邪见;第三句则否定了前述诸法之中,以“未被断除”之形态而潜伏的随眠。显示巴利原文
No ceva cetetītiādīsu paṭhamapade tebhūmakakusalākusalacetanā nivattā, dutiyapade aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo, tatiyapade vuttappakāresu dhammesu yo appahīnakoṭiyā anusayito anusayo, so nivatto.
于此,为断除迷乱,更应了知如下一种四句分别:“1. 他思惟,他筹划,他随眠;2. 他思惟,他不筹划,他随眠;3. 他不思惟,他不筹划,他随眠;4. 他不思惟,他不筹划,他不随眠。”其中,第一门显示了诸法的区分。于第二门中,“他思惟”摄取了三地的善思及四种不善思;“他不筹划”则否定了八种心中的渴爱与邪见;“他随眠”摄取了以亲依止分对三地善心的随眠,以及以俱生分和亲依止分对四种不善思的随眠。于第三门,“他不思惟”否定了三地的善与不善;“他不筹划”否定了八种心中的渴爱与邪见;“他随眠”则如经中所说,以未被断除的形态,摄取了以亲依止缘,对三地善果、不善果、唯作以及无色界法而存在的随眠。第四门与前述相似。显示巴利原文
Apicettha asammohatthaṃ ceteti pakappeti anuseti, ceteti na pakappeti anuseti, na ceteti na pakappeti anuseti, na ceteti na pakappeti na anusetīti idampi catukkaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tattha paṭhamanaye dhammaparicchedo dassito. Dutiyanaye cetetīti tebhūmakakusalacetanā ceva catasso ca akusalacetanā gahitā. Na pakappetīti aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattā. Anusetīti tebhūmakakusale upanissayakoṭiyā, catūsu akusalacetanāsu sahajātakoṭiyā ceva upanissayakoṭiyā ca anusayo gahito. Tatiyanaye na cetetīti tebhūmakakusalākusalaṃ nivattaṃ, na pakappetīti aṭṭhasu cittesu taṇhādiṭṭhiyo nivattā, anusetīti sutte āgataṃ vāretvā tebhūmakakusalākusalavipākakiriyārūpesu appahīnakoṭiyā upanissayo gahito. Catutthanayo purimasadisova.
“它无安住时”(tadappatiṭṭhite):指彼识无所安住之处。“它无增长时”(avirūḷhe):指业于速行转起之后,因不能牵引结生,故未能出生根本。此处所说为何?当知,此为阿拉汉道之所行,亦即漏尽者所作之业,亦可名为九种出世间法。在此经中,识与未来后有之间,有一连结;受与渴爱之间,有一连结;有与生之间,有一连结。第八经注释竟。显示巴利原文
Tadappatiṭṭhiteti tasmiṃ appatiṭṭhite. Avirūḷheti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya anibbattamūle. Ettha pana kiṃ kathitanti? Arahattamaggassa kiccaṃ, khīṇāsavassa kiccakaraṇantipi navalokuttaradhammātipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Ettha ca viññāṇassa ceva āyatiṃ punabbhavassa ca antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantare eko, bhavajātīnamantare ekoti. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
第九《第二思经》注显示巴利原文
9. Dutiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
39 第九经:在识与名色之间,有一个连结;在受与渴爱之间,有一个连结;在有与生之间,有一个连结。第九经结束。显示巴利原文
39. Navame viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vedanātaṇhānamantare eko, bhavajātīnamantare ekoti. Navamaṃ.
第十《第三思经》注显示巴利原文
10. Tatiyacetanāsuttavaṇṇanā
40 第十经:“导向”即渴爱。渴爱对于可喜的色等对象有倾向的作用,故称为“导向”。“来处成为去处”的意思是:在来处便有了去处——当业、业相或趣相现前时,以结生的方式,识便有了去处。“死与再生”的意思是:当识面对结生境域时,既有去处,从此处死去称为死,于彼处再生称为再生,这就是死与再生。如此,在这部经中,仅就渴爱的导向与来去之间,说了一个连结。第十经结束。显示巴利原文
40. Dasame natīti taṇhā. Sā hi piyarūpesu rūpādīsu namanaṭṭhena ‘‘natī’’ti vuccati. Āgati gati hotīti āgatimhi gati hoti, āgate paccupaṭṭhite kamme vā kammanimitte vā gahinimitte vā paṭisandhivasena viññāṇassa gati hoti. Cutūpapātoti evaṃ viññāṇassa āgate paṭisandhivisaye gatiyā sati ito cavanasaṅkhātā cuti, tatthūpapattisaṅkhāto upapātoti ayaṃ cutūpapāto nāma hoti. Evaṃ imasmiṃ sutte natiyā ca āgatigatiyā ca antare ekova sandhi kathitoti. Dasamaṃ.
5. 居士品显示巴利原文
5. Gahapativaggo
1.《五怨怖畏经》注显示巴利原文
1. Pañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
41 在《居士品》第一经中,「当」指“那时”。「怖畏与怨」指的是导致怖畏与怨恨的思心所。「以入流支」:入流支有两种,一种是在前行阶段导向证得入流果的,即经中所说:“亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行”(《长部》3.311);另一种是已经获得功德、证得入流果且安住于此者所具备的支分,也就是入流者的支分,这是指“于佛陀具足不坏净信”等四种法。此处所指为后者。「圣」即无过失、无可指责。「理」指对于缘生而安住的智慧,也指缘起。正如所说:“缘起称为理,八支圣道亦称为理。”「以慧」指通过一次又一次生起的观慧。「已善见」指通过如此反复生起之后,以观见的方式透彻地洞见了。显示巴利原文
41. Gahapativaggassa paṭhame yatoti yadā. Bhayāni verānīti bhayaveracetanāyo. Sotāpattiyaṅgehīti duvidhaṃ sotāpattiyā aṅgaṃ, (sotāpattiyā ca aṅgaṃ,) yaṃ pubbabhāge sotāpattipaṭilābhāya saṃvattati, ‘‘sappurisasaṃsevo saddhammassavanaṃ yonisomanasikāro dhammānudhammappaṭipattī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.311) evaṃ āgataṃ, paṭiladdhaguṇassa ca sotāpattiṃ patvā ṭhitassa aṅgaṃ, yaṃ sotāpannassa aṅgantipi vuccati, buddhe aveccappasādādīnaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idamidha adhippetaṃ. Ariyoti niddoso nirupārambho. Ñāyoti paṭiccasamuppannaṃ ñatvā ṭhitañāṇampi paṭiccasamuppādopi. Yathāha – ‘‘ñāyo vuccati paṭiccasamuppādo, ariyopi aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo ñāyo’’ti. Paññāyāti aparāparaṃ uppannāya vipassanāpaññāya. Sudiṭṭho hotīti aparāparaṃ uppajjitvā dassanavasena suṭṭhu diṭṭho.
对于“我已灭尽地狱”等说法,由于未来世中不再于彼处生起,故说“我的地狱已灭尽”,因此称“我已灭尽地狱者”。此理适用于一切同类情况。「入流者」:已契入道流之人。「不退堕法」:其本性决定不会堕入恶趣。「决定者」:已由称为初道的正性决定所确立。「以正觉为归宿者」:指更上三道所摄的正觉是其最究竟的归宿,故为以正觉为归宿者,意指必将证悟彼正觉。显示巴利原文
Khīṇanirayotiādīsu āyatiṃ tattha anuppajjanatāya khīṇo nirayo mayhanti so ahaṃ khīṇanirayo. Esa nayo sabbattha. Sotāpannoti maggasotaṃ āpanno. Avinipātadhammoti na vinipātasabhāvo . Niyatoti paṭhamamaggasaṅkhātena sammattaniyāmena niyato. Sambodhiparāyanoti uttarimaggattayasaṅkhāto sambodhi paraṃ ayanaṃ mayhanti sohaṃ sambodhiparāyano, taṃ sambodhiṃ avassaṃ abhisambujjhanakoti attho.
「缘于杀生」:指以杀生业行作为因由。「怖畏与怨」:在意义上实为一体。而这“怨”有两种:外在的怨与内在的怨。譬如,一人的父亲被他人所杀,他心想:“就是此人杀害了我的父亲,我也要杀掉他。”便手持磨利的刀子四处寻仇。在他心中生起的这种怨憎思心所,即称为外在怨。而被杀父亲的那个人心想:“这人扬言要杀我,一直在追寻我,我得先下手杀掉他。”如此生起的思心所,即称为内在怨。这两者还仅属于今生现世。再者,当地狱狱卒见到那个人投生在地狱中,便拿起燃烧的铁棒,生起“我要打击他”的思心所。这狱卒的思心所,对于那个人而言,即是来世的外在怨。而那个人自己生起“这地狱狱卒无缘无故要来打我,我得先打击他”的思心所,这便是他来世的内在怨。其中,外在怨在注释书中也称作“人怨”。「苦与忧」:意义实质相同。以此类推,其余文句中怨的生起方式也应作如是观:“此人偷了我的财物”、“此人侵犯了我的妻子”、“此人说了谎话,破坏了我的利益”、“因饮酒沉醉而做了那样的事”等。凭借已证得、毫不动摇的不坏净信。「圣所喜戒」:指五戒。显示巴利原文
Pāṇātipātapaccayāti pāṇātipātakammakāraṇā. Bhayaṃ veranti atthato ekaṃ. Verañca nāmetaṃ duvidhaṃ hoti bāhiraṃ ajjhattikanti. Ekena hi ekassa pitā mārito hoti, so cintesi ‘‘etena kira me pitā mārito, ahampi taṃyeva māressāmī’’ti nisitaṃ satthaṃ ādāya carati. Yā tassa abbhantare uppannaveracetanā, idaṃ bāhiraṃ veraṃ nāma. Yā pana itarassa ‘‘ayaṃ kira maṃ māressāmīti carati, ahameva naṃ paṭhamataraṃ māressāmī’’ti cetanā uppajjati, idaṃ ajjhattikaṃ veraṃ nāma. Idaṃ tāva ubhayampi diṭṭhadhammikameva. Yā pana taṃ niraye uppannaṃ disvā ‘‘etaṃ paharissāmī’’ti jalitaṃ ayamuggaraṃ gaṇhato nirayapālassa cetanā uppajjati, idamassa samparāyikaṃ bāhiraveraṃ. Yā cassa ‘‘ayaṃ niddosaṃ maṃ paharissāmīti āgacchati, ahameva naṃ paṭhamataraṃ paharissāmī’’ti cetanā uppajjati, idamassa samparāyikaṃ ajjhattaveraṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ bāhiraveraṃ, taṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘puggalavera’’nti vuttaṃ. Dukkhaṃ domanassanti atthato ekameva. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sesapadesupi ‘‘iminā mama bhaṇḍaṃ haṭaṃ , mayhaṃ dāresu cārittaṃ āpannaṃ, musā vatvā attho bhaggo, surāmadamattena idaṃ nāma kata’’ntiādinā nayena veruppatti veditabbā. Aveccappasādenāti adhigatena acalappasādena. Ariyakantehīti pañcahi sīlehi. Tāni hi ariyānaṃ kantāni piyāni. Bhavantaragatāpi ariyā tāni na vijahanti, tasmā ‘‘ariyakantānī’’ti vuccanti. Sesamettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, taṃ sabbaṃ visuddhimagge anussatiniddese vuttameva. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 第二五怨怖畏经注显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyapañcaverabhayasuttavaṇṇanā
42 第二经中,唯是此乃对比丘们所说这一点而有差别。第二经结束。显示巴利原文
42. Dutiye bhikkhūnaṃ kathitabhāvamattameva viseso. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 苦经注显示巴利原文
3. Dukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
43 第三经中,「苦」:指轮回之苦。「集」:有两种集——刹那集与缘集。观见缘集的比丘,亦观见刹那集;观见刹那集的比丘,亦观见缘集。「灭」亦有二种:毕竟灭与坏灭。观见毕竟灭者,亦观见坏灭;观见坏灭者,亦观见毕竟灭。「我将开示」:意即,我将开示这轮回之苦的集与灭——即它的生起与坏灭,你们应当谛听。「缘」:是依于所依与依于所缘的方式而作为条件的。「三者和合而有触」:即三者和合时,便有触。「诸比丘,这就是苦之集」:这就是轮回之苦的生起。「灭」:即它的坏灭。如此,轮回之苦便破碎,不再有结生。第三经结束。显示巴利原文
43. Tatiye dukkhassāti vaṭṭadukkhassa. Samudayanti dve samudayā khaṇikasamudayo ca paccayasamudayo ca. Paccayasamudayaṃ passantopi bhikkhu khaṇikasamudayaṃ passati, khaṇikasamudayaṃ passantopi paccayasamudayaṃ passati. Atthaṅgamopi accantatthaṅgamo bhedatthaṅgamoti duvidho. Accantatthaṅgamaṃ passantopi bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passati, bhedatthaṅgamaṃ passantopi accantatthaṅgamaṃ passati. Desessāmīti idaṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa samudayaatthaṅgamaṃ nibbattibhedaṃ nāma desessāmi, taṃ suṇāthāti attho. Paṭiccāti nissayavasena ceva ārammaṇavasena ca paccayaṃ katvā. Tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phassoti tiṇṇaṃ saṅgatiyā phasso. Ayaṃ kho, bhikkhave, dukkhassa samudayoti ayaṃ vaṭṭadukkhassa nibbatti nāma. Atthaṅgamoti bhedo. Evañhi vaṭṭadukkhaṃ bhinnaṃ hoti appaṭisandhiyaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 世间经注显示巴利原文
4. Lokasuttavaṇṇanā
44 第四经中,「世间」:指行世间。这是此处有别之处。第四经结束。显示巴利原文
44. Catutthe lokassāti saṅkhāralokassa. Ayamettha viseso. Catutthaṃ.
五、亲属经解释显示巴利原文
5. Ñātikasuttavaṇṇanā
45 第五部。「亲属」(ñātike)是指两位亲属所在的村庄。「砖瓦堂」(giñjakāvasathe),即用砖建造的大殿堂。「法门」(dhammapariyāyanti),意思是法的因缘。「近闻者」(upassutī)是指靠近听闻之处,意思是来到那个位置就能听到世尊的声音,他便站在那儿。据说这位比丘是为了打扫香室庭院而来,放下自己的事务,就站在那里听世尊说法的声音。「看见了」(addasā):据说那时世尊从一开始就在作意缘起,当他如此思维:“此依此缘而生,彼依彼缘而起……”这样思维时,整个有顶天都变得通彻平坦。导师放下作意,转而以言语诵出,顺着前后关联的方式完成了开示。随后,他又思维:“是否有人听见此法门了呢?”当他如此观察时,便看见了那位比丘。因此说“世尊看见了”。显示巴利原文
45. Pañcame ñātiketi dvinnaṃ ñātakānaṃ gāme. Giñjakāvasatheti iṭṭhakāhi kate mahāpāsāde. Dhammapariyāyanti dhammakāraṇaṃ. Upassutīti upassutiṭṭhānaṃ, yaṃ ṭhānaṃ upagatena sakkā hoti bhagavato saddaṃ sotuṃ, tattha ṭhitoti attho. So kira gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanatthaṃ āgato attano kammaṃ pahāya bhagavato dhammaghosaṃ suṇanto aṭṭhāsi. Addasāti tadā kira bhagavato āditova paccayākāraṃ manasikarontassa ‘‘idaṃ iminā paccayena hoti, idaṃ iminā’’ti āvajjato yāva bhavaggā ekaṅgaṇaṃ ahosi, satthā manasikāraṃ pahāya vacasā sajjhāyaṃ karonto yathānusandhinā desanaṃ niṭṭhapetvā, ‘‘api nu kho imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ koci assosī’’ti āvajjento taṃ bhikkhumaddasa. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā’’ti.
「听见了吗」(assosinoti)意思是听到了吗。或者,“听见了”(assosi no)是我们说话时表示“听见了”的那种用法。「学习」(uggaṇhāhi)等词的意思是:听了之后默然不语,在心中熟练内容,就叫作“学习”。把字句连贯起来,用言语使其熟练,就叫作“遍学”。而通过这两种方式使之纯熟,达到能铭刻于心的程度,就叫作“持守”。「义相应者」(atthasaṃhito)是指依止于义理的。「初梵行之始」(ādibrahmacariyako)是指道之梵行的开端,是基础与所依。如此,在这三部经中,开示的都是轮回与还灭的道理。第五部经解释完毕。显示巴利原文
Assosinoti assosi nu. Atha vā assosi noti amhākaṃ bhāsantānaṃ assosīti. Uggaṇhāhītiādīsu sutvā tuṇhībhūtova paguṇaṃ karonto uggaṇhāti nāma. Padānupadaṃ ghaṭetvā vācāya paricitaṃ karonto pariyāpuṇāti nāma. Ubhayathāpi paguṇaṃ ādhārappattaṃ karonto dhāreti nāma. Atthasaṃhitoti kāraṇanissito. Ādibrahmacariyakoti maggabrahmacariyassa ādi patiṭṭhānabhūto. Iti tīsupi imesu suttesu vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ. Pañcamaṃ.
六、某婆罗门经解释显示巴利原文
6. Aññatarabrāhmaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
46 第四十六。在第六部经中,「某位」(aññataro)是指在名字上并不知名的一位婆罗门。第六部经解释完毕。显示巴利原文
46. Chaṭṭhe aññataroti nāmavasena apākaṭo aññataro brāhmaṇo. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
七、生闻经解释显示巴利原文
7. Jāṇussoṇisuttavaṇṇanā
47 第四十七:第七经中,「生闻」(jāṇussoṇi)因其职位而得名,是一位拥资八十亿的大国师。第七经解释完毕。显示巴利原文
47. Sattame jāṇussoṇīti ṭhānantaravasena evaṃladdhanāmo asītikoṭivibhavo mahāpurohito. Sattamaṃ.
八、顺世论经解释显示巴利原文
8. Lokāyatikasuttavaṇṇanā
48 第八经。「顺世论者」指精通名为《顺世论》的诡辩论书之人。「这是第一顺世论」意为这是最初的顺世论。而「顺世论」者,即世间的延伸,是愚痴凡夫世间的延伸。人们常以为其广大而甚深,当知其实只是微劣、浅薄的恶见。「单一」谓同一自性,即问是否唯有一种恒常自性。「种种」谓与前述自性相异的种种自性,譬如先前是人、天等,后来便不复存在,意在暗指断灭而发问。于此,执“一切存在”、“一切同一”者,属常见;执“一切不存在”、“一切种种”者,则属断见——应当如此了知。第八经解释完毕。显示巴利原文
48. Aṭṭhame lokāyatikoti vitaṇḍasatthe lokāyate kataparicayo. Jeṭṭhametaṃ lokāyatanti paṭhamaṃ lokāyataṃ. Lokāyatanti ca lokasseva āyataṃ, bālaputhujjanalokassa āyataṃ, mahantaṃ gambhīranti upadhāritabbaṃ parittaṃ bhāvaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ. Ekattanti ekasabhāvaṃ, niccasabhāvamevāti pucchati. Puthuttanti purimasabhāvena nānāsabhāvaṃ, devamanussādibhāvena paṭhamaṃ hutvā pacchā na hotīti ucchedaṃ sandhāya pucchati. Evamettha ‘‘sabbamatthi, sabbamekatta’’nti imā dvepi sassatadiṭṭhiyo, ‘‘sabbaṃ natthi, sabbaṃ puthutta’’nti imā dve ucchedadiṭṭhiyoti veditabbā. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
《圣弟子经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Ariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
49 第九经。「为何呢」展现了疑惑生起的样貌。「集起」即生起之义。第九经解释完毕。显示巴利原文
49. Navame kiṃ nu khoti saṃsayuppattiākāradassanaṃ. Samudayatīti uppajjati. Navamaṃ.
第二部《圣弟子经》的注释显示巴利原文
10. Dutiyaariyasāvakasuttavaṇṇanā
50 第十部。两种理趣于此一并解说。唯此与前文有别,余皆一致。第十部终。显示巴利原文
50. Dasame dvepi nayā ekato vuttā. Idameva purimena nānattaṃ, sesaṃ tādisamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
《遍寻求经》的注释显示巴利原文
1. Parivīmaṃsanasuttavaṇṇanā
51 在苦品第一中,“遍寻求”是指彻底地观察。若问:“为什么经中在说老死是‘种种、多样’之后,单独执取它呢?”因为一旦执取老死,便已执取一切苦。正如抓住一个人的顶髻,此人即被整个抓住;同样,执取老死,即已执取一切苦。因此,经中先展示一切苦——犹如一个沐浴后站立的人——说出“世间生起的种种、多样的苦”,随后便如抓其顶髻一般,执取了老死。显示巴利原文
51. Dukkhavaggassa paṭhame parivīmaṃsamānoti upaparikkhamāno. Jarāmaraṇanti kasmā jarāmaraṇaṃ ekameva ‘‘anekavidhaṃ nānappakāraka’’nti vatvā gahitanti ce? Tasmiṃ gahite sabbadukkhassa gahitattā. Yathā hi cūḷāya gahite purise so puriso gahitova hoti, evaṃ jarāmaraṇe gahite sabbadukkhaṃ gahitameva hoti. Tasmā ‘‘yaṃ kho idaṃ anekavidhaṃ nānappakārakaṃ dukkhaṃ loke uppajjatī’’ti nhatvā ṭhitaṃ purisaṃ viya sabbadukkhaṃ dassetvā taṃ cūḷāya gaṇhanto viya jarāmaraṇaṃ gaṇhi.
「老死灭之适合行道」:意为以适于老死灭的性质——即由于无烦恼、清净,而与老死灭相似,趋向于它。「如是行道」:即如被称为‘如是行道者’那般修行。「随法行者」:即修习随顺涅槃法的修行之道,圆满成就。「为苦灭尽而行道」:从持戒开始,为灭尽老死之苦而修行。「为行灭」:为灭尽行之苦。至此,已开示了直至阿拉汉果位的教法。显示巴利原文
Jarāmaraṇanirodhasāruppagāminīti jarāmaraṇanirodhassa sāruppabhāvena nikkilesatāya parisuddhatāya sadisāva hutvā gāminīti attho. Tathā paṭipanno ca hotīti yathā taṃ paṭipannoti vuccati, evaṃ paṭipanno hoti. Anudhammacārīti nibbānadhammaṃ anugataṃ paṭipattidhammaṃ carati, pūretīti attho. Dukkhakkhayāya paṭipannoti sīlaṃ ādiṃ katvā jarāmaraṇadukkhassa nirodhatthāya paṭipanno. Saṅkhāranirodhāyāti saṅkhāradukkhassa nirodhatthāya. Ettāvatā yāva arahattā desanā kathitā.
在开示了阿拉汉果的省察与常住之后,按理说法应当结束;那么为何又引取‘入于无明’这一句呢?那是为了显示漏尽者已超越轮回之苦。再者,当重新提起轮回而宣说还灭时,在场有应被唤醒的众生;应知也是随顺他们的意乐才引取此句。此处,「入于无明」是指进入、到达、具足了无明。「男子士夫」指男子即是士夫。这两个词都属于世俗言说。因为对佛陀们而言,有‘世俗言说’与‘究竟义言说’两种教说方式。其中,使用‘众生、人、男子、士夫、帝沙、那伽’等说法的,称为世俗言说;使用‘诸蕴、诸界、诸处’等说法的,称为究竟义言说。佛陀们即使宣说究竟义,也不会舍弃世俗言说;无论是世俗言说还是究竟义言说,他们所说的唯是真实。因此有偈颂说:显示巴利原文
Idāni arahattaphalapaccavekkhaṇaṃ satatavihārañca dassetvā desanā nivattetabbā siyā, tathā akatvā avijjāgatoti idaṃ kasmā gaṇhātīti? Khīṇāsavassa samatikkantavaṭṭadukkhadassanatthaṃ . Apica puna vaṭṭaṃ ārabhitvā vivaṭṭe kathiyamāne bujjhanakasatto cettha atthi, tassa ajjhāsayavasenāpi idaṃ gaṇhātīti veditabbo. Tattha avijjāgatoti avijjāya gato upagato samannāgato. Purisapuggaloti purisoyeva puggalo. Ubhayenāpi sammutikathaṃ katheti. Buddhānañhi sammutikathā paramatthakathāti dve kathā honti. Tattha ‘‘satto naro puriso puggalo tisso nāgo’’ti evaṃ pavattā sammutikathā nāma. ‘‘Khandhā dhātuyo āyatanānī’’ti evaṃ pavattā paramatthakathā nāma. Paramatthaṃ kathentāpi sammutiṃ amuñcitvā kathenti. Te sammutiṃ kathentāpi paramatthaṃ kathentāpi saccameva kathenti. Teneva vuttaṃ –
正自觉者,于诸说者中最上,宣说了两种真实:世俗与究竟义,并无第三种。约定的言语是真实,基于世间共许;究竟义的言语是真实,符合诸法的实相。显示巴利原文
‘‘Duve saccāni akkhāsi, sambuddho vadataṃ varo;
随顺世间共许故,假名言说为真实;
如诸法之实相故,胜义言说为真实。
显示巴利原文 Sammutiṃ paramatthañca, tatiyaṃ nūpalabbhati; Saṅketavacanaṃ saccaṃ, lokasammutikāraṇaṃ; Paramatthavacanaṃ saccaṃ, dhammānaṃ bhūtalakkhaṇa’’nti.
“若造作福行”(Puññaṃ ce saṅkhāraṃ)是指造作由十三种思组成的福行。“造作”(Abhisaṅkharoti)的意思是造作。“识即趣向福德”(Puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ)是说,业识由福业而与之相应、联结;果报识则由福果报而与之相应。“若造作非福行”(Apuññaṃ ce saṅkhāraṃ)是指造作由十二种思组成的非福行。“若造作不动行”(Āneñjaṃ ce saṅkhāraṃ)是指造作由四种思组成的不动行。“识即趣向不动”(Āneñjūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ)是说,业识由不动业而与之相应,果报识则由不动果报而与之相应。这里,由于纳入了三种业行,十二支缘起便一并被涵摄。至此,便揭示了轮回。显示巴利原文
Puññaṃce saṅkhāranti terasacetanābhedaṃ puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Abhisaṅkharotīti karoti. Puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇanti kammaviññāṇaṃ kammapuññena upagataṃ sampayuttaṃ hoti, vipākaviññāṇaṃ vipākapuññena. Apuññaṃ ce saṅkhāranti dvādasacetanābhedaṃ apuññābhisaṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharoti. Āneñjaṃ ce saṅkhāranti catucetanābhedaṃ āneñjābhisaṅkhāraṃ. Āneñjūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇanti kammāneñjena kammaviññāṇaṃ, vipākāneñjena vipākaviññāṇaṃ upagataṃ hoti. Ettha ca tividhassa kammābhisaṅkhārassa gahitattā dvādasapadiko paccayākāro gahitova hoti. Ettāvatā vaṭṭaṃ dassitaṃ.
现在,为阐明还灭,世尊开示了“因此,诸比丘,当……”这一段。其中,“无明”是指对四圣谛的无知。“明”是指阿拉汉道智。此处应这样理解:就如同在四分的黑夜里,灯火生起时黑暗便被消除一样,明生起时,无明即被舍断。“于世不取任何”是说对于世间中的任何法都不执取、不紧抓。“不取便不恐惧”的意思是,不执取、不紧抓的人,既不会因渴爱而生起恐惧,也不会因怖畏而生起恐惧——也就是既不渴爱,也不害怕。“各自亲自”是指自己、依于自己而般涅槃,并非依于他人之力。显示巴利原文
Idāni vivaṭṭaṃ dassento yato kho, bhikkhavetiādimāha. Tattha avijjāti catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ. Vijjāti arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Ettha ca paṭhamameva avijjāya pahīnāya vijjā uppajjati. Yathā pana caturaṅgepi tame rattiṃ padīpujjalena andhakāro pahīyati, evaṃ vijjuppādā avijjāya pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na kiñci loke upādiyatīti loke kiñci dhammaṃ na gaṇhāti na parāmasati. Anupādiyaṃ na paritassatīti anupādiyanto agaṇhanto neva taṇhāparitassanāya, na bhayaparitassanāya paritassati, na taṇhāyati na bhāyatīti attho. Paccattaññevāti sayameva attanāva parinibbāyati, na aññassa ānubhāvena.
世尊之所以说“若觉受乐受”(Sosukhaṃ ce vedanaṃ)这句,是为了在显示了漏尽者的省察智之后,进而显示他恒常安住之处。“不耽着”(Anajjhositā)是指不被渴爱吞没、不被其牢牢执取。那么,为何还要说到苦受呢?难道也有欣乐于苦受的人吗?是的,确实有。因为一个欣乐于乐受的人,即可说是欣乐于苦受:当他在受苦时便渴望乐受,而且乐受本身也具有变易之苦的性质。“以身限量为边界”(Kāyapariyantikaṃ)是指以身来限定的受——只要五门身还在运作,那时所生起的五门受,就是此意。“以命限量为边界”(Jīvitapariyantikaṃ)是指以寿命来限定的受——只要生命还在延续,那时所生起的意门受,就是此意。显示巴利原文
Sosukhaṃ ce vedananti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Khīṇāsavassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ dassetvā satatavihāraṃ dassetuṃ ārabhi. Anajjhositāti taṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā agahitā. Atha dukkhavedanā kasmā vuttā, kiṃ tampi abhinandanto atthīti? Āma atthi. Sukhaṃ abhinandantoyeva hi dukkhaṃ abhinandati nāma dukkhaṃ patvā sukhaṃ patthanato sukhassa ca vipariṇāmadukkhatoti. Kāyapariyantikanti kāyaparicchinnaṃ, yāva pañcadvārakāyo pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ pañcadvārikavedananti attho. Jīvitapariyantikanti jīvitaparicchinnaṃ . Yāva jīvitaṃ pavattati, tāva pavattaṃ manodvārikavedananti attho.
这两者中,五门受后生而先灭,意门受先生而后灭。因为意门受在结生刹那,便已安住于心所依处色之上。五门受在生命流转过程中,依五门而生起。在生命初期,约二十岁时,因贪染、嗔恚及愚痴之力,五门受变得极为强盛;至五十岁左右,趋于平稳;从六十岁开始衰退;到了八九十岁,便十分微弱了。那时,即使有人对同伴说:‘我们长久以来同坐同卧’,对方也会说‘我不记得了’。对于极明显的色等所缘,他们也会说‘我们看不见、听不见’,‘不知道是好闻还是难闻,是可口还是不可口,是硬还是软’。如此,他们的五门受已坏灭,唯有意门受在运作。而意门受也逐渐衰退,在临终时,仅依心脏处而转起。只要这种意门受还在转起,便说‘有情还活着’;当它不再转起时,便说‘有情死去、灭去了’。显示巴利原文
Tattha pañcadvārikavedanā pacchā uppajjitvā paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati, manodvārikavedanā paṭhamaṃ uppajjitvā pacchā nirujjhati. Sā hi paṭisandhikkhaṇe vatthurūpasmiṃyeva patiṭṭhāti. Pañcadvārikā pavatte pañcadvāravasena pavattamānā paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanadussanamuyhanavasena adhimattā balavatī hoti, paṇṇāsavassakāle ṭhitā hoti, saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya parihāyamānā asītinavutivassakāle mandā hoti. Tadā hi sattā ‘‘cirarattaṃ ekato nisīdimhā nipajjimhā’’ti vadantepi ‘‘na sañjānāmā’’ti vadanti. Adhimattānipi rūpādiārammaṇāni ‘‘na passāma na suṇāma’’, ‘‘sugandhaṃ duggandhaṃ vā sāduṃ asāduṃ vā thaddhaṃ mudukanti vā na jānāmā’’ti vadanti. Iti nesaṃ pañcadvārikavedanā bhaggā hoti, manodvārikāva pavattati. Sāpi anupubbena parihāyamānā maraṇasamaye hadayakoṭiṃyeva nissāya pavattati. Yāva panesā pavattati, tāva satto jīvatīti vuccati. Yadā nappavattati, tadā mato niruddhoti vuccati.
此义应以池塘为喻而说明:显示巴利原文
Svāyamattho vāpiyā dīpetabbo –
譬如有人造一池塘,具五条水道。初时天降大雨,水由五条水道流入,注满塘内坑洼。雨复降下,水道充满后,水便漫溢开来,广及一牛呼乃至半由旬,停蓄于此,并从各处渗出。其后,打开排水管,开始田间耕作,水便流出。至庄稼成熟时,水量减少,众人遂言:‘我们去捉鱼吧。’再过数日,水仅存于坑洼之中。只要坑洼中尚有水,人们便说‘大池塘有水’;一旦坑洼中之水断尽,便说‘池塘无水’。当以此喻而了知。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi puriso pañcaudakamaggasampannaṃ vāpiṃ kareyya, paṭhamaṃ deve vuṭṭhe pañcahi udakamaggehi udakaṃ pavisitvā antovāpiyaṃ āvāṭe pūreyya, punappunaṃ deve vassante udakamagge pūretvā gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ottharitvā udakaṃ tiṭṭheyya tato tato vissandamānaṃ, atha niddhamanatumbe vivaritvā khettesu kamme kariyamāne udakaṃ nikkhamantaṃ, sassapākakāle (udakaṃ nikkhamantaṃ,) udakaṃ parihīnaṃ ‘‘macche gaṇhāmā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjeyya, tato katipāhena āvāṭesuyeva udakaṃ saṇṭhaheyya. Yāva pana taṃ āvāṭesu hoti, tāva ‘‘mahāvāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthī’’ti saṅkhaṃ gacchati. Yadā pana tattha chijjati, tadā ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ natthī’’ti vuccati, evaṃsampadamidaṃ veditabbaṃ.
譬如最初降雨时,雨水循五条水道流入、满注坑洞之时,便如结生刹那,意门受依止于心所依处色而安住之时。再度降雨、五条水道被充满之时,便如在生命流转中,五门受持续生起的阶段。水溢至半牛呼乃至一牛呼的范围,便如青年期约二十岁时,此受因贪染等而变得极为猛利。池塘水满、尚未外流、平稳安住的时期,便如五十岁时此受的安住平稳期。打开排水管、众人耕作、水向外流之时,便如从六十岁开始,此受的衰退。水退去、水道中唯余少许水之时,便如八、九十岁时,五门受微弱。水仅存于坑洞中之时,便如仅依心脏色处的边际,有意门受在转起。只要坑洞中哪怕还有丁点水,就称为‘池塘有水’;同样地,只要那种受还在转起,就说‘有情还活着’。然而,正如坑洞中水断尽,便说‘池塘无水’;当意门受不再转起之时,便说‘有情死了’。正是由于这种受,经中才说‘感受寿边际之受’。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamaṃ deve vassante pañcahi maggehi udake pavisante āvāṭānaṃ pūraṇakālo viya hi paṭhamameva paṭisandhikkhaṇe manodvārikavedanāya vatthurūpe patiṭṭhitakālo, punappunaṃ deve vassante pañcannaṃ maggānaṃ pūritakālo viya pavatte pañcadvārikavedanāya pavattikālo, gāvutaḍḍhayojanamattaṃ ajjhottharaṇaṃ viya paṭhamavaye vīsativassakāle rajjanādivasena tassā adhimattabalavabhāvo, yāva vāpito udakaṃ na niggacchati, tāva pūrāya vāpiyā ṭhitakālo viya paññāsavassakāle tassā ṭhitakālo, niddhamanatumbesu vivaṭesu kammante kariyamāne udakassa nikkhamanakālo viya saṭṭhivassakālato paṭṭhāya tassā parihāni, udake bhaṭṭhe udakamaggesu parittodakassa ṭhitakālo viya asītinavutivassakāle pañcadvārikavedanāya mandakālo, āvāṭesuyeva udakassa patiṭṭhānakālo viya hadayavatthukoṭiṃ nissāya manodvārikavedanāya pavattikālo, āvāṭesu parittepi udake sati ‘‘vāpiyaṃ udakaṃ atthī’’ti vattabbakālo viya yāva sā pavattati, tāva ‘‘satto jīvatī’’ti vuccati. Yathā pana āvāṭesu udake chinne ‘‘natthi vāpiyaṃ udaka’’nti vuccati, evaṃ manodvārikavedanāya appavattamānāya ‘‘satto mato’’ti vuccati. Imaṃ vedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘jīvitapariyantikaṃ vedanaṃ vediyamāno’’ti.
「身坏」:指由于身体的坏灭。「命灭尽之后」:指寿命终结之后。「就在这里」:是说不会以结生的方式去往他处,即于此处。「变为清凉」:指转起时的纷扰动乱皆已止息,成为清凉、不再生起的法。「诸身」:指由诸界组合而成的身体。「残留」:指成为剩余下来的部分。显示巴利原文
Kāyassa bhedāti kāyassa bhedena. Jīvitapariyādānā uddhanti jīvitakkhayato uddhaṃ. Idhevāti paṭisandhivasena parato agantvā idheva. Sītībhavissantīti pavattivipphandadaratharahitāni sītāni appavattanadhammāni bhavissanti. Sarīrānīti dhātusarīrāni. Avasissantīti avasiṭṭhāni bhavissanti.
「从陶匠烧窑处」:即从陶匠烧制器皿的地方。「应放置」:指会将其安放在那里。「诸瓦」:指连同口沿一体成型的陶瓶瓦片。「残留」:指会存留在那里。同样地,应当在以下将譬喻与义理作对应:炽燃的陶匠烧窑,应视为三有轮回;陶匠,应视为瑜伽行者;从窑中取出陶器的棍棒,应视为阿拉汉道智;平地,应视为无为的涅槃地基。用棍棒将热瓶拨出并安放在平地的那一刻,应视为:修习观的行者在开始观照色法七组、非色法七组时,他的止观业处变得纯熟、清晰耀目地显现,恰逢那样的时节适宜等条件,于一座中增长观智,证得最上果——阿拉汉果,从诸恶趣中拔除了有身,继而以果等至安住于无为的涅槃地基上。然而,漏尽者就如那热瓶,并不在证得阿拉汉果的当天便入般涅槃,而是为了教法的传承延续,住世五十年或六十年,等到最后的心识生起,已执受的五蕴坏灭,才进入无余涅槃界。到了那时,如同瓶留瓦片一般,唯余非执受之身。经中说出‘他了知身体将存留下来’,这是为了策励漏尽者修习而说的。显示巴利原文
Kumbhakārapākāti kumbhakārassa bhājanapacanaṭṭhānato. Paṭisisseyyāti ṭhapeyya. Kapallānīti saha mukhavaṭṭiyā ekābaddhāni kumbhakapallāni. Avasisseyyunti tiṭṭheyyuṃ. Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – ādittakumbhakārapāko viya hi tayo bhavā daṭṭhabbā, kumbhakāro viya yogāvacaro, pākato kumbhakārabhājanānaṃ nīharaṇadaṇḍako viya arahattamaggañāṇaṃ, samo bhūmibhāgo viya asaṅkhataṃ nibbānatalaṃ, daṇḍakena uṇhakumbhaṃ ākaḍḍhitvā same bhūmibhāge kumbhassa ṭhapitakālo viya āraddhavipassakassa rūpasattakaṃ arūpasattakaṃ vipassantassa kammaṭṭhāne ca paguṇe vibhūte upaṭṭhahamāne tathārūpaṃ utusappāyādiṃ labhitvā ekāsane nisinnassa vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ patvā catūhi apāyehi attabhāvaṃ uddharitvā phalasamāpattivasena asaṅkhate nibbānatale ṭhitakālo daṭṭhabbo. Khīṇāsavo pana uṇhakumbho viya arahattappattadivaseyeva na parinibbāti, sāsanappaveṇiṃ pana ghaṭayamāno paṇṇāsasaṭṭhivassāni ṭhatvā carimakacittappattiyā upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedā anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāti. Athassa kumbhassa viya kapallāni anupādiṇṇakasarīrāneva avasissantīti. Sarīrāni avasissantīti pajānātīti idaṃ pana khīṇāsavassa anuyogāropanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
「识应知」:意思是结生识应被了知。「善哉善哉」:这是在赞叹长老们的回答。「正是如此」:即当三种行不存在时,结生识不显现等,确实如此。「应信解」:意思是获得那称为决意的信解。「这就是苦的边际」:这即是轮回之苦的边际,这是它的界限,也就是涅槃。显示巴利原文
Viññāṇaṃ paññāyethāti paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paññāyetha. Sādhu sādhūti therānaṃ byākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsati. Evametanti yadetaṃ tividhe abhisaṅkhāre asati paṭisandhiviññāṇassa appaññāṇantiādi, evameva etaṃ. Adhimuccathāti sanniṭṭhānasaṅkhātaṃ adhimokkhaṃ paṭilabhatha. Esevanto dukkhassāti ayameva vaṭṭadukkhassa anto ayaṃ paricchedo, yadidaṃ nibbānanti. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 取经注释显示巴利原文
2. Upādānasuttavaṇṇanā
52 在第二部经中,「于应取者」:指四种取的缘,也就是三界一切法。「观味者」:指正在随观味著的人。「于此」:在那个火堆中。「以此为食」:即以该(观察、投入等)为缘。「此为取」:这是它的同义词。同样地,这里应当这样理解:火堆就如同三有,也就是三界轮回;燃火之人就如同依赖轮回的愚痴凡夫;投入干草、牛粪等,就如同观味著的凡夫由于渴爱等,通过六门不断造作善与不善的业。当干草、牛粪等耗尽时,通过反复投入它们而使火堆增长,就如同愚痴凡夫不断起身、反复造作如前所述的业,从而一次又一次地产生轮回之苦。显示巴利原文
52. Dutiye upādāniyesūti catunnaṃ upādānānaṃ paccayesu tebhūmakadhammesu. Assādānupassinoti assādaṃ anupassantassa. Tatrāti tasmiṃ aggikkhandhe. Tadāhāroti taṃpaccayo. Tadupādānoti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Evamevakhoti ettha aggikkhandho viya hi tayo bhavā, tebhūmakavaṭṭantipi etadeva, aggijaggakapuriso viya vaṭṭanissito bālaputhujjano, sukkhatiṇagomayādipakkhipanaṃ viya assādānupassino puthujjanassa taṇhādivasena chahi dvārehi kusalākusalakammakaraṇaṃ. Tiṇagomayādīsu khīṇesu punappunaṃ tesaṃ pakkhipanena aggikkhandhassa vaḍḍhanaṃ viya bālaputhujjanassa uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya yathāvuttakammāyūhanena aparāparaṃ vaṭṭadukkhanibbattanaṃ.
“不应时常投入干草等”:有个希望他得利益的人会这样说:“朋友,你为什么不断地起身,把草捆成束,将干草和木柴装满篮子,又投入干牛粪来点燃这火呢?难道你这样做能有什么增长吗?”“朋友,这是我们家族传下来的做法,但我这样做不但没有增长,哪里来的增长呢?我照料这火,都没法洗澡、没空吃饭、也不能躺下休息。”“那么,朋友,你弄这没有意义的燃火做什么?来吧,你把带来的这些草等东西丢在这里,它们自己就会烧尽。你呀,在某个地方有一个有凉水的池塘,你先去那里沐浴,然后用花、香、涂饰打扮自己,穿上整齐的下衣,披好上衣,穿上鞋子,走进城里,登上最殊胜的殿堂,打开窗户,光彩照人地安坐在大街上,成为心意专注、具足安乐的人。当你坐在那里时,随着那些草等东西耗尽,这火自然就会熄灭不见了。”那个人便照此去做了。同样地,当他安坐那里时,那火因为燃料耗尽就自然熄灭不见了。这是针对这个比喻而说“不于时常”等这番话的。显示巴利原文
Na kālena kālaṃ sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyyāti tañhi koci atthakāmo evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘bho kasmā uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya kalāpe bandhitvā sukkhatiṇakaṭṭhānaṃ pacchiyañca pūretvā sukkhagomayāni pakkhipanto etaṃ aggiṃ jālesi? Api nu te atthi itonidānaṃ kāci vaḍḍhīti? Vaṃsāgatametaṃ bho amhākaṃ, itonidānaṃ pana me avaḍḍhiyeva, kuto vaḍḍhi? Ahañhi imaṃ aggiṃ jagganto neva nhāyituṃ na bhuñjituṃ na nipajjituṃ labhāmīti. Tena hi bho kiṃ te iminā niratthakena aggijālanena? Ehi tvaṃ etāni ābhatāni tiṇādīni ettha nikkhipa, tāni sayameva jhāyissanti, tvaṃ pana asukasmiṃ ṭhāne sītodakā pokkharaṇī atthi, tattha nhatvā, mālāgandhavilepanehi attānaṃ maṇḍetvā sunivattho supārutova pādukāhi nagaraṃ pavisitvā pāsādavaramāruyha vātapānaṃ vivaritvā mahāvīthiyaṃ virocamāno nisīda ekaggo sukhasamappito hutvā, tattha te nisinnassa tiṇādīnaṃ khayena sayameva ayaṃ aggi appaṇṇattibhāvaṃ gamissatī’’ti. So tathā kareyya. Tatheva ca tattha nisinnassa so aggi upādānakkhayena appaṇṇattibhāvaṃ gaccheyya. Idaṃ sandhāyetaṃ ‘‘na kālena kāla’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
那么,在“同样地”这一句里,应当如此对应譬喻:那正在燃烧四十担柴的大火堆,应视为三界轮回;烧火之人,应视为依止轮回的修行者;那位希望令他得益的人,应视为正自觉者;那人给他的教导,便如同如来为他开示三界诸法的业处,对他说:“来,比丘,于三界诸法心生厌离,如此你将能从轮回之苦中解脱。”那人遵从教导去做,而后坐于殿堂时,便如同修行者接受了善逝的教导,进入空闲处,于三界诸法建立观,次第获得适合的饮食等资具,于一座中安坐,最终立足于最上果位。那人因沐浴、涂香等使身体洁净、善加装饰,坐在殿堂中成就专一喜乐之时,便如同修行者在圣道的水池中以道智的清水善加沐浴,洗净烦恼污垢,穿上惭与愧的内衣,以戒的涂香涂身,以阿拉汉果的庄严装饰自身,佩戴解脱花鬘,穿起神足之履,进入涅槃城,登上法殿,于念处的大街上光彩安坐,并以涅槃为所缘,进入果等至而安坐。再者,那人坐在那里时,由于草等燃料耗尽,火堆消失不见,这应视为诸漏。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti ettha pana idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – cattālīsāya kaṭṭhavāhānaṃ jalamāno mahāaggikkhandho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, aggijagganakapuriso viya vaṭṭasannissitako yogāvacaro, atthakāmo puriso viya sammāsambuddho, tena purisena tassa dinnaovādo viya tathāgatena ‘‘ehi tvaṃ, bhikkhu, tebhūmakadhammesu nibbinda, evaṃ vaṭṭadukkhā muccissasī’’ti tassa tebhūmakadhammesu kammaṭṭhānassa kathitakālo, tassa purisassa yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjitvā pāsāde nisinnakālo viya yogino sugatovādaṃ sampaṭicchitvā suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa tebhūmakadhammesu vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā anukkamena yathānurūpaṃ āhārasappāyādiṃ labhitvā, ekāsane nisinnassa aggaphale patiṭṭhitakālo, tassa nhānavilepanādīhi sudhotamaṇḍitakāyattā tasmiṃ nisinnassa ekaggasukhasamappitakālo viya yogino ariyamaggapokkharaṇiyaṃ maggañāṇodakena sunhātasudhotakilesamalassa hirottappasāṭake nivāsetvā sīlavilepanānulittassa arahattamaṇḍanena attabhāvaṃ maṇḍetvā vimuttipupphadāmaṃ piḷandhitvā iddhipādapādukā āruyha nibbānanagaraṃ pavisitvā dhammapāsādaṃ āruyha satipaṭṭhānamahāvīthiyaṃ virocamānassa nibbānārammaṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisinnakālo. Tassa pana purisassa tasmiṃ nisinnassa tiṇādīnaṃ khayena aggikkhandhassa appaṇṇattigamanakālo viya khīṇāsavassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa mahāvaṭṭavūpasamo daṭṭhabbo. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 结经注释显示巴利原文
3. Saṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
53 在第三部经中,「于诸结的缘」:指十结的缘。「应燃」:应令其燃烧。「应注油、应添灯芯」:为了照料灯火,手持大油壶和大灯芯盘,恒常立于近处,油尽便添油,灯芯耗尽便添灯芯。此处的其余文句以及譬喻的结合,应依前文已说的方法了知。第三段。显示巴利原文
53. Tatiye saṃyojaniyesūti dasannaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ paccayesu. Jhāyeyyāti jaleyya. Telaṃ āsiñceyya vaṭṭiṃ upasaṃhareyyāti dīpapaṭijagganatthaṃ telabhājanañca mahantañca vaṭṭikapālaṃ gahetvā samīpe niccaṃ ṭhitova tele khīṇe telaṃ āsiñceyya, vaṭṭiyā khīṇāya vaṭṭiṃ upasaṃhareyya. Sesamettha saddhiṃ opammasaṃsandanena purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tatiyaṃ.
4. 第二结经注释显示巴利原文
4. Dutiyasaṃyojanasuttavaṇṇanā
54 在第四部经中,先作譬喻,然后说明其义。其余与此相同。第四段。显示巴利原文
54. Catutthe upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ katvā pacchā attho vutto. Sesaṃ tādisameva. Catutthaṃ.
大树经注显示巴利原文
5. Mahārukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
55 「向上输送养分」:即把地界之味与水界之味向上提升。因养分被输送,在高达百掌的树干嫩芽顶端,便如滴滴水珠般形成滋润液而停留。此处譬喻的对应如下:大树,譬喻三界轮回;树根,譬喻诸处;从树根向上输送养分,譬喻从六门造业而上升;大树依仗养分上升能住立长达一劫,譬喻那依赖于轮回的愚痴凡夫,不断从六门造业,于轮回中一再增长,便得以长久存在。显示巴利原文
55. Pañcame uddhaṃ ojaṃ abhiharantīti pathavīrasañca āporasañca upari āropenti. Ojāya āropitattā hatthasatubbedhassa rukkhassa aṅkuraggesu bindubindūni viya hutvā sineho tiṭṭhati. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – mahārukkho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, mūlāni viya āyatanāni, mūlehi ojāya ārohanaṃ viya chahi dvārehi kammārohanaṃ, ojāya abhiruḷhattā mahārukkhassa yāvakappaṭṭhānaṃ viya vaṭṭanissitabālaputhujjanassa chahi dvārehi kammaṃ āyūhantassa aparāparaṃ vaṭṭassa vaḍḍhanavasena dīgharattaṃ ṭhānaṃ.
「锄头与篮」,即锄头和盛物的篮。「应断成一段一段」,指把大大小小的部分一截一截地砍断。此处譬喻的对应如下:大树,譬喻三界轮回;想要毁坏那棵树的人,譬喻瑜伽行者;锄头,譬喻智慧;篮,譬喻定;砍树的斧,譬喻智慧;树根被砍断之时,譬喻瑜伽行者从师长处取得业处后开始作意的智慧;断成一段一段之时,譬喻对四大的简略作意;劈开,譬喻对四十二身分的详细作意;弄成碎片之时,譬喻依止于所造色,及以色蕴为所缘的识等,通过它们来把握名色;断根,譬喻寻求那名色的缘;在风中和阳光下晒干后用火焚烧,譬喻渐次增长观,当得到合适的条件、业处变得明晰现前时,便独坐结跏趺座,修习沙门法而证得最上果;成为灰烬,譬喻证得阿拉汉果的当天便入般涅槃者的住寿期间;被大风吹散、被河水冲走,譬喻于执取的五蕴破灭之后,在无余涅槃界般涅槃者的轮回止息。第五。显示巴利原文
Kuddālapiṭakanti kuddālañceva pacchibhājanañca. Khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chindeyyāti khuddakamahantāni khaṇḍākhaṇḍāni karonto chindeyya. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – idhāpi hi mahārukkho viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, rukkhaṃ nāsetukāmo puriso viya yogāvacaro, kuddālo viya ñāṇaṃ, pacchi viya samādhi, rukkhacchedanapharasu viya ñāṇaṃ, rukkhassa mūle chinnakālo viya yogino ācariyasantike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā manasikarontassa paññā, khaṇḍākhaṇḍikaṃ chindanakālo viya saṅkhepato catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ manasikāro, phālanaṃ viya dvecattālīsāya koṭṭhāsesu vitthāramanasikāro, sakalikaṃ sakalikaṃ karaṇakālo viya upādārūpassa ceva rūpakkhandhārammaṇassa viññāṇassa cāti imesaṃ vasena nāmarūpapariggaho, mūlānaṃ upacchedanaṃ viya tasseva nāmarūpassa paccayapariyesanaṃ, vātātape visosetvā agginā ḍahanakālo viya anupubbena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā aññataraṃ sappāyaṃ labhitvā kammaṭṭhāne vibhūte upaṭṭhahamāne ekapallaṅke nisinnassa samaṇadhammaṃ karontassa aggaphalappatti, masikaraṇaṃ viya arahattappattadivaseyeva aparinibbāyantassa yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhita kālo, mahāvāte opunanaṃ nadiyā pavāhanaṃ viya ca upādiṇṇakakkhandhabhedena anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbutassa vaṭṭavūpasamo veditabbo. Pañcamaṃ.
第二大樹經注显示巴利原文
6. Dutiyamahārukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
56 第六个解释中,也是先举譬喻,再说明其义,这便是不同之处。第六。显示巴利原文
56. Chaṭṭhepi upamaṃ paṭhamaṃ vatvā pacchā attho vutto, idameva nānattaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
幼树经注显示巴利原文
7. Taruṇarukkhasuttavaṇṇanā
57-59 “幼树”:指尚未结果的树。“应环剥”:即应清理。“应给土”:除去坚硬粗劣的土,施予混合了软牛粪粉的甘甜土。“增长”:达到增长后,能开花的便得花,能结果的便得果。这是此中譬喻的对应:幼树喻三地轮转,护树人喻依着于轮转的凡夫,根、果等的相续喻由身、语、意三门所积集的善与不善业,树达增长喻凡夫由三门造业,令轮转一再流转。反之,还灭依前述之理当知。第八、第九个譬喻意义明显,第七个也是如此。显示巴利原文
57-59. Sattame taruṇoti ajātaphalo. Palimajjeyyāti sodheyya. Paṃsuṃ dadeyyāti thaddhapharusapaṃsuṃ haritvā mudugomayacuṇṇamissaṃ madhurapaṃsuṃ pakkhipeyya. Vuddhinti vuddhiṃ āpajjitvā pupphūpago pupphaṃ, phalūpago phalaṃ gaṇheyya. Idaṃ panettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ – taruṇarukkho viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ, rukkhajaggako puriso viya vaṭṭanissito puthujjano, mūlaphalasantānādīni viya tīhi dvārehi kusalākusalakammāyūhanaṃ, rukkhassa vuḍḍhiāpajjanaṃ viya puthujjanassa tīhi dvārehi kammaṃ āyūhato aparāparaṃ vaṭṭappavatti. Vivaṭṭaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Aṭṭhamanavamāni uttānatthāneva. Sattamādīni.
10. 因缘经注显示巴利原文
10. Nidānasuttavaṇṇanā
60 经文第十处说“住于俱卢国”:“俱卢”是因复数词形而得名的地区。“剑磨瑟昙”是该国一个名为剑磨瑟昙的集镇,他即以之为乞食村。“此具寿”是一种既亲切又尊敬的称呼,“阿难”则是那位长老的名字。“于一面坐”:阿难尊者避开了六种坐姿的过失,在朝向世尊右膝之处,如同融入了清净的漆汁般进入六色佛光之中,仿佛披上金布,又像步入红毯帷帐,以法藏守护者的身份坐下。因此说“于一面坐”。显示巴利原文
60. Dasame kurūsu viharatīti kurūti evaṃ bahuvacanavasena laddhavohāre janapade viharati. Kammāsadhammaṃ nāma kurūnaṃ nigamoti evaṃnāmako kurūnaṃ nigamo, taṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvāti attho. Āyasmāti piyavacanametaṃ garuvacanametaṃ. Ānandoti tassa therassa nāmaṃ. Ekamantaṃ nisīdīti cha nisajjadose vivajjento dakkhiṇajāṇumaṇḍalassa abhimukhaṭṭhāne chabbaṇṇānaṃ buddharasmīnaṃ anto pavisitvā pasannalākhārasaṃ vigāhanto viya suvaṇṇapaṭaṃ pārupanto viya rattakambalavitānamajjhaṃ pavisanto viya dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko āyasmā ānando nisīdi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisīdī’’ti.
那么,这位具寿是在什么时候、以什么因缘去亲近世尊的呢?是在傍晚时分,为了请问缘起之故。据说在那一天,这位具寿为了摄受族姓,挨家挨户地托钵,犹如放下千袋金钱一般,在剑磨瑟昙镇乞食。用完斋饭后,他服侍世尊,完成日常事务,待世尊进入香室后,顶礼世尊,然后回到自己的昼间住处,为弟子们安排事务。弟子们离去后,他扫净昼房,铺好皮坐垫,用水壶之水清净手足,结跏趺坐,进入入流果的等至。接着,在预定的时间从等至中出定,将智慧转向缘起。他心想:‘这就是无明缘行’,从开端推到末端,从末端推到开端,从两端推到中间,又从中间推到两端,如此将十二支缘反复观察了三遍。当他如此观察时,整个缘起变得极为清晰,如同极浅近的事物一般显现。于是他心想:‘这缘起被一切诸佛称为甚深,其显现也甚深,如今对我这个仅具部分智慧的声闻来说,却变得像浅近的法一样清晰可见。是只有我觉得它浅近,还是其他人也这样觉得呢?’他决定将自己能体悟此法甚深的原因禀告世尊,便从座而起,抖净皮垫,带着它,于傍晚时分前去亲近世尊。显示巴利原文
Kāya pana velāya kena kāraṇena ayamāyasmā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamantoti? Sāyanhavelāya paccayākārapañhaṃ pucchanakāraṇena. Taṃ divasaṃ kira ayamāyasmā kulasaṅgahatthāya gharadvāre gharadvāre sahassabhaṇḍikaṃ nikkhipanto viya kammāsadhammaṃ piṇḍāya caritvā piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto satthu vattaṃ dassetvā satthari gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhe satthāraṃ vanditvā attano divāṭṭhānaṃ gantvā antevāsikesu vattaṃ dassetvā paṭikkantesu divāṭṭhānaṃ paṭisammajjitvā cammakkhaṇḍaṃ paññapetvā udakatumbato udakena hatthapāde sītalaṃ katvā pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno sotāpattiphalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvā. Atha paricchinnakālavasena samāpattito vuṭṭhāya paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāresi. So ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādito paṭṭhāya antaṃ, antato paṭṭhāya ādiṃ, ubhayantato paṭṭhāya majjhaṃ, majjhato paṭṭhāya ubho ante pāpento tikkhattuṃ dvādasapadaṃ paccayākāraṃ sammasi. Tassevaṃ sammasantassa paccayākāro vibhūto hutvā uttānakuttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Tato cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ paccayākāro sabbabuddhehi gambhīro ceva gambhīrāvabhāso cāti kathito, mayhaṃ kho pana padesañāṇe ṭhitassa sāvakassa sato uttāno viya vibhūto pākaṭo hutvā upaṭṭhāti, mayhaṃyeva nu kho esa uttānako viya upaṭṭhāti, udāhu aññesampīti attano upaṭṭhānakāraṇaṃ satthu ārocessāmī’’ti nisinnaṭṭhānato uṭṭhāya cammakkhaṇḍaṃ papphoṭetvā ādāya sāyanhasamaye bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkami. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘sāyanhavelāyaṃ paccayākārapañhaṃ pucchanakāraṇena upasaṅkamanto’’ti.
“极其甚深”:此处“极其”一词表示超越度量。超越度量而深,即是“极其深”的意思。“显现也甚深”的意思是:它本身甚深,又能显现出来,即能被看见。有的水本身浅,却显现为深,就像因腐烂树叶而呈现暗黑色的陈水。这水虽然才到膝盖深,看上去却像有百人那么深。有的水本身深,却显现为浅,如同宝珠般闪耀的清澈之水。这水虽然有百人深,看上去却像只有膝盖深。有的水既浅又显现为浅,如同钵等容器中的水。有的水既深又显现为深,如同以须弥山为底的大海之水。水本身便有这四种情形。但缘起却不如此,因为缘起既深且显现为深,唯得此一种情形。虽然它是这样的性质,但对我来说却显得极其浅显。所以我感叹:‘尊者,这真是稀有!尊者,这真是奇特!’这样表达了自己的惊讶后提出问题,便默然坐下了。显示巴利原文
Yāva gambhīroti ettha yāvasaddo pamāṇātikkame. Atikkamma pamāṇaṃ gambhīro, atigambhīroti attho. Gambhīrāvabhāsoti gambhīrova hutvā avabhāsati, dissatīti attho. Ekañhi uttānameva gambhīrāvabhāsaṃ hoti pūtipaṇṇarasavasena kāḷavaṇṇaṃ purāṇaudakaṃ viya. Tañhi jāṇuppamāṇampi sataporisaṃ viya dissati. Ekaṃ gambhīraṃ uttānāvabhāsaṃ hoti maṇibhāsaṃ vippasannaudakaṃ viya. Tañhi sataporisampi jāṇuppamāṇaṃ viya khāyati. Ekaṃ uttānaṃ uttānāvabhāsaṃ hoti pātiādīsu udakaṃ viya. Ekaṃ gambhīraṃ gambhīrāvabhāsaṃ hoti sinerupādakamahāsamudde udakaṃ viya. Evaṃ udakameva cattāri nāmāni labhati. Paṭiccasamuppāde panetaṃ natthi. Ayañhi gambhīro ca gambhīrāvabhāso cāti ekameva nāmaṃ labhati . Evarūpo samānopi atha ca pana me uttānakuttānako viya khāyati, tadidaṃ acchariyaṃ, bhante, abbhutaṃ, bhanteti evaṃ attano vimhayaṃ pakāsento pañhaṃ pucchitvā tuṇhībhūto nisīdi.
世尊听了这话,心想:“阿难说缘起浅显,这就如同想要伸手抓取有顶天,如同想要击碎须弥山取出精髓,如同不用船便要横渡大海,如同想要翻转大地取出地味——这等问题属于佛陀的境界。好,我来为他说这缘起的甚深性吧。”于是世尊说了“勿作是念”等话。显示巴利原文
Bhagavā tassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘ānando bhavaggagahaṇāya hatthaṃ pasārento viya sineruṃ bhinditvā miñjaṃ nīharituṃ vāyamamāno viya vinā nāvāya mahāsamuddaṃ taritukāmo viya pathaviṃ parivattetvā pathavojaṃ gahetuṃ vāyamamāno viya buddhavisayaṃ pañhaṃ attano uttānuttānanti vadati, handassa gambhīrabhāvaṃ ācikkhāmī’’ti cintetvā mā hevantiādimāha.
其中,“mā heva”里的“he”只是一个不变化的助词,意思是“你不要这样说”。而“勿作是念”这句话,世尊既是在鼓励阿难尊者,也略带责备。所说的鼓励是:阿难,你是大智慧、有明净智慧的人,因此对你来说,甚深的缘起也显得极为浅显。但对其他人而言,不应认为它是浅显的,它确实甚深,且显现也甚深。显示巴利原文
Tattha mā hevanti ha-kāro nipātamattaṃ, evaṃ mā bhaṇīti attho. ‘‘Mā heva’’nti ca idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ussādentopi bhaṇati apasādentopi. Tattha ussādentopīti, ānanda, tvaṃ mahāpañño visadañāṇo, tena te gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya khāyati, aññesaṃ panesa uttānakoti na sallakkhetabbo, gambhīroyeva ca so gambhīrāvabhāso ca.
此处以四个比喻来说明:据说,有位大力士,持续六个月享用美味饮食,训练有素,常在节日时练习搏击用的巨石。有一次他前往战场,途中有人指着一块搏击石让他看。他问:“这是什么?”答:“搏击石。”他说:“把它拿来!”当别人说“举不动”时,他便亲自上前,问:“这家伙的重心在哪儿?”随即双手举起两块巨石,像抛游戏球一样抛了出去,扬长而去。在这件事中,搏击石对大力士而言是轻巧的,但不能因此就说对其他人也同样轻巧。正如享受了六个月美味的大力士觉得搏击石轻巧,阿难尊者则是在百劫中圆满成就了出离愿行的。如同大力士因力气大而觉得巨石轻巧,长老则因智慧广大而说缘起浅显,但不能说缘起对他人也同样浅显。显示巴利原文
Tattha catasso upamā vadanti – cha māse subhojanarasapuṭṭhassa kira katayogassa mahāmallassa samajjasamaye katamallapāsāṇaparicayassa yuddhabhūmiṃ gacchantassa antarā mallapāsāṇaṃ dassesuṃ. So ‘‘kiṃ eta’’nti āha. Mallapāsāṇoti. Āharatha nanti. ‘‘Ukkhipituṃ na sakkomā’’ti vutte sayaṃ gantvā ‘‘kuhiṃ imassa bhāriyaṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā dvīhi hatthehi dve pāsāṇe ukkhipitvā kīḷāguḷe viya khipitvā agamāsi. Tattha mallassa mallapāsāṇo lahukoti na aññesampi lahukoti vattabbo. Cha māse subhojanarasapuṭṭho mallo viya hi kappasatasahassaṃ abhinīhārasampanno āyasmā ānando. Yathā mallassa mahābalatāya mallapāsāṇo lahuko, evaṃ therassa mahāpaññatāya paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti vattabbo, so aññesaṃ uttānoti na vattabbo.
在大海中,有一种名为“提弥”的大鱼,体长二百由旬;“提弥伽罗”,体长三百由旬;“提弥罗宾伽罗”(吞舟大鱼),体长五百由旬;另外还有“阿难陀”“提弥难陀”“阿阇诃罗”“大提弥”四种,体长一千由旬。这里以吞舟大鱼为例来说明。据说,当它晃动右耳时,方圆五百由旬的海水都会为之动荡;晃动左耳、尾巴和头部也同样如此。当它嬉戏时,即同时晃动双耳、拍打尾巴并反复摇晃头部,则七八百由旬内的海水便会如同灶上烧开的锅中水一般沸腾起来。在约一百由旬的范围内,海水甚至无法淹没它的背部。它或许会这样说:“人们都说这大海甚深,哪里深了?我连能淹没背部的水都找不到。”因此,对于身躯如此庞大的吞舟大鱼来说,大海显得浅显,但并不能说大海对其他小鱼也是浅显的。同样地,对于智慧成就的长老来说,缘起显得浅显,但不能说对其他人也是浅显的。金翅鸟王身量达一百五十由旬。其右翼长五十由旬,左翼亦然;尾羽长六十由旬,颈长三十由旬,嘴长九由旬,双足长十二由旬。当它欲展示金翅鸟振翅之风时,七八百由旬之地尚且不足。它或许也会如此。显示巴利原文
Mahāsamudde ca timi nāma mahāmaccho dviyojanasatiko, timiṅgalo tiyojanasatiko, timirapiṅgalo pañcayojanasatiko, ānando timinando ajjhāroho mahātimīti ime cattāro yojanasahassikā. Tattha timirapiṅgaleneva dīpenti. Tassa kira dakkhiṇakaṇṇaṃ cālentassa pañcayojanasate padese udakaṃ calati, tathā vāmakaṇṇaṃ, tathā naṅguṭṭhaṃ, tathā sīsaṃ. Dve pana kaṇṇe cāletvā naṅguṭṭhena paharitvā sīsaṃ aparāparaṃ katvā kīḷituṃ āraddhassa sattaṭṭhayojanasate ṭhāne bhājane pakkhipitvā uddhane āropitaṃ viya udakaṃ pakkuthati. Yojanasatamatte padese udakaṃ piṭṭhiṃ chādetuṃ na sakkoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ mahāsamuddo gambhīroti vadanti, kutassa gambhīratā, mayaṃ piṭṭhimattacchādanampi udakaṃ na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa timirapiṅgalassa mahāsamuddo uttānoti aññesañca khuddakamacchānaṃ uttānoti na vattabbo, evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo. Supaṇṇarājā ca diyaḍḍhayojanasatiko hoti. Tassa dakkhiṇapakkho paññāsayojaniko hoti, tathā vāmapakkho, piñchavaṭṭi ca saṭṭhiyojanikā, gīvā tiṃsayojanikā, mukhaṃ navayojanaṃ, pādā dvādasayojanikā, tasmiṃ supaṇṇavātaṃ dassetuṃ āraddhe sattaṭṭhayojanasataṃ ṭhānaṃ nappahoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ ākāso anantoti vadanti, kutassa anantatā, mayaṃ pakkhavātappattharaṇokāsampi na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa supaṇṇarañño ākāso parittoti aññesañca khuddakapakkhīnaṃ parittoti na vattabbo, evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo.
再者,阿修罗王罗睺,从脚底到发梢,身高四千八百由旬。其两臂之间宽一千二百由旬,身体厚度六百由旬。他的手掌、脚掌各长三百由旬,嘴亦如是;一节手指长五十由旬,眉间距离亦五十由旬。额头宽三百由旬,头部长九百由旬。当他踏入大海时,海水极深,却只能没至其膝。他或许会这样说:“人们都说这大海甚深,哪里深了?我连能盖过膝盖的水都找不到。”如此,对于身躯如此庞大的罗睺来说,大海是浅的,但并不能说对于其他人来说大海也是浅的。同样地,对于具足智慧的长老,缘起显得浅显,但也不能说对于其他人缘起也是浅显的。正是基于此理,世尊才说:“阿难,莫作是念!阿难,莫作是念!”显示巴利原文
Rāhu asurindo pana pādantato yāva kesantā yojanānaṃ cattāri sahassāni aṭṭha ca satāni honti. Tassa dvinnaṃ bāhānaṃ antare dvādasayojanasatikaṃ, bahalattena chayojanasatikaṃ, hatthapādatalāni tiyojanasatikāni, tathā mukhaṃ, ekaṅgulipabbaṃ paññāsayojanaṃ, tathā bhamukantaraṃ, nalāṭaṃ tiyojanasatikaṃ, sīsaṃ navayojanasatikaṃ. Tassa mahāsamuddaṃ otiṇṇassa gambhīraṃ udakaṃ jāṇuppamāṇaṃ hoti. So evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘ayaṃ mahāsamuddo gambhīroti vadanti. Kutassa gambhīratā? Mayaṃ jāṇuppaṭicchādanamattampi udakaṃ na labhāmā’’ti. Tattha kāyūpapannassa rāhuno mahāsamuddo uttānoti aññesañca uttānoti na vattabbo. Evameva ñāṇūpapannassa therassa paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti aññesampi uttānoti na vattabbo. Etamatthaṃ sandhāya bhagavā mā hevaṃ, ānanda, mā hevaṃ, ānandāti āha.
然而,对长老而言,深邃的缘起之所以显得浅显,有四个原因。哪四个?即:往昔善根圆满、曾依止外道而住、证得入流果,以及多闻博学。显示巴利原文
Therassa hi catūhi kāraṇehi gambhīro paṭiccasamuppādo uttānoti upaṭṭhāsi. Katamehi catūhi? Pubbūpanissayasampattiyā titthavāsena sotāpannatāya bahussutabhāvenāti.
据说,从此以后的十万劫中,世间出现了一位导师,名为莲花上佛。他的都城名为汉舍卫城,父王名为阿难陀,母后名为善慧,菩萨名为上王子。他在儿子出生当日便行大出家;出家后精勤修行,次第证得一切知智,诵出“多生轮回”的优陀那,在菩提座上安住七日。然后伸出脚说:“我将把脚踏在大地上。”就在那时,大地裂开,升起一朵大莲花。那莲花外瓣长九十肘,花蕊三十肘,花房十二肘,花粉有九罐之多。显示巴利原文
Ito kira satasahassime kappe padumuttaro nāma satthā loke uppajji. Tassa haṃsavatī nāma nagaraṃ ahosi, ānando nāma rājā pitā, sumedhā nāma devī mātā, bodhisatto uttarakumāro nāma ahosi. So puttassa jātadivase mahābhinikkhamanaṃ nikkhamma pabbajitvā padhānamanuyutto anukkamena sabbaññutaṃ patvā, ‘‘anekajātisaṃsāra’’nti udānaṃ udānetvā sattāhaṃ bodhipallaṅke vītināmetvā ‘‘pathaviyaṃ pādaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti pādaṃ abhinīhari. Atha pathaviṃ bhinditvā mahantaṃ padumaṃ uṭṭhāsi. Tassa dhurapattāni navutihatthāni, kesaraṃ tiṃsahatthaṃ, kaṇṇikā dvādasahatthā, navaghaṭappamāṇā reṇu ahosi.
导师身高五十八肘,两臂张开宽度十八肘,额头宽五肘,手和脚各长十一肘。当他以十一肘长的脚踏上十二肘的花房时,花粉腾起,弥散至五十八肘高的上空,然后飘落而下,犹如撒开的红砒霜粉末。从此,世尊便得名“莲花上佛”。他有两位上首弟子,名为提维罗和善生;两位上首女弟子,名为无量和无比;侍者名为善意。莲花上佛世尊为了摄受父王,由十万比丘围绕,住于汉舍卫城的王都。显示巴利原文
Satthā pana ubbedhato aṭṭhapaññāsahattho ahosi, tassa ubhinnaṃ bāhānamantaraṃ aṭṭhārasahatthaṃ, nalāṭaṃ pañcahatthaṃ, hatthapādā ekādasahatthā. Tassa ekādasahatthena pādena dvādasahatthāya kaṇṇikāya akkantamattāya navaghaṭappamāṇā reṇu uṭṭhāya aṭṭhapaññāsahatthaṃ padesaṃ uggantvā okiṇṇamanosilācuṇṇaṃ viya paccokiṇṇaṃ. Tadupādāya bhagavā ‘‘padumuttaro’’tveva paññāyittha. Tassa devilo ca sujāto ca dve aggasāvakā ahesuṃ, amitā ca asamā ca dve aggasāvikā, sumano nāma upaṭṭhāko. Padumuttaro bhagavā pitusaṅgahaṃ kurumāno bhikkhusatasahassaparivāro haṃsavatiyā rājadhāniyā vasati.
他还有个弟弟,名叫善意王子。国王将距汉舍卫城一百由旬的领地赐予他作封邑。他时常前来拜见父王与导师。一日,边境发生叛乱。善意送信禀报国王。国王回复:‘孩子,我封你在此,所为何事?’他平息盗贼后,又送信禀报:‘大王,地方已然平定。’国王大喜,说:‘速命我儿前来。’他有近千名大臣。途中,他与大臣们商议:‘父王欢喜,若赐我恩惠,我当求什么?’有的大臣说:‘该求象、马、领地或七宝。’另一些大臣说:‘你们身为大地之主的儿子,财富并不难得。纵使获得这一切,终将舍弃而去,唯有福德可以带走。所以,大王赐恩时,你应当求取供养莲花上佛世尊三个月的恩惠。’王子说:‘你们真是我的善知识。我本无此念,全靠你们启发。我当如此而行。’于是他前去礼敬父王。父王拥抱他,亲吻他的头顶,说:‘孩子,我赐你一个恩惠。’他说:‘大王,我愿以四资具供养世尊三个月,令此生不虚度,请您将此恩惠赐予我。’父王说:‘孩子,这不行,另选别的吧。’他说:‘大王,’显示巴利原文
Kaniṭṭhabhātā panassa sumanakumāro nāma. Tassa rājā haṃsavatito vīsayojanasate bhogaṃ adāsi. So kadāci āgantvā pitarañca satthārañca passati. Athekadivasaṃ paccanto kupito. Sumano rañño sāsanaṃ pesesi. Rājā ‘‘tvaṃ mayā, tāta, kasmā ṭhapito’’ti paṭipesesi. So core vūpasametvā ‘‘upasanto, deva, janapado’’ti rañño pesesi. Rājā tuṭṭho ‘‘sīghaṃ mama putto āgacchatū’’ti āha. Tassa sahassamattā amaccā honti. So tehi saddhiṃ antarāmagge mantesi – ‘‘mayhaṃ pitā tuṭṭho sace me varaṃ deti, kiṃ gaṇhāmī’’ti? Atha naṃ ekacce ‘‘hatthiṃ gaṇhatha, assaṃ gaṇhatha, janapadaṃ gaṇhatha, sattaratanāni gaṇhathā’’ti āhaṃsu. Apare ‘‘tumhe pathavissarassa puttā, na tumhākaṃ dhanaṃ dullabhaṃ, laddhampi cetaṃ sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, puññameva ekaṃ ādāya gamanīyaṃ, tasmā deve varaṃ dadamāne temāsaṃ padumuttaraṃ bhagavantaṃ upaṭṭhātuṃ varaṃ gaṇhathā’’ti. So ‘‘tumhe mayhaṃ kalyāṇamittā nāma, mametaṃ cittaṃ natthi, tumhehi pana uppāditaṃ, evaṃ karissāmī’’ti, gantvā pitaraṃ vanditvā pitarā āliṅgetvā, matthake cumbitvā ‘‘varaṃ te, putta, demī’’ti vutte ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, mahārāja, bhagavantaṃ temāsaṃ catūhi paccayehi upaṭṭhahanto jīvitaṃ avañjhaṃ kātuṃ, idaṃ me varaṃ dehī’’ti āha. Na sakkā, tāta, aññaṃ varehīti. Deva, khattiyānaṃ nāma dvekathā natthi, etameva me dehi, na mamaññena atthoti. Tāta, buddhānaṃ nāma cittaṃ dujjānaṃ, sace bhagavā na icchissati, mayā dinnampi kiṃ bhavissatīti? ‘‘Sādhu, deva, ahaṃ bhagavato cittaṃ jānissāmī’’ti vihāraṃ gato.
那时,世尊用斋已毕,进入香室。他来到聚集在圆堂的比丘们中间。比丘们问道:‘王子,你为何而来?’他说:‘为拜见世尊。请让我拜见世尊。’比丘们说:‘王子,我们不能随心所欲,随时想见导师便能见到。’他问:‘那么,诸位尊者,谁能做到?’答:‘善意长老,王子。’他问:‘长老在何处?’问明长老的座位后,他便前去礼敬长老,说道:‘尊者,我想拜见世尊,请让我拜见世尊。’长老说:‘来吧,王子。’于是拉着他的手,让他站在香室的庭院中,自己登入香室。世尊问:‘善意,为何而来?’长老答:‘尊者,王子想要拜见世尊。’世尊说:‘那么,比丘,铺座。’长老铺好座位。世尊在铺好的座位上坐下。王子礼敬世尊后,致以问候。世尊问:‘王子,你何时来的?’他说:‘尊者,在您进入香室之时。比丘们告诉我说,不能随心所欲地拜见世尊,于是他们送我到长老那里。长老只一句话,便让我见到了您。尊者,我想,长老在您的教法中很得您的宠爱吧。’世尊说:‘是的,王子,这位比丘在我的教法中甚得宠爱。’王子问:‘尊者,在佛陀的教法中,要怎么做,才能得此宠爱呢?’世尊说:‘布施、持戒、行显示巴利原文
Tena ca samayena bhattakiccaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭho hoti. So maṇḍalamāḷe sannisinnānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ santikaṃ agamāsi. Te naṃ āhaṃsu – ‘‘rājaputta kasmā āgatosī’’ti? Bhagavantaṃ dassanāya, dassetha me bhagavantanti. ‘‘Na mayaṃ, rājaputta, icchiticchitakkhaṇe satthāraṃ daṭṭhuṃ labhāmā’’ti. Ko pana, bhante, labhatīti? Sumanatthero nāma rājaputtāti. So ‘‘kuhiṃ bhante thero’’ti? Therassa nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā gantvā vanditvā – ‘‘icchāmahaṃ, bhante, bhagavantaṃ passituṃ, dassetha me bhagavanta’’nti āha. Thero ‘‘ehi, rājaputtā’’ti taṃ gahetvā gandhakuṭipariveṇe ṭhapetvā gandhakuṭiṃ āruhi. Atha naṃ bhagavā ‘‘sumana, kasmā āgatosī’’ti āha. Rājaputto, bhante, bhagavantaṃ dassanāya āgatoti. Tena hi bhikkhu āsanaṃ paññapehīti. Thero āsanaṃ paññapesi. Nisīdi bhagavā paññatte āsane. Rājaputto bhagavantaṃ vanditvā paṭisanthāraṃ akāsi, ‘‘kadā āgatosi rājaputtā’’ti? Bhante, tumhesu gandhakuṭiṃ paviṭṭhesu, bhikkhū pana ‘‘na mayaṃ icchiticchitakkhaṇe bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhuṃ labhāmā’’ti maṃ therassa santikaṃ pāhesuṃ, thero pana ekavacaneneva dassesi, thero, bhante, tumhākaṃ sāsane vallabho maññeti. Āma, rājakumāra, vallabho esa bhikkhu mayhaṃ sāsaneti. Bhante, buddhānaṃ sāsane kiṃ katvā vallabho hotīti? Dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ samādiyitvā uposathakammaṃ katvā, kumārāti. Bhagavā ahampi thero viya buddhasāsane vallabho hotukāmo, temāsaṃ me vassāvāsaṃ adhivāsethāti. Bhagavā, ‘‘atthi nu kho gatena attho’’ti oloketvā ‘‘atthī’’ti disvā ‘‘suññāgāre kho, rājakumāra, tathāgatā abhiramantī’’ti āha. Kumāro ‘‘aññātaṃ bhagavā, aññātaṃ sugatā’’ti vatvā – ‘‘ahaṃ, bhante, purimataraṃ gantvā vihāraṃ kāremi, mayā pesite bhikkhusatasahassena saddhiṃ āgacchathā’’ti paṭiññaṃ gahetvā pitu santikaṃ gantvā, ‘‘dinnā me, deva, bhagavatā paṭiññā, mayā pahite tumhe bhagavantaṃ peseyyāthā’’ti pitaraṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā yojane yojane vihāraṃ kāretvā vīsayojanasataṃ addhānaṃ gato. Gantvā attano nagare vihāraṭṭhānaṃ vicinanto sobhanassa nāma kuṭumbikassa uyyānaṃ disvā satasahassena kiṇitvā satasahassaṃ vissajjetvā vihāraṃ kāresi. Tattha bhagavato gandhakuṭiṃ, sesabhikkhūnañca rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānatthāya kuṭileṇamaṇḍape kārāpetvā pākāraparikkhepaṃ dvārakoṭṭhakañca niṭṭhāpetvā pitu santikaṃ pesesi ‘‘niṭṭhitaṃ mayhaṃ kiccaṃ, satthāraṃ pahiṇathā’’ti.
国王供养世尊饭后,说道:‘世尊,善意之事已毕,他正期待着您的到来。’于是世尊由十万比丘围绕,沿途在每一由旬的寺院中安住而行。王子听闻‘导师来了’,便远迎一由旬,以香、花等恭敬供养,将世尊迎入寺院后——显示巴利原文
Rājā bhagavantaṃ bhojetvā ‘‘bhagavā sumanassa kiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ, tumhākaṃ āgamanaṃ paccāsīsatī’’ti. Bhagavā satasahassabhikkhuparivāro yojane yojane vihāresu vasamāno agamāsi. Kumāro ‘‘satthā āgacchatī’’ti sutvā yojanaṃ paccuggantvā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamāno vihāraṃ pavesetvā –
我以十万钱购得,以十万钱建造;
大牟尼,这座名为善施的园林,请您纳受。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satasahassena me kītaṃ, satasahassena māpitaṃ; Sobhanaṃ nāma uyyānaṃ paṭiggaṇha, mahāmunī’’ti. –
他献出了这座寺院。在入雨安居的那一天,他作布施后,召集自己的儿女与大臣,说道:“导师从远方来到我们这里。诸佛确实是以法为重、不以利养为重的。因此,在这三个月里,我将仅着下衣两件,受持十戒,就住在这里。你们要以同样的方式,为那十万位漏尽者提供三个月的供养。”显示巴利原文
Vihāraṃ niyyātesi. So vassūpanāyikadivase dānaṃ datvā attano puttadāre ca amacce ca pakkosāpetvā āha –‘‘satthā amhākaṃ santikaṃ dūrato āgato, buddhā ca nāma dhammagarunova, nāmisagarukā. Tasmā ahaṃ imaṃ temāsaṃ dve sāṭake nivāsetvā dasa sīlāni samādiyitvā idheva vasissāmi, tumhe khīṇāsavasatasahassassa imināva nīhārena temāsaṃ dānaṃ dadeyyāthā’’ti.
他住在一处与善意长老居所相近的地方,见到长老为世尊所做的种种侍奉之后,心中思惟:“在此处,这位长老是最受世尊亲近之人,我应当发愿获得他这样的位次。”于是,在临近自恣时,他进入村庄,连续七日行大供养,并于第七日将三衣供奉在十万比丘足前,礼敬世尊,而后说道:“世尊,从我在路上建造每间隔一由旬的寺院以来,所积累的这些福德,并非为了求取帝释天的成就、魔的成就或梵天的成就,而是为了发愿能成为佛陀的侍者。因此,世尊,愿我未来也能如同善意长老一样,成为某位佛陀的侍者。”说完便行五体投地礼,俯伏在地。世尊观察:“这位善男子的心愿甚大,能否实现呢?”得知“从今以后的十万劫后,将有一位名为乔达摩的佛陀出现于世,他将成为那位佛陀的侍者。”于是说道:显示巴利原文
So sumanattherassa vasanaṭṭhānasabhāgeyeva ṭhāne vasanto yaṃ thero bhagavato vattaṃ karoti, taṃ sabbaṃ disvā, ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne ekantavallabho esa thero, etasseva ṭhānantaraṃ patthetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cintetvā, upakaṭṭhāya pavāraṇāya gāmaṃ pavisitvā sattāhaṃ mahādānaṃ datvā sattame divase bhikkhūsatasahassassa pādamūle ticīvaraṃ ṭhapetvā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā, ‘‘bhante, yadetaṃ mayā magge yojanantarikavihārakārāpanato paṭṭhāya puññaṃ kataṃ, taṃ neva sakkasampattiṃ, na mārabrahmasampattiṃ patthayantena, buddhassa pana upaṭṭhākabhāvaṃ patthentena kataṃ. Tasmā ahampi bhagavā anāgate sumanatthero viya ekassa buddhassa upaṭṭhāko homī’’ti pañcapatiṭṭhitena patitvā vanditvā nipanno. Bhagavā ‘‘mahantaṃ kulaputtassa cittaṃ, ijjhissati nu kho, no’’ti olokento , ‘‘anāgate ito satasahassime kappe gotamo nāma buddho uppajjissati, tasseva upaṭṭhāko bhavissatī’’ti ñatvā –
“愿你所欲所求,一切悉皆成就;
愿一切心愿圆满,犹如十五的满月。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Icchitaṃ patthitaṃ tuyhaṃ, sabbameva samijjhatu; Sabbe pūrentu saṅkappā, cando pannaraso yathā’’ti. –
王子听了这话,心想:“诸佛所说的话是不会模棱两可的。”第二天,他便取来彼世尊的钵与衣,像跟随在后面而行一样。他在彼佛出世时,曾布施十万年,死后生至天界。在迦叶佛时代,他又向一位正在乞食的长老供养上衣,以作承钵之用。随后从天界死后,转生为波罗奈国王,为八位独觉佛建造树叶屋,安置于宝石台座上,以四事供养一万年。这些是显赫的事迹。显示巴利原文
Āha. Kumāro sutvā ‘‘buddhā nāma advejjhakathā hontī’’ti dutiyadivaseyeva tassa bhagavato pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito gacchanto viya ahosi. So tasmiṃ buddhuppāde vassasatasahassaṃ dānaṃ datvā sagge nibbattitvā kassapabuddhakālepi piṇḍāya carato therassa pattaggahaṇatthaṃ uttarisāṭakaṃ datvā pūjaṃ akāsi. Puna sagge nibbattitvā tato cuto bārāṇasirājā hutvā aṭṭhannaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ paṇṇasālāyo kāretvā maṇiādhārake upaṭṭhapetvā catūhi paccayehi dasavassasahassāni upaṭṭhānaṃ akāsi. Etāni pākaṭaṭṭhānāni.
然而,他在布施了百千劫之后,与我们的菩萨一同生于兜率天,从那里死后,在甘露饭释迦王家中结生,渐次出家,证得正自觉后,第一次回到迦毗罗卫。当世尊要离开那里时,王族王子们为随侍世尊而出家,他便与拔提等人一同出来,在世尊座下出家,不久后在尊者满慈子跟前听法,证得须陀洹果。就这样,这位尊者过去世的亲依止已然具足。由于这种过去世亲依止的具足,甚深的缘起在他面前也显得浅显易懂。显示巴利原文
Kappasatasahassaṃ pana dānaṃ dadamānova amhākaṃ bodhisattena saddhiṃ tusitapure nibbattitvā tato cuto amitodanasakkassa gehe paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā anupubbena katābhinikkhamano sammāsambodhiṃ patvā paṭhamagamanena kapilavatthuṃ āgantvā tato nikkhamante bhagavati bhagavato parivāratthaṃ rājakumāresu pabbajantesu bhaddiyādīhi saddhiṃ nikkhamitvā bhagavato santike pabbajitvā nacirasseva āyasmato puṇṇassa mantāṇiputtassa santike dhammakathaṃ sutvā sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhahi. Evamesa āyasmā pubbūpanissayasampanno, tassimāya pubbūpanissayasampattiyā gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi.
所谓“titthavāso”,是指在师长跟前学习、听闻、遍问、忆持等。长老的这一素质极其清净。因此,即使甚深的缘起,也向他呈现得浅显。再者,对于入流者来说,缘起之相本就是以浅显的方式呈现,而这位尊者正是入流者。在多闻者中,犹如在四肘宽的小房间里燃灯时,床和椅子都清晰可见,名色分别对他们来说十分清楚;而这位尊者又居于多闻者中的首位。因此,凭着他的多闻,甚深的缘起之相也显得浅显。缘起因四种甚深而为甚深,其甚深性在《清净道论》中已有详细说明。所有这些甚深,对长老来说都显得平易。因此,世尊策励阿难尊者说:“不要这样说。”这里的意思是:阿难,你是有大智慧、清净智慧的人,所以对你来说,甚深的缘起也显得浅显。因此,你不要这样说:“这缘起是只对我一个人显得浅显,还是对其他人也如此?”显示巴利原文
Titthavāsoti pana garūnaṃ santike uggahaṇasavanaparipucchanadhāraṇāni vuccanti. So therassa ativiya parisuddho. Tenāpissāyaṃ gambhīropi uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Sotāpannānañca nāma paccayākāro uttānako hutvā upaṭṭhāti, ayañca āyasmā sotāpanno. Bahussutānaṃ catuhatthe ovarake padīpe jalamāne mañcapīṭhaṃ viya nāmarūpaparicchedo pākaṭo hoti, ayañca āyasmā bahussutānaṃ aggo. Iti bāhusaccabhāvenapissa gambhīropi paccayākāro uttānako viya upaṭṭhāsi. Paṭiccasamuppādo catūhi gambhīratāhi gambhīro. Sā panassa gambhīratā visuddhimagge vitthāritāva. Sā sabbāpi therassa uttānakā viya upaṭṭhāsi. Tena bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ ussādento mā hevantiādimāha. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – ānanda, tvaṃ mahāpañño visadañāṇo, tena te gambhīropi paṭiccasamuppādo uttānako viya khāyati. Tasmā ‘‘mayhameva nu kho esa uttānako viya hutvā upaṭṭhāti, udāhu aññesampī’’ti mā evaṃ avaca.
至于所说的“令不满”,其用意如下:阿难,你不应说“然而这缘起对我显得极为浅显”。如果它对你确实如此浅显,为何你不凭自身法的本性证得入流,却要依止我所给的教导才证悟入流道呢?阿难,涅槃本身甚深,而缘起之理若对你变得浅显,那你为何不把粗重的欲贪结、瞋结,以及粗重的欲贪随眠、瞋随眠——这四种烦恼彻底断除,证得一来果呢?为何不把同样微细的四种烦恼彻底断除,证得不来果呢?为何不把色贪等五结,连同慢随眠、有贪随眠、无明随眠这八种烦恼彻底断除,证得阿拉汉果呢?再者,为何不像舍利弗、目犍连那样,在十万劫又一个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证悟声闻波罗蜜智呢?为何不像诸位独觉佛那样,在十万劫又两个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证悟辟支菩提呢?如果这缘起在你那里确实变得完全浅显,那你为何不像诸位佛陀那样,在十万劫又四个、八个或十六个阿僧祇劫中圆满诸波罗蜜,证悟一切知智呢?难道你对这些殊胜的证悟毫无希求吗?看看你错得何等离谱!你名为安住于声闻智位的人,却把这甚深的缘起说成‘对我……’显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘apasādento’’ti, tatthāyamadhippāyo – ānanda, ‘‘atha ca pana me uttānakuttānako viya khāyatī’’ti mā hevaṃ avaca. Yadi hi te esa uttānakuttānako viya khāyati, kasmā tvaṃ attano dhammatāya sotāpanno nāhosi, mayā dinnanaye ṭhatvā sotāpattimaggaṃ paṭivijjhi? Ānanda , idaṃ nibbānameva gambhīraṃ, paccayākāro pana uttānako jāto, atha kasmā oḷārikaṃ kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭighasaṃyojanaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāmarāgānusayaṃ paṭighānusayanti ime cattāro kilese samugghātetvā sakadāgāmiphalaṃ na sacchikarosi, teyeva aṇusahagate cattāro kilese samugghātetvā anāgāmiphalaṃ na sacchikarosi, rūparāgādīni pañca saṃyojanāni, mānānusayaṃ bhavarāgānusayaṃ avijjānusayanti ime aṭṭha kilese samugghātetvā arahattaṃ na sacchikarosi? Kasmā vā satasahassakappādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pūritapāramino sāriputtamoggallānā viya sāvakapāramīñāṇaṃ na paṭivijjhasi, satasahassakappādhikāni dve asaṅkhyeyyāni pūritapāramino paccekabuddhā viya ca paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ na paṭivijjhasi? Yadi vā te sabbathāva esa uttānako hutvā upaṭṭhāsi. Atha kasmā satasahassakappādhikāni cattāri aṭṭha soḷasa vā asaṅkhyeyyāni pūritapāramino buddhā viya sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ na sacchikarosi? Kiṃ anatthikosi etehi visesādhigamehi? Passa yāva ca te aparaddhaṃ, tvaṃ nāma sāvakapadesañāṇe ṭhito atigambhīraṃ paccayākāraṃ ‘‘uttānako viya me upaṭṭhātī’’ti vadasi. Tassa te idaṃ vacanaṃ buddhānaṃ kathāya paccanīkaṃ hoti. Tādisena nāma bhikkhunā buddhānaṃ kathāya paccanīkaṃ kathetabbanti na yuttametaṃ. Nanu mayhaṃ, ānanda, imaṃ paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhituṃ vāyamantasseva kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni atikkantāni. Paccayākārapaṭivijjhanatthāya ca pana me adinnadānaṃ nāma natthi, apūritapāramī nāma natthi. ‘‘Ajja paccayākāraṃ paṭivijjhissāmī’’ti pana me nirussāhaṃ viya mārabalaṃ vidhamantassa ayaṃ mahāpathavī dvaṅgulamattampi nākampi, tathā paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ sampādentassa. Pacchimayāme pana me balavapaccūsasamaye, ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ navahi ākārehi paccayo hotī’’ti diṭṭhamatteyeva dasasahassilokadhātu ayadaṇḍena ākoṭitakaṃsathālo viya viravasataṃ viravasahassaṃ muñcamānā vātāhate paduminipaṇṇe udakabindu viya pakampittha. Evaṃ gambhīro cāyaṃ, ānanda, paṭiccasamuppādo gambhīrāvabhāso ca, etassa, ānanda, dhammassa ananubodhā…pe… nātivattatīti.
“此法”:指这缘起法。“由于不觉悟”:由于未知遍知而未明了。“由于不贯通”:由于度遍知与断遍知而未能通达。“犹如纠缠的线团”:即变得像织线般缠绕不清。好比放置不当或被老鼠咬断的织工线,处处混乱,若想以“这是线头,这是线尾”或线头对线头、线尾对线尾的方法来理顺,极为困难。同样,众生在这缘起中迷失、混乱、混杂,无法将缘起理顺。在上述比喻中,织线若依靠个人努力,或许还可能被理顺;但除了两位菩萨之外,其他任何众生都没有能力凭自身的法性将缘起理顺。再者,如同杂乱的线被加上酸粥、用刷子拍打后,便处处纠结成团、打成死结,这些众生在诸缘中迷失、无法理顺缘起,便依着六十二种邪见而变成一团、打成死结。因为所有执取某种邪见者,无一不是因为未能理顺缘起的缘故。显示巴利原文
Etassa dhammassāti etassa paccayadhammassa. Ananubodhāti ñātapariññāvasena ananubujjhanā. Appaṭivedhāti tīraṇappahānapariññāvasena appaṭivijjhanā. Tantākulakajātāti tantaṃ viya ākulajātā. Yathā nāma dunnikkhittaṃ mūsikacchinnaṃ pesakārānaṃ tantaṃ tahiṃ tahiṃ ākulaṃ hoti, ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ, idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ hoti. Evameva sattā imasmiṃ paccayākāre khalitā ākulā byākulā honti , na sakkonti paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ. Tattha tantaṃ paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkāpi bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi. Yathā pana ākulaṃ tantaṃ kañjiyaṃ datvā kocchena pahaṭaṃ tattha tattha guḷakajātaṃ hoti gaṇṭhibaddhaṃ, evamime sattā paccayesu pakkhalitvā paccaye ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontā dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavasena guḷakajātā honti gaṇṭhibaddhā. Ye hi keci diṭṭhiyo sannissitā, sabbe te paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontāyeva.
“鸟巢结”:指织工所用的酸粥线。“Kulā”是一种鸟,也有人说是这种鸟的巢。因为这两者(酸粥线与鸟巢)都混乱纠结,难以用线头对线头、线尾对线尾的方法理顺,故应依前文所述之理来理解。显示巴利原文
Kulāgaṇṭhikajātāti kulāgaṇṭhikaṃ vuccati pesakārakañjiyasuttaṃ. Kulā nāma sakuṇikā, tassā kulāvakotipi eke. Yathā hi tadubhayampi ākulaṃ aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaranti purimanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
「如文阇草与波波阇草般的状态」:是指变得如同文阇草、如同波波阇草一样。正如这些草被捣碎后搓成绳索,当绳索破旧,弃置一边时,再想拾起那些草来分辨「这是草端、这是草根」,以端对接端、以根对接根而理顺它,是极为困难的。这尚可凭借个人的努力做到,或许能将其理直。然而,除了两位菩萨之外,其他任何众生,都没有能力凭自身的法性将缘起理顺。就这样,这些众生因不能理顺缘起,便执着于恶见,处于打结的状态,从而不能超越恶趣、恶道、堕落与轮回。显示巴利原文
Muñjapabbajabhūtāti muñjatiṇaṃ viya pabbajatiṇaṃ viya ca bhūtā tādisā jātā. Yathā hi tāni tiṇāni koṭṭetvā katarajju jiṇṇakāle katthaci patitaṃ gahetvā tesaṃ tiṇānaṃ ‘‘idaṃ aggaṃ, idaṃ mūla’’nti aggena vā aggaṃ, mūlena vā mūlaṃ samānetuṃ dukkaraṃ, tampi paccattapurisakāre ṭhatvā sakkā bhaveyya ujuṃ kātuṃ, ṭhapetvā pana dve bodhisatte añño satto attano dhammatāya paccayākāraṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ samattho nāma natthi, evamayaṃ pajā paccayaṃ ujuṃ kātuṃ asakkontī diṭṭhigatavasena gaṇṭhikajātā hutvā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ saṃsāraṃ nātivattati.
其中,「恶趣」指地狱、畜生道、饿鬼界、阿修罗众。所有这些之所以被称为「恶趣」,是因为那里没有增长,无有繁荣;同样地,因为它是痛苦所趣向之处,故称「恶道」;由于是从善好圆满之处堕落而生,故称「堕落」。而另一个,即轮回,则——显示巴利原文
Tattha apāyoti nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayaasurakāyā. Sabbepi hi te vaḍḍhisaṅkhātassa ayassa abhāvato ‘‘apāyo’’ti vuccati, tathā dukkhassa gatibhāvato duggati, sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipāto. Itaro pana –
“诸蕴的次第,与诸界、诸处;
流转无间,即名为轮回。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Khandhānañca paṭipāṭi, dhātuāyatanāna ca; Abbhocchinnaṃ vattamānā, saṃsāroti pavuccati’’.
他根本无法超越、无法越过这一切,而是从死至结生,又从结生至死,如此反复执取死与结生,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九众生居中流转不息,犹如狂风中飘荡的船只,又如轭下系缚的牛,周旋不止。世尊正是为了令阿难尊者生起厌离,而宣说了这一切。此处其余内容,如前所述道理。第十。显示巴利原文
Taṃ sabbampi nātivattati nātikkamati, atha kho cutito paṭisandhiṃ, paṭisandhito cutinti evaṃ punappunaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo gaṇhamānā tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu mahāsamudde vātakkhittā nāvā viya yante yuttagoṇo viya ca paribbhamatiyeva. Iti sabbametaṃ bhagavā āyasmantaṃ ānandaṃ apasādento āha. Sesamettha vuttanayamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
第一 无闻者经注释显示巴利原文
1. Assutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
61 大品第一中,“无闻者”指对于蕴、界、处、缘起、念处等,未曾学习、遍问与决择之人。“凡夫”:因产生种种不同类的烦恼等,故称凡夫。正如所说:“凡夫即产生众多烦恼”,此应详加解释。又或,因为凡夫涵盖了不可计数的、背离圣法、行持下劣之人,故称凡夫;又或说许多这样的人本身被称为凡夫,意指与具足戒与闻等功德的圣者相分离的人,因此称为凡夫。如此,以“无闻凡夫”二者,即是指那——显示巴利原文
61. Mahāvaggassa paṭhame assutavāti khandhadhātuāyatanapaccayākārasatipaṭṭhānādīsu uggahaparipucchāvinicchayarahito. Puthujjanoti puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādikāraṇehi puthujjano. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā’’ti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Apica puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjano, puthu vā ayaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhaṃ gato, visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janoti puthujjano. Evametehi ‘‘assutavā puthujjano’’ti dvīhipi padehi ye te –
日种亲之佛陀,曾说有二凡夫:一为盲凡夫,一为善凡夫。(大义释 94)
所说的两种凡夫中,此处指的是盲凡夫。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (mahāni. 94); –
「于此」:指现前可被观察的这个身体。「四大所造」:指由四大种所构成的身体,即由四大所生、以四大所成。「厌离」:即厌倦、厌离。「离欲」:即不染著、离欲。「解脱」:即欲求解脱。「积集」:即增长、积聚。「损减」:即衰减、减损。「执取」:即出生、取著。「弃舍」:即坏灭、舍弃。显示巴利原文
Dve puthujjanā vuttā, tesu andhaputhujjano gahito. Imasminti paccuppannapaccakkhakāyaṃ dasseti. Cātumahābhūtikasminti catumahābhūtakāye catumahābhūtehi nibbatte catumahābhūtamayeti attho. Nibbindeyyāti ukkaṇṭheyya. Virajjeyyāti na rajjeyya. Vimucceyyāti muccitukāmo bhaveyya. Ācayoti vuḍḍhi. Apacayoti parihāni. Ādānanti nibbatti. Nikkhepananti bhedo.
「因此」:由于了知这四种(增长、衰减、出生、坏灭)生起,所以以此为其原因,即此义。如此,世尊在四大所造之身上,将色法示现为不应执取之相,而将无色法示现为应执取之相。何以故?因那些比丘对色的执取极强、极重,故世尊为了令其对色的执取成为应被识知的对象,在排除它之后,于无色上建立,因此这样说。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā ime cattāro vuḍḍhihāninibbattibhedā paññāyanti, tasmā taṃkāraṇāti attho. Iti bhagavā cātumahābhūtike kāye rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ ayuttarūpaṃ katvā arūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ yuttarūpaṃ karoti. Kasmā? Tesañhi bhikkhūnaṃ rūpasmiṃ gāho balavā adhimatto, tena tesaṃ rūpe gāhassa pariggahetabbarūpataṃ dassetvā nikkaḍḍhanto arūpe patiṭṭhāpanatthaṃ evamāha.
「心」等:这些全部是意处的名称。因为它以心所依处为依、以心为行境、与相应法俱起的缘故,故称为「心」;以思虑的意义称为「意」;以识知的意义称为「识」。「不能」是指没有能力。「执取」是指以渴爱吞没、确立而抓取。「我所执」是指以渴爱之我所,执取“此是我所”。「谬执」是指以邪见执取而抓取。“这是我的”是渴爱执,以此执取了一百零八种渴爱行相。“我是这”是慢执,以此执取了九种慢。“这是我的我”是见执,以此执取了六十二种邪见。「所以」是指因为这样长时被执取,所以不能厌离。显示巴利原文
Cittantiādi sabbaṃ manāyatanasseva nāmaṃ. Tañhi cittavatthutāya cittagocaratāya sampayuttadhammacittatāya ca cittaṃ, mananaṭṭhena mano, vijānanaṭṭhena viññāṇanti vuccati. Nālanti na samattho. Ajjhositanti taṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā gahitaṃ. Mamāyitanti taṇhāmamattena mama idanti gahitaṃ. Parāmaṭṭhanti diṭṭhiyā parāmasitvā gahitaṃ. Etaṃ mamāti taṇhāgāho, tena aṭṭhasatataṇhāvicaritaṃ gahitaṃ hoti. Esohamasmīti mānagāho, tena nava mānā gahitā honti. Eso me attāti diṭṭhigāho, tena dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo gahitā honti. Tasmāti yasmā evaṃ dīgharattaṃ gahitaṃ, tasmā nibbindituṃ na samattho.
为什么世尊要说“诸比丘,宁愿……”呢?起初,他们将色视为不适合执取的,将无色视为适合执取的。后来,知道“那些比丘从对色的执取中脱离,转而进入对无色的执取”之后,为了去除他们对无色的执取,便开始了这次开示。其中,“认为是我”指执取为“我”。“更久”指百年以上。为什么世尊这样说呢?难道存在持续超过百年的色吗?初时生起的色不能到达中时,中时生起的不能到达后时;食前生起的不能到达午后,午后生起的不能到达初夜;初夜生起的不能到达中夜,中夜生起的不能到达后夜。不是这样吗?同样地,行走时生起的色不能到达站立,站立时生起的不能到达坐下,坐下时生起的不能到达躺卧。即使在同一个威仪中,抬脚时生起的不能到达前移,前移时生起的不能到达越过,越过时生起的不能到达放下,放下时生起的不能到达安置,安置时生起的不能到达停止。在各个阶段、各个节支分,诸行就像撒在热陶器上的芝麻一样,噼啪作响而破碎。这是真实的。然而,就像灯焰从灯芯点燃后,不……显示巴利原文
Varaṃ, bhikkhaveti idaṃ kasmā āha? Paṭhamañhi tena rūpaṃ pariggahetuṃ ayuttarūpaṃ kataṃ, arūpaṃ yuttarūpaṃ, atha ‘‘tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpato gāho nikkhamitvā arūpaṃ gato’’ti ñatvā taṃ nikkaḍḍhituṃ imaṃ desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha attato upagaccheyyāti attāti gaṇheyya. Bhiyyopīti vassasatato uddhampi. Kasmā pana bhagavā evamāha? Kiṃ atirekavassasataṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ rūpaṃ nāma atthi? Nanu paṭhamavaye pavattaṃ rūpaṃ majjhimavayaṃ na pāpuṇāti, majjhimavaye pavattaṃ pacchimavayaṃ, purebhatte pavattaṃ pacchābhattaṃ, pacchābhatte pavattaṃ paṭhamayāmaṃ, paṭhamayāme pavattaṃ majjhimayāmaṃ, majjhimayāme pavattaṃ pacchimayāmaṃ na pāpuṇāti? Tathā gamane pavattaṃ ṭhānaṃ, ṭhāne pavattaṃ nisajjaṃ, nisajjāya pavattaṃ sayanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Ekairiyāpathepi pādassa uddharaṇe pavattaṃ atiharaṇaṃ, atiharaṇe pavattaṃ vītiharaṇaṃ, vītiharaṇe pavattaṃ vossajjanaṃ, vossajjane pavattaṃ sannikkhepanaṃ, sannikkhepane pavattaṃ sannirujjhanaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tattha tattheva odhi odhi pabbaṃ pabbaṃ hutvā tattakapāle pakkhittatilā viya paṭapaṭāyantā saṅkhārā bhijjantīti? Saccametaṃ. Yathā pana padīpassa jalato jātā taṃ taṃ vaṭṭippadesaṃ anatikkamitvā tattha tattheva bhijjati, atha ca pana paveṇisambandhavasena sabbarattiṃ jalito padīpoti vuccati, evamidhāpi paveṇivasena ayampi kāyo evaṃ ciraṭṭhitiko viya katvā dassito.
“在夜间和白天”指在夜间和在白天。此处是以属格表达处格的意义。“另一个生起,另一个灭去”的意思是:在夜间生起与灭去的,和在白天生起与灭去的,彼此不同。不可理解为:一个生起,而另一个未生起的灭去。“在夜间和白天”这段话,是截取前相续中的一部分,依相续而说的。然而,没有一个心能够持续一整夜或一整天,因为在一次弹指之间,就有无数百千俱胝心识生起。这在《弥兰陀问经》中也说过:显示巴利原文
Rattiyā ca divasassa cāti rattimhi ca divase ca. Bhummatthe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Aññadeva uppajjati, aññaṃ nirujjhatīti yaṃ rattiṃ uppajjati ca nirujjhati ca, tato aññadeva divā uppajjati ca nirujjhati cāti attho. Aññaṃ uppajjati, anuppannameva aññaṃ nirujjhatīti evaṃ pana attho na gahetabbo. ‘‘Rattiyā ca divasassa cā’’ti idaṃ purimapaveṇito parittakaṃ paveṇiṃ gahetvā paveṇivaseneva vuttaṃ, ekarattiṃ pana ekadivasaṃ vā ekameva cittaṃ ṭhātuṃ samatthaṃ nāma natthi. Ekasmiñhi accharākkhaṇe anekāni cittakoṭisatasahassāni uppajjanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ milindapañhe –
“大王,若以百车米,再加半车担、一车七安巴那及两桶米,来排列标记一次弹指间所生起的心,这些米也都会全部耗竭。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Vāhasataṃ kho, mahārāja , vīhīnaṃ, aḍḍhacūḷañca vāhā, vīhisattambaṇāni, dve ca tumbā, ekaccharākkhaṇe pavattassa cittassa ettakā vīhī lakkhaṃ ṭhapīyamānā parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gaccheyyu’’nti.
“在林中”(pavaneti)是说在大林中。它放开一根树枝,又抓住另一根;放开这根,又抓住那根——以此表示:他并非找不到可抓的树枝而下到地面,而是在那片大林中游荡时,持续不断地抓住一根又一根树枝前行。这是要显示的义理。显示巴利原文
Pavaneti mahāvane. Taṃ muñcitvā aññaṃ gaṇhāti, taṃ muñcitvā aññaṃ gaṇhātīti iminā na so gaṇhitabbasākhaṃ alabhitvā bhūmiṃ otarati. Atha kho tasmiṃ mahāvane vicaranto taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhantoyeva caratīti ayamattho dassito.
“同样地”,这里是譬喻的对应:应知大林犹如所缘之林,在林中游荡的猴子犹如在所缘林中生起的心,抓取树枝犹如对所缘的贪着。正如那在林中游荡的猴子,放开这根树枝,抓住那根树枝;同样地,这个在所缘林中游荡的心,有时取色所缘而生起,有时取声等所缘而生起,所缘有过去的、未来的或现在的,有内的,有外的。正如在林间游荡的猴子,不能因为抓不到树枝就说它下到地面坐着——它总是抓住某根枝叶而坐;同样地,在所缘林中游荡的心,也不能说没有取得所缘而生起——它必定取某一种所缘而生起,应当这样了知。由此,世尊将对色法的执取移出,安置于无色法;又将执取从无色法中移出,安置于色法。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – araññamahāvanaṃ viya hi ārammaṇavanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tasmiṃ vane vicaraṇamakkaṭo viya ārammaṇavane uppajjanakacittaṃ. Sākhāgahaṇaṃ viya ārammaṇe lubbhanaṃ. Yathā so araññe vicaranto makkaṭo taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ pahāya taṃ taṃ sākhaṃ gaṇhāti, evamidaṃ ārammaṇavane vicarantaṃ cittampi kadāci rūpārammaṇaṃ gahetvā uppajjati, kadāci saddādīsu aññataraṃ, kadāci atītaṃ, kadāci anāgataṃ vā paccuppannaṃ vā, tathā kadāci ajjhattaṃ, kadāci bāhiraṃ. Yathā ca so araññe vicaranto makkaṭo sākhaṃ alabhitvā oruyha bhūmiyaṃ nisinnoti na vattabbo, ekaṃ pana paṇṇasākhaṃ gahetvāva nisīdati, evameva ārammaṇavane vicarantaṃ cittampi ekaṃ olubbhārammaṇaṃ alabhitvā uppannanti na vattabbaṃ, ekajātiyaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ gahetvāva uppajjatīti veditabbaṃ. Ettāvatā ca pana bhagavatā rūpato nīharitvā arūpe gāho patiṭṭhāpito, arūpato nīharitvā rūpe.
现在,为了把这两方面的执取一并去除,世尊开始了“诸比丘,于此,多闻圣弟子”的开示。这个义理应借用毒蛇咬伤的譬喻来阐明:据说,有个人被毒蛇咬了,一位善巧的医师前来为他除毒,让他呕吐,然后翻转咒语“上金翅鸟,下龙”,将毒向上方引。当他了知毒已上升到眼部时,便说:“我不会让它再往上升,就让它停留在被咬处。”接着再次翻转咒语“下金翅鸟,上龙”,用烟熏耳,用杖击打,使毒下降,停留在被咬处。当他了知毒已停留在那里,便用药膏把毒研化,为他沐浴,说“愿你安乐”,然后随意离去。显示巴利原文
Idāni taṃ ubhayato nikkaḍḍhitukāmo tatra, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvakoti desanaṃ ārabhi. Ayaṃ panattho āsīvisadaṭṭhūpamāya dīpetabbo – eko kira puriso āsīvisena daṭṭho, athassa visaṃ harissāmīti cheko bhisakko āgantvā vamanaṃ kāretvā heṭṭhā garuḷo, upari nāgoti mantaṃ parivattetvā visaṃ upari āropesi. So yāva akkhippadesā āruḷhabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘ito paraṃ abhiruhituṃ na dassāmi, daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapessāmī’’ti upari garuḷo, heṭṭhā nāgoti mantaṃ parivattetvā kaṇṇe dhumetvā daṇḍakena paharitvā visaṃ otāretvā daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapesi. Tatrassa ṭhitabhāvaṃ ñatvā agadalepena visaṃ nimmathetvā nhāpetvā ‘‘sukhī hohī’’ti vatvā yenakāmaṃ pakkāmi.
其中,被毒蛇咬伤后毒在体内安住的阶段,好比这些比丘对色过度执取的时期;善巧的医师如同如来;用咒语将毒向上引的阶段,就如如来把那些比丘对色的执取移出,安置于无色;不让已升至眼部的毒再向上蔓延,而以咒力令其下降安住于咬伤处,则如导师把那些比丘对无色的执取移出,安置于色。对安住于咬伤处的毒用药膏研化,就如同为了移除对这两边的执取而开始这次开示的时期,应如此了知。其中,‘厌恶则离染’是说明道;‘由离染则解脱’是说明果;‘于解脱……’等是说明省察。第一经。显示巴利原文
Tattha āsīvisena daṭṭhassa kāye visapatiṭṭhānaṃ viya imesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpe adhimattagāhakālo, cheko bhisakko viya tathāgato, mantaṃ parivattetvā upari visassa āropitakālo viya tathāgatena tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ rūpato gāhaṃ nīharitvā arūpe patiṭṭhāpitakālo, yāva akkhippadesā āruḷhavisassa upari abhiruhituṃ adatvā puna mantabalena otāretvā daṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva ṭhapanaṃ viya satthārā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ arūpato gāhaṃ nīharitvā rūpe patiṭṭhāpitakālo. Daṭṭhaṭṭhāne ṭhitassa visassa agadalepena nimmathanaṃ viya ubhayato gāhaṃ nīharaṇatthāya imissā desanāya āraddhakālo veditabbo. Tattha nibbindaṃ virajjatīti iminā maggo kathito, virāgā vimuccatīti phalaṃ, vimuttasmintiādinā paccavekkhaṇā. Paṭhamaṃ.
2. 第二无闻者经注释显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyaassutavāsuttavaṇṇanā
62 62.(第二经中)‘会带来乐受的’:乐受的缘。‘触’:即眼触等。难道眼触不是乐受的缘吗?就俱生缘来说,并不是;然而就亲依止缘而言,它对于速行的受是缘,这是依此而说。耳触等也是如此。‘同类的’:即同类、同属,也就是随顺于该触的意思。‘会带来苦受的’等,应依前述道理来了知。‘通过摩擦与聚合’:即由摩擦与聚合,由摩擦与集合之义。‘热’:即暖界。不应把它理解为火生起、喷出火星,而只是‘热’这一状态的别名。其中,‘两木片’:即两根火钻木。其中,下面的火钻木譬如依处,上面的火钻木譬如所缘,摩擦譬如触,暖界譬如受。第二经。显示巴利原文
62. Dutiye sukhavedaniyanti sukhavedanāya paccayaṃ. Phassanti cakkhusamphassādiṃ. Nanu ca cakkhusamphasso sukhavedanāya paccayo na hotīti? Sahajātapaccayena na hoti, upanissayapaccayena pana javanavedanāya hoti , taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Sotasamphassādīsupi eseva nayo. Tajjanti tajjātikaṃ tassāruppaṃ, tassa phassassa anurūpanti attho. Dukkhavedaniyantiādi vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Saṅghaṭṭanasamodhānāti saṅghaṭṭanena ceva samodhānena ca, saṅghaṭṭanasampiṇḍanenāti attho. Usmāti uṇhākāro. Tejo abhinibbattatīti aggicuṇṇo nikkhamatīti na gahetabbaṃ, usmākārasseva pana etaṃ vevacanaṃ. Tattha dvinnaṃ kaṭṭhānanti dvinnaṃ araṇīnaṃ. Tattha adhoaraṇī viya vatthu, uttarāraṇī viya ārammaṇaṃ, saṅghaṭṭanaṃ viya phasso, usmādhātu viya vedanā. Dutiyaṃ.
3. 子肉喻经注释显示巴利原文
3. Puttamaṃsūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 第三经中,‘诸比丘,有此四种食’等,其解释方式与之前所述相同。不过,由于此经是依据一个具体的事缘而宣说的,因此,在揭示了那个事缘之后,我将在此进行逐句的解释。那么,此经是依据什么事缘而说的呢?是依于利养与恭敬。据说,世尊当时生起了极大的利养与恭敬,这也是与那位在四个不可计数劫中圆满了布施巴拉密积聚的佛陀相称的。如同从四面八方涌起双重大云,汇成巨大的洪流一般,所有波罗蜜仿佛聚集在一起说:‘我们将在这一生中显现果报’,由此产生了利养与恭敬的巨大洪流。刹帝利、婆罗门等,手持饮食、车乘、衣物、花鬘、香、涂香等,从各处前来,四处寻找世尊:‘佛陀在哪里?世尊在哪里?人天导师、人中之雄、人中狮子在哪里?’他们甚至用几百辆车载着资具前来,因为得不到安置的空位,就在四周,车辕挨着车辕,在大约一牛吼的范围里站着等候,无法前进,就像盲者林婆罗门等那样。这一切都应按照《犍度》以及各部经典中所说的方式来理解。显示巴利原文
63. Tatiye cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādi vuttanayameva. Yasmā panassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo, tasmā taṃ dassetvāvettha anupubbapadavaṇṇanaṃ karissāmi. Katarāya pana idaṃ aṭṭhuppattiyā nikkhittanti? Lābhasakkārena. Bhagavato kira mahālābhasakkāro uppajji, yathā taṃ cattāro asaṅkhyeyye pūritadānapāramīsañcayassa. Sabbadisāsu hissa yamakamahāmegho vuṭṭhahitvā mahoghaṃ viya sabbapāramiyo ‘‘ekasmiṃ attabhāve vipākaṃ dassāmā’’ti sampiṇḍitā viya lābhasakkāramahoghaṃ nibbattayiṃsu. Tato tato annapānayānavatthamālāgandhavilepanādihatthā khattiyabrāhmaṇādayo āgantvā, ‘‘kahaṃ buddho, kahaṃ bhagavā, kahaṃ devadevo narāsabho purisasīho’’ti? Bhagavantaṃ pariyesanti. Sakaṭasatehipi paccaye āharitvā okāsaṃ alabhamānā samantā gāvutappamāṇampi sakaṭadhurena sakaṭadhuraṃ āhacca tiṭṭhanti ceva anuppavattanti ca andhakavindabrāhmaṇādayo viya. Sabbaṃ khandhake tesu tesu suttesu ca āgatanayena veditabbaṃ.
如同世尊一般,比丘僧团也是如此。经中对此有言:显示巴利原文
Yathā bhagavato, evaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassāpi. Vuttañcetaṃ –
“那时,世尊受到恭敬、尊重、推崇、供养、敬奉,成为衣、团食、坐卧具、病缘药资具的获得者。比丘僧团同样受到恭敬……乃至……成为资具的获得者。”(《优陀那》14;《相应部》2.70)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tena kho pana samayena bhagavā sakkato hoti garukato mānito pūjito apacito lābhī cīvara-piṇḍapāta-senāsana-gilāna-paccaya-bhesajja-parikkhārānaṃ. Bhikkhusaṅghopi kho sakkato hoti…pe… parikkhārāna’’nti (udā. 14; saṃ. ni. 2.70).
同样地:“纯陀,凡此世间现在所出现的僧团或团体,纯陀,我不见有任何其他一个僧团,能如同这位纯陀——比丘僧团一般,达到如此顶尖的利养与顶尖的名声。”(《长部》3.176)显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘yāvatā kho, cunda, etarahi saṅgho vā gaṇo vā loke uppanno, nāhaṃ, cunda, aññaṃ ekasaṅghampi samanupassāmi evaṃ lābhaggayasaggapattaṃ yatharivāyaṃ, cunda, bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 3.176).
如同两条大河的流水汇合,世尊与僧团所得的利养恭敬,也如此汇集一处,变得不可称量。那时,大师独处静默时,心中思惟:‘过去诸佛也曾有过这样的大利养与恭敬,未来诸佛也必将如此。那么,现今的比丘们,是否能以调制饮食的念与正知,平等而住,无有贪染地受用食物呢?’显示巴利原文
Svāyaṃ bhagavato ca saṅghassa ca uppanno lābhasakkāro ekato hutvā dvinnaṃ mahānadīnaṃ udakaṃ viya appameyyo ahosi. Atha satthā rahogato cintesi – ‘‘mahālābhasakkāro atītabuddhānampi evarūpo ahosi, anāgatānampi evarūpo bhavissati . Kiṃ nu kho bhikkhū āhārapariggāhakena satisampajaññena samannāgatā majjhattā nicchandarāgā hutvā āhāraṃ paribhuñjituṃ sakkonti, na sakkontī’’ti?
他看见一些新出家的善男子,未加省思便受用食物。见后,他心想:‘我历经四不可数劫又十万劫,圆满诸波罗蜜,并非为了衣等资具,而是为了最上的阿拉汉果。同样,这些比丘来我座下出家,也不是为了衣等资具,正是为了阿拉汉果。如今,他们却把非核心的当作了核心,把无意义的当作了有意义。’ 想到这里,他对法生起了悚惧感。继而念及:‘如果能制定的话,这未省思而进食,本该被制为第五波罗夷。然而,因这是众生恒常串习之事,故不能如此。不过,我将为他们设立一面法的明镜,一种防护、一种界限。未来比丘若能时常提起这面明镜、忆念这道界限,便能在省思之后受用四种资具。’ 正是由于这一因缘,他方才敷演了这部《子肉喻经》。经中‘诸比丘,有此四种食’等句的含义,正如前文所述。显示巴利原文
So addasa ekacce adhunā pabbajite kulaputte apaccavekkhitvā āhāraṃ paribhuñjamāne. Disvānassa etadahosi – ‘‘mayā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūrentena na cīvarādihetu pūritā, uttamaphalassa pana arahattassatthāya pūritā. Imepi bhikkhū mama santike pabbajantā na cīvarādihetu pabbajitā, arahattasseva pana atthāya pabbajitā. Te idāni asārameva sāraṃ anatthameva ca atthaṃ karontī’’ti evamassa dhammasaṃvego udapādi. Tato cintesi – ‘‘sace pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ paññapetuṃ sakkā abhavissa, apaccavekkhitāhāraparibhogo pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ katvā paññapetabbo bhaveyya. Na pana sakkā evaṃ kātuṃ, dhuvapaṭisevanaṭṭhānañhetaṃ sattānaṃ. Yathā pana kathite pañcamaṃ pārājikaṃ viya naṃ passissanti. Evaṃ dhammādāsaṃ saṃvaraṃ mariyādaṃ ṭhapessāmi, yaṃ āvajjitvā āvajjitvā anāgate bhikkhū cattāro paccaye paccavekkhitvā paribhuñjissantī’’ti. Imāya aṭṭhuppattiyā imaṃ puttamaṃsūpamasuttantaṃ nikkhipi. Tattha cattārome, bhikkhave, āhārātiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.
于详释四种食之后,如今为了显示其过患,故有此问:‘诸比丘,又应如何观察抟食呢?’ 其中,‘夫妇’:即妻子和丈夫。‘微少的行粮’:指盒饭、炒米团、甜食等之中,任意一种少量的路粮。‘旷野之道’:指成为旷野的道路,或旷野中的道路。‘旷野’有五种:贼旷野、猛兽旷野、非人旷野、无水旷野、无食旷野。其中,有盗贼怖畏之处,是贼旷野;有狮子、虎等猛兽之处,是猛兽旷野;因有大神力夜叉女等非人而有怖畏之处,是非人旷野;无可饮用或沐浴之水处,是无水旷野;没有可嚼食或啖食之物,乃至连少许块茎等都没有之处,名为无食旷野。而这五种怖畏都具足的地方,便纯粹是旷野。然而,有些旷野是一日、两日、三日等便可度过的,此处所指并非那种。此处所指的是无水、无食、路途长达百由旬的旷野。‘之道’:指在如此旷野中所行的道路。‘他们会踏上’:指那些被饥馑怖畏、疾病怖畏或王难怖畏所逼迫的人们,心想:‘度过这片旷野之后,我们将……’显示巴利原文
Cattāro pana āhāre vitthāretvā idāni tesu ādīnavaṃ dassetuṃ kathañca, bhikkhave, kabaḷīkāro āhāro daṭṭhabbotiādimāha? Tattha jāyampatikāti jāyā ceva pati ca. Parittaṃ sambalanti puṭabhattasattumodakādīnaṃ aññataraṃ appamattakaṃ pātheyyaṃ. Kantāramagganti kantārabhūtaṃ maggaṃ, kantāre vā maggaṃ. Kantāranti corakantāraṃ vāḷakantāraṃ amanussakantāraṃ nirudakakantāraṃ appabhakkhakantāranti pañcavidhaṃ. Tesu yattha corabhayaṃ atthi , taṃ corakantāraṃ. Yattha sīhabyagghādayo vāḷā atthi, taṃ vāḷakantāraṃ. Yattha balavāmukhayakkhiniādīnaṃ amanussānaṃ vasena bhayaṃ atthi, taṃ amanussakantāraṃ. Yattha pātuṃ vā nhāyituṃ vā udakaṃ natthi, taṃ nirudakakantāraṃ. Yattha khāditabbaṃ vā bhuñjitabbaṃ vā antamaso kandamūlādimattampi natthi, taṃ appabhakkhakantāraṃ nāma. Yattha panetaṃ pañcavidhampi bhayaṃ atthi, taṃ kantārameva. Taṃ panetaṃ ekāhadvīhatīhādivasena nittharitabbampi atthi, na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Idha pana nirudakaṃ appabhakkhaṃ yojanasatikakantāraṃ adhippetaṃ. Evarūpe kantāre maggaṃ. Paṭipajjeyyunti chātakabhayena ceva rogabhayena ca rājabhayena ca upaddutā paṭipajjeyyuṃ ‘‘etaṃ kantāraṃ nittharitvā dhammikassa rañño nirupaddave raṭṭhe sukhaṃ vasissāmā’’ti maññamānā.
‘独子’:指被人抱在怀中、悉心照料,值得悲悯、身体娇嫩的独生子。‘干肉片与烤肉串’:意指从肉厚之处割取制成的是干肉片;从贴骨近筋之处割取制成的是烤肉串。‘他们会折磨’:意为他们会加以捶打。‘我们的独子在哪里?’:这是他们悲泣的方式。显示巴利原文
Ekaputtakoti ukkhipitvā gahito anukampitabbayutto athirasarīro ekaputtako. Vallūrañca soṇḍikañcāti ghanaghanaṭṭhānato gahetvā vallūraṃ, aṭṭhinissitasirānissitaṭṭhānāni gahetvā sūlamaṃsañcāti attho. Paṭipiseyyunti pahareyyuṃ. Kahaṃ ekaputtakāti ayaṃ tesaṃ paridevanākāro.
以下是基于真实义理,从头所作的简要释义:据说,有一对夫妻带着孩子,带着少许路粮,踏上了那条长达百由旬的旷野之路。他们走了五十由旬后,路粮已尽,因饥渴所逼,坐于一处树荫稀疏之地。那时,丈夫对妻子说:‘贤妻,此处方圆五十由旬内,既无村庄,亦无市镇。因此,诸多男人应做之事,如耕田、放牛等,我已无法去做。来,你杀了我,食其半肉,将另一半制成路粮,带着孩子穿越旷野。’接着,妻子也对他说:‘夫君,诸多女人应做之事,如纺线、织布等,我亦无法去做。来,你杀了我,食其半肉,将另一半制成路粮,带着孩子穿越旷野。’接着,丈夫又对她说:‘贤妻,若女人死去,两人都将死去,因为那年幼无知的孩子离开母亲无法存活。若我们两人都活下来,日后尚可再得孩子。如此,不如现在就杀了这孩子,带着他的肉,渡过旷野。’于是,母亲对孩子说:‘孩子,到父亲那里去吧。’孩子便走了过去。那时,父亲心想:‘我为养育这个孩子,通过耕田、放牛等……’显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha bhūtamatthaṃ katvā ādito paṭṭhāya saṅkhepato atthavaṇṇanā – dve kira jāyampatikā puttaṃ gahetvā parittena pātheyyena yojanasatikaṃ kantāramaggaṃ paṭipajjiṃsu. Tesaṃ paññāsayojanāni gantvā pātheyyaṃ niṭṭhāsi, te khuppipāsāturā viraḷacchāyāyaṃ nisīdiṃsu. Tato puriso bhariyaṃ āha – ‘‘bhadde ito samantā paññāsayojanāni gāmo vā nigamo vā natthi. Tasmā yaṃ taṃ purisena kātabbaṃ bahumpi kasigorakkhādikammaṃ, na dāni sakkā taṃ mayā kātuṃ, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Puna sāpi taṃ āha – ‘‘sāmi mayā dāni yaṃ taṃ itthiyā kātabbaṃ bahumpi suttakantanādikammaṃ, taṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, ehi maṃ māretvā upaḍḍhamaṃsaṃ khāditvā upaḍḍhaṃ pātheyyaṃ katvā puttena saddhiṃ kantāraṃ nittharāhī’’ti. Puna sopi taṃ āha – ‘‘bhadde mātugāmamaraṇena dvinnaṃ maraṇaṃ paññāyati . Na hi mando kumāro mātarā vinā jīvituṃ sakkoti. Yadi pana mayaṃ jīvāma. Puna dārakaṃ labheyyāma. Handa dāni puttakaṃ māretvā, maṃsaṃ gahetvā kantāraṃ nittharāmā’’ti. Tato mātā puttamāha – ‘‘tāta, pitusantikaṃ gacchā’’ti, so agamāsi. Athassa pitā, ‘‘mayā ‘puttakaṃ posessāmī’ti kasigorakkhādīhi anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, na sakkomi ahaṃ puttaṃ māretuṃ, tvaṃyeva tava puttaṃ mārehī’’ti vatvā, ‘‘tāta mātusantikaṃ gacchā’’ti āha. So agamāsi. Athassa mātāpi, ‘‘mayā puttaṃ patthentiyā govatakukkuravatadevatāyācanādīhipi tāva anappakaṃ dukkhamanubhūtaṃ, ko pana vādo kucchinā pariharantiyā? Na sakkomi ahaṃ puttaṃ māretu’’nti vatvā ‘‘tāta, pitusantikameva gacchā’’ti āha. Evaṃ so dvinnamantarā gacchantoyeva mato. Te taṃ disvā paridevitvā vuttanayena maṃsāni gahetvā khādantā pakkamiṃsu.
对他们而言,以子肉为食,因九种缘故而成为厌恶之食,既非为嬉戏,非为骄逸,非为装饰,非为庄严,唯为渡过旷野。若问:‘因哪九种缘故而成为厌恶?’即:因是同种族之肉、因是亲属之肉、因是子之肉、因是爱子之肉、因是幼嫩之肉、因是生肉、因是未调味之肉、因是无盐之肉、因是未经火烤之肉。由此九种缘故,此子肉成为厌恶之物。他们食用之时,并非以染着、贪求之心而食,而是安住于中舍,以无欲贪的受用而食。他们并非剔除附着于骨、筋、皮的部分,只拣取肥美之肉而食,而是手触何肉便食何肉。并非食至饱足、满至喉咙,而是每日仅食少许,只求存活。并非彼此悭吝而食,而是以离悭吝垢秽、全然清净之心而食。并非迷乱而食,心中想着‘我们正在吃他种之肉,如鹿肉、孔雀肉等’,而是清晰了知此为爱子之肉而食。并非怀着‘啊,但愿能再得此子肉!’的欲求而食,而是超越那种欲求而食。并……显示巴利原文
Tesaṃ so puttamaṃsāhāro navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūlattā neva davāya hoti, na madāya, na maṇḍanāya, na vibhūsanāya, kevalaṃ kantāranittharaṇatthāyeva hoti. Katamehi navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūloti ce? Sajātimaṃsatāya ñātimaṃsatāya puttamaṃsatāya piyaputtamaṃsatāya taruṇamaṃsatāya āmakamaṃsatāya abhogamaṃsatāya aloṇatāya adhūpitatāyāti. Evañhi te navahi kāraṇehi paṭikūlaṃ taṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādantā na sārattā giddhamānasā hutvā khādiṃsu, majjhattabhāveyeva pana nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitā khādiṃsu. Na aṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṭṭhānāni apanetvā thūlathūlaṃ varamaṃsameva khādiṃsu, hatthasampattaṃ maṃsameva pana khādiṃsu. Na yāvadatthaṃ kaṇṭhappamāṇaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, thokaṃ thokaṃ pana ekadivasaṃ yāpanamattameva khādiṃsu. Na aññamaññaṃ maccharāyantā khādiṃsu, vigatamaccheramalena pana parisuddheneva cetasā khādiṃsu. Na aññaṃ kiñci migamaṃsaṃ vā moramaṃsādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ khādāmāti sammūḷhā khādiṃsu, piyaputtamaṃsabhāvaṃ pana jānantāva khādiṃsu. Na ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ punapi evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādeyyāmā’’ti patthanaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, patthanaṃ pana vītivattāva hutvā khādiṃsu. Na ‘‘ettakaṃ kantāre khāditvā avasiṭṭhaṃ kantāraṃ atikkamma loṇambilādīhi yojetvā khādissāmā’’ti sannidhiṃ akaṃsu, kantārapariyosāne pana ‘‘pure mahājano passatī’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsu. Na ‘‘koci añño amhe viya evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādituṃ na labhatī’’ti mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akaṃsu, nihatamānā pana nihatadappā hutvā khādiṃsu. ‘‘Kiṃ iminā aloṇena anambilena adhūpitena duggandhenā’’ti na hīḷetvā khādiṃsu, hīḷanaṃ pana vītivattā hutvā khādiṃsu . Na ‘‘tuyhaṃ bhāgo mayhaṃ bhāgo tava putto mama putto’’ti aññamaññaṃ atimaññiṃsu. Samaggā pana sammodamānā hutvā khādiṃsu. Imaṃ nesaṃ evarūpaṃ nicchandarāgādiparibhogaṃ sampassamāno satthā bhikkhusaṅghampi taṃ kāraṇaṃ anujānāpento taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, api nu te davāya vā āhāraṃ āhāreyyuntiādimāha. Tattha davāya vātiādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.18) vitthāritāneva. Kantārassāti nittiṇṇāvasesassa kantārassa.
应当这样理解:依据九种厌恶性,而将食物视同爱子之肉。是哪九种呢?即前往的厌恶性等。无论是观察前往的厌恶性、遍求的厌恶性,还是观察受用、贮藏、住处、未熟、已熟、手污、流泄的厌恶性而受用抟食,这些厌恶性在《清净道论》解说食厌恶性的篇章中已有详明。如此,应依这九种厌恶性,将食物视为爱子之肉而受用。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti navannaṃ pāṭikulyānaṃ vasena piyaputtamaṃsasadiso katvā daṭṭhabboti attho. Katamesaṃ navannaṃ? Gamanapāṭikulyatādīnaṃ. Gamanapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi kabaḷīkārāhāraṃ pariggaṇhāti, pariyesanapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi, paribhoganidhānaāsayaparipakkāparipakkasammakkhaṇanissandapāṭikulyataṃ paccavekkhantopi, tāni panetāni gamanapāṭikulyatādīni visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.294) āhārapāṭikulyatāniddese vitthāritāneva. Iti imesaṃ navannaṃ pāṭikulyānaṃ vasena puttamaṃsūpamaṃ katvā āhāro paribhuñjitabbo.
如同那对夫妇吃那令人厌恶的爱子之肉时,并非带着染著、贪求的心去吃,而是安住于中舍的状态,以无欲贪的受用来吃;同样地,比丘也应当以无欲贪的受用而受用食物。又如他们并不剔除附着在骨头、筋腱、皮上的肉,专挑粗壮肥美的肉来吃,而是手碰到什么就吃什么;同样,比丘不应像用手背推开干硬饭食、酸败菜肴那般挑食,不应像鹌鹑或鸡那样划定啄食的范围,也不应像一个人从各处挑拣混杂着酥油、肉等殊胜食物来吃,而应如狮子一般,按次第受用。显示巴利原文
Yathā te jāyampatikā pāṭikulyaṃ piyaputtamaṃsaṃ khādantā na sārattā giddhamānasā hutvā khādiṃsu, majjhattabhāveyeva nicchandarāgaparibhoge ṭhitā khādiṃsu, evaṃ nicchandarāgaparibhogaṃ katvā paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na aṭṭhinhārucammanissitaṃ apanetvā thūlathūlaṃ varamaṃsameva khādiṃsu, hatthasampattameva pana khādiṃsu, evaṃ sukkhabhattamandabyañjanādīni piṭṭhihatthena apaṭikkhipitvā vaṭṭakena viya kukkuṭena viya ca odhiṃ adassetvā tato tato sappimaṃsādisaṃsaṭṭhavarabhojanaṃyeva vicinitvā abhuñjantena sīhena viya sapadānaṃ paribhuñjitabbo.
又如他们并没有吃到足够饱、满至喉咙的程度,而是每天只吃少许,仅仅足以维持生存;同样,比丘不应像‘食至手’等婆罗门中的某些人那样,吃到饱胀满腹的程度,而应留下四五口食的余地,如同法将(舍利弗尊者)那样受用。据说,他四十五年间安住于修行后,曾作狮子吼:‘我在进食后,为了平息可能生起的酸胃液等,哪怕一天也不再进食。’并诵出此偈:显示巴利原文
Yathā ca te na yāvadatthaṃ kaṇṭhappamāṇaṃ khādiṃsu, thokaṃ thokaṃ pana ekekadivasaṃ yāpanamattameva khādiṃsu, evameva āharahatthakādibrāhmaṇānaṃ aññatarena viya yāvadatthaṃ udarāvadehakaṃ abhuñjantena catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā ālopānaṃ okāsaṃ ṭhapetvāva dhammasenāpatinā viya paribhuñjitabbo. So kira pañcacattālīsa vassāni tiṭṭhamāno ‘‘pacchābhatte ambiluggārasamuṭṭhāpakaṃ katvā ekadivasampi āhāraṃ na āhāresi’’nti vatvā sīhanādaṃ nadanto imaṃ gāthamāha –
‘‘Cattāro pañca ālope, abhutvā udakaṃ pive; Alaṃ phāsuvihārāya, pahitattassa bhikkhuno’’ti. (theragā. 983);
正如他们并非彼此悭吝而食,而是以远离了悭吝垢秽、全然清净的心而食;同样,比丘获得团食后,不应悭吝,应安住于和敬法而受用:‘若有人要全部,便全部施与;若有人要一半,便给一半;若有剩余,则自己受用。’又如,他们并非迷乱地想‘我们在吃别的什么鹿肉或孔雀肉等’而食,而是清楚地知道那是爱子之肉而食;同样,比丘获得团食后,不应生起‘我在嚼食,我在进食’这种执著自我的迷乱,而应断除迷乱,这样观察:‘抟食并不知道“我在增益四大所造之身”,身体也不知道“抟食在增益我”。’如此而受用。并且,应当以正念正知、无迷乱而受用。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca te na aññamaññaṃ maccharāyantā khādiṃsu, vigatamalamaccherena pana parisuddheneva cetasā khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā amaccharāyitvā ‘‘imaṃ sabbaṃ gaṇhantassa sabbaṃ dassāmi, upaḍḍhaṃ gaṇhantassa upaḍḍhaṃ, sace gahitāvaseso bhavissati, attanā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti sāraṇīyadhamme ṭhiteneva paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘aññaṃ kiñci mayaṃ migamaṃsaṃ vā moramaṃsādīnaṃ vā aññataraṃ khādāmā’’ti sammūḷhā khādiṃsu, piyaputtamaṃsabhāvaṃ pana jānantāva khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ahaṃ khādāmi bhuñjāmī’’ti attūpaladdhisammohaṃ anuppādetvā ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro na jānāti ‘cātumahābhūtikakāyaṃ vaḍḍhemī’ti, kāyopi na jānāti ‘kabaḷīkārāhāro maṃ vaḍḍhetī’’’ti, evaṃ sammohaṃ pahāya paribhuñjitabbo. Satisampajaññavasenāpi cesa asammūḷheneva hutvā paribhuñjitabbo.
正如他们并非怀着“啊,但愿我们还能再吃到这样的爱子肉!”的渴求而食,而是超越了渴求而食;同样地,比丘得到殊胜食物时,不应生起“啊,但愿我明日、后日也能得到这样的!”的意欲;得到粗劣食物时,也不应生起“今日不如昨日那样得到殊胜食物”的渴求或追悔。应当无所贪求地——显示巴利原文
Yathā ca te na ‘‘aho vata mayaṃ punapi evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādeyyāmā’’ti patthanaṃ katvā khādiṃsu, patthanaṃ pana vītivattāva hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva paṇītabhojanaṃ laddhā ‘aho vatāhaṃ svepi punadivasepi evarūpaṃ labheyyaṃ’, lūkhaṃ vā pana laddhā ‘‘hiyyo viya me ajja paṇītabhojanaṃ na laddha’’nti patthanaṃ vā anusocanaṃ vā akatvā nittaṇhena –
过去之事我不追悔,未来之事我不希求;
依现在所得而维生,由此容色变得明净。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atītaṃ nānusocāmi, nappajappāmināgataṃ; Paccuppannena yāpemi, tena vaṇṇo pasīdatī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.90) –
忆念此教诫者,应怀着“我唯以现前所得维生”之心而受用。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena ‘‘paccuppanneneva yāpessāmī’’ti paribhuñjitabbo.
正如他们并没有生起这样的念头:“在旷野中把这些吃了,剩下的等走出旷野后,配上咸酸等调料再食用”而加以储藏;反而在旷野的尽头,因想到“前面大众会看见”,便将其埋入地下,或以火焚烧。同样地——显示巴利原文
Yathā ca te na ‘‘ettakaṃ kantāre khāditvā avasiṭṭhaṃ kantāraṃ atikkamma loṇambilādīhi yojetvā khādissāmā’’ti sannidhiṃ akaṃsu, kantārapariyosāne pana ‘‘pure mahājano passatī’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā nikhaṇiṃsu, agginā vā jhāpayiṃsu, evameva –
对于食物与饮品,
嚼食及衣服,
得到之后不应储积,
得不到这些东西时,不应忧惧。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Annānamatho pānānaṃ, Khādanīyānaṃ athopi vatthānaṃ; Laddhā na sannidhiṃ kayirā, Na ca parittase tāni alabhamāno’’ti. (su. ni. 930); –
忆念此教诫者,对于四种资具,不论得到什么,只应取足维生的份量,将剩余的分与同梵行者,避免贮存,如此受用。正如他们没有生起‘没有人能像我们一样吃到这样的儿子肉’的慢与骄,而是降伏慢与骄而食;同样,比丘得到殊胜的食物时,不应生起‘我是袈裟、饮食等利养的获得者’这样的慢与骄。应当省察‘出家不是为了袈裟等,而是为了证得阿罗汉果’,降伏慢与骄后而受用。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena catūsu paccayesu yaṃ yaṃ labhati, tato tato attano yāpanamattaṃ gahetvā, sesaṃ sabrahmacārīnaṃ vissajjetvā sannidhiṃ parivajjantena paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘koci añño amhe viya evarūpaṃ puttamaṃsaṃ khādituṃ na labhatī’’ti mānaṃ vā dappaṃ vā akaṃsu, nihatamānā pana nihatadappā hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva paṇītabhojanaṃ labhitvā ‘‘ahamasmi lābhī cīvarapiṇḍapātādīna’’nti na māno vā dappo vā kātabbo. ‘‘Nāyaṃ pabbajjā cīvarādihetu, arahattahetu panāyaṃ pabbajjā’’ti paccavekkhitvā nihatamānadappeneva paribhuñjitabbo.
正如他们没有鄙视地说:‘这个没加盐、没有酸味、未经熏制,气味难闻’而不吃,反而超越了鄙视而食;同样,比丘得到团食后,不应鄙视团食说:‘这像马料、牛食一般粗劣无味,丢到狗盆里去吧!’也不应鄙视施主说:‘谁会吃这个?拿去给乌鸦和狗吃吧!’——显示巴利原文
Yathā ca te ‘‘kiṃ iminā aloṇena anambilena adhūpitena duggandhenā’’ti hīḷetvā na khādiṃsu, hīḷanaṃ pana vītivattā hutvā khādiṃsu, evameva piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā ‘‘kiṃ iminā assagoṇabhattasadisena lūkhena nirasena, suvānadoṇiyaṃ taṃ pakkhipathā’’ti evaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ vā ‘‘ko imaṃ bhuñjissati, kākasunakhādīnaṃ dehī’’ti evaṃ dāyakaṃ vā ahīḷentena –
他托钵游行,虽非哑巴,却被当成哑巴;
不应轻视微少的布施,不应轻视施主。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sa pattapāṇi vicaranto, amūgo mūgasammato; Appaṃ dānaṃ na hīḷeyya, dātāraṃ nāvajāniyā’’ti. (su. ni. 718); –
忆念这一教诫者应当如此受用。正如他们没有用“这是你的份、这是我的份”“你的儿子、我的儿子”这样的话互相轻视,而是和合无诤、满怀欢喜地一起进食;同样,得到团食之后,如果有人这样想:“谁会给你们这些无端在门槛间踉跄晃荡、四处游走的人食物呢?就算是个刚生产完的母亲,也不会认为应当布施给你们吧;而我们无论走到哪里,都能得到上等的衣服等资具。”这是用来指称那些轻视持戒同梵行者的人。关于此事,有这样的说法:显示巴利原文
Imaṃ ovādaṃ anussarantena paribhuñjitabbo. Yathā ca te na ‘‘tuyhaṃ bhāgo, mayhaṃ bhāgo, tava putto mama putto’’ti aññamaññaṃ atimaññiṃsu, samaggā pana, sammodamānā hutvā khādiṃsu, evamevaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhitvā yathā ekacco ‘‘ko tumhādisānaṃ dassati nikkāraṇā ummāresu pakkhalantānaṃ āhiṇḍantānaṃ vijātamātāpi vo dātabbaṃ na maññati, mayaṃ pana gatagataṭṭhāne paṇītāni cīvarādīni labhāmā’’ti sīlavante sabrahmacārī atimaññati, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
他被那些利养、恭敬与名声所征服,心被彻底制伏,便轻视其他精进持戒的比丘。比丘们,这种情形对于那个愚痴人,带来的是长夜的无益与痛苦。显示巴利原文
‘‘So tena lābhasakkārasilokena abhibhūto pariyādiṇṇacitto aññe pesale bhikkhū atimaññati. Tañhi tassa, bhikkhave, moghapurisassa hoti dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.161).
如此,不轻视任何人,应与一切同梵行者和合无诤、欢喜融洽,一同受用。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ kañci anatimaññitvā sabbehi sabrahmacārīhi saddhiṃ samaggena sammodamānena hutvā paribhuñjitabbaṃ.
「遍知」:指以知遍知、度遍知、断遍知这三种遍知而遍知。如何遍知?于此,比丘了知:「所谓段食,依其有依处而言,是由食素第八法所成之色;食素第八法所成之色撞击于何处?于舌净色;舌净色依止于何?依止于四大种。如是,食素第八法、舌净色及其缘——四大种,这些法名为色蕴;执取彼时生起的触等五法,是其余四非色蕴。如是,这一切五蕴,简言之,唯是名色。」他依这些法的自相与共相确定之后,为寻求其缘,顺逆观察缘起。至此,由于他以段食为门,如实见到了有缘的名色,因此段食以知遍知而被遍知。他便于那有缘的名色,安立无常、苦、无我三相,依七种随观而作正思惟。至此,那段食以名为「通达三相之正思惟智」的度遍知而被遍知。当以离欲贪的不还道遍知那名色时,便以断遍知而遍知。显示巴利原文
Pariññāteti ñātapariññā tīraṇapariññā pahānapariññāti imāhi tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Kathaṃ? Idha bhikkhu ‘‘kabaḷīkārāhāro nāma ayaṃ savatthukavasena ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ hoti, ojaṭṭhamakarūpaṃ kattha paṭihaññati? Jivhāpasāde, jivhāpasādo kinnissito? Catumahābhūtanissito. Iti ojaṭṭhamakaṃ jivhāpasādo tassa paccayāni mahābhūtānīti ime dhammā rūpakkhandho nāma, taṃ pariggaṇhato uppannā phassapañcamakā dhammā cattāro arūpakkhandhā. Iti sabbepime pañcakkhandhā saṅkhepato nāmarūpamattaṃ hotī’’ti pajānāti. So te dhamme sarasalakkhaṇato vavatthapetvā tesaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesanto anulomapaṭilomaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ passati. Ettāvatānena kabaḷīkārāhāramukhena sappaccayassa nāmarūpassa yāthāvato diṭṭhattā kabaḷīkārāhāro ñātapariññāya pariññāto hoti. So tadeva sappaccayaṃ nāmarūpaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti tīṇi lakkhaṇāni āropetvā sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena sammasati. Ettāvatānena so tilakkhaṇapaṭivedhasammasanañāṇasaṅkhātāya tīraṇapariññāya pariññāto hoti. Tasmiṃyeva nāmarūpe chandarāgāvakaḍḍhanena anāgāmimaggena parijānatā pahānapariññāya pariññāto hotīti.
「五欲所生贪」:指由五种欲功德所生的贪被遍知。于此,又有三种遍知:一遍知、一切遍知、根遍知。何谓一遍知?若比丘于舌门遍知一味爱,则五欲所生贪即已被遍知。何以故?因为那贪即于此处生起。即是,那渴爱于眼门生起时,名为色贪;于耳门等生起时,名为声贪等。譬如一盗贼行于五条道路,若于一条路上将其捉住、砍断其首,则五路皆得安宁;同样,于舌门的味爱被遍知时,五欲所生贪即被遍知,这名为一遍知。显示巴利原文
Pañcakāmaguṇikoti pañcakāmaguṇasambhavo rāgo pariññāto hoti. Ettha pana tisso pariññā ekapariññā sabbapariññā mūlapariññāti. Katamā ekapariññā? Yo bhikkhu jivhādvāre ekarasataṇhaṃ parijānāti, tena pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotīti. Kasmā? Tassāyeva tattha uppajjanato. Sāyeva hi taṇhā cakkhudvāre uppannā rūparāgo nāma hoti, sotadvārādīsu uppannā saddarāgādayo. Iti yathā ekasseva corassa pañcamagge hanato ekasmiṃ magge gahetvā sīse chinne pañcapi maggā khemā honti, evaṃ jivhādvāre rasataṇhāya pariññātāya pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññāto hotīti ayaṃ ekapariññā nāma.
何谓一切遍知?放入钵中的团食,仅一团食中,便含五欲所生的贪。如何?观察它清净的色泽,即有色贪;热酥油倾入时发出“啪嗒啪嗒”之声,或咀嚼硬食时发出“咯吱咯吱”之声,乐著其声,即有声贪。乐著茴香等香味,即有香贪;甘美之味,即有味贪;乐著“柔软之食的触感”,即有触贪。以此正念正知摄持,离欲贪而受用此食时,彼一切贪即被遍知,这便名为一切遍知。显示巴利原文
Katamā sabbapariññā? Patte pakkhittapiṇḍapātasmiñhi ekasmiṃyeva pañcakāmaguṇikarāgo labbhati. Kathaṃ? Parisuddhaṃ tāvassa vaṇṇaṃ olokayato rūparāgo hoti, uṇhe sappimhi tattha āsiñcante paṭapaṭāti saddo uṭṭhahati, tathārūpaṃ khādanīyaṃ vā khādantassa murumurūti saddo uppajjati, taṃ assādayato saddarāgo. Jīrakādivasagandhaṃ assādentassa gandharāgo, sādurasavasena rasarāgo. Mudubhojanaṃ phassavantanti assādayato phoṭṭhabbarāgo. Iti imasmiṃ āhāre satisampajaññena pariggahetvā nicchandarāgaparibhogena paribhutte sabbopi so pariññāto hotīti ayaṃ sabbapariññā nāma.
何谓根遍知?段食是五欲所生贪的根。何以故?因为有那段食时,贪便从中生起。据说,在婆罗门提瑟的怖畏时期,长达十二年,夫妇之间也毫无亲昵思念之心。何以故?因为食物匮乏。怖畏平息后,方圆百由旬的铜掌岛,因诸多孩子的诞生庆典而成为一片喜庆。如是,当根本食物被遍知时,五欲所生贪即已被遍知,这便名为根遍知。显示巴利原文
Katamā mūlapariññā? Pañcakāmaguṇikarāgassa hi kabaḷīkārāhāro mūlaṃ. Kasmā? Tasmiṃ sati tassuppattito . Brāhmaṇatissabhaye kira dvādasa vassāni jāyampatikānaṃ upanijjhānacittaṃ nāma nāhosi. Kasmā? Āhāramandatāya. Bhaye pana vūpasante yojanasatiko tambapaṇṇidīpo dārakānaṃ jātamaṅgalehi ekamaṅgalo ahosi. Iti mūlabhūte āhāre pariññāte pañcakāmaguṇiko rāgo pariññātova hotīti ayaṃ mūlapariññā nāma.
“无彼结缚”:因与彼贪一同断除,已断故无。如此,这一开示乃至于不还道而说。然不应仅以此为止,应依这些色法,于五蕴中修习观至增长,乃至阿罗汉道而说,方为恰当。第一食结束。显示巴利原文
Natthi taṃ saṃyojananti tena rāgena saddhiṃ pahānekaṭṭhatāya pahīnattā natthi. Evamayaṃ desanā yāva anāgāmimaggā kathitā. ‘‘Ettakena pana mā vosānaṃ āpajjiṃsū’’ti etesaṃyeva rūpādīnaṃ vasena pañcasu khandhesu vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā yāva arahattā kathetuṃ vaṭṭatīti. Paṭhamāhāro (niṭṭhito).
第二(触食)中,“无皮”:指从蹄至角根,全身皮肤被剥除,色泽有如紧叔迦花堆。为何不取象、马、牛等譬喻,而独取无皮母牛为喻?为表明其无力承受。因为女人对于所生的苦受,不能忍受、不能安忍;同样,为显示触食的无力与羸弱,故取与此相似的譬喻。“墙”指石墙等。“依墙而居的有情”指蜘蛛、蝙蝠、地鼠等。“依树而居者”指蜥蜴等小动物。“依水而居者”指鱼、鳄鱼等。“依空而居者”指牛虻、蚊子、乌鸦、鹰等。“会啃食”即撕扯而食。那头无皮母牛无论走到哪里,见到依止彼处而居的有情被啃食的怖畏,便不希求对自身的恭敬、尊崇,也不希求背部按摩、身体推拿、热水等;同样,比丘见到以触食为根的烦恼有情被啃食的怖畏,便对三界中的触食无所希求。显示巴利原文
Dutiye niccammāti khurato paṭṭhāya yāva siṅgamūlā sakalasarīrato uddālitacammā kiṃsukarāsivaṇṇā. Kasmā pana aññaṃ hatthiassagoṇādiupamaṃ agahetvā niccammagāvūpamā gahitāti? Titikkhituṃ asamatthabhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Mātugāmo hi uppannaṃ dukkhavedanaṃ titikkhituṃ adhivāsetuṃ na sakkoti, evameva phassāhāro abalo dubbaloti dassanatthaṃ sadisameva upamaṃ āhari. Kuṭṭanti silākuṭṭādīnaṃ aññataraṃ. Kuṭṭanissitā pāṇā nāma uṇṇanābhisarabūmūsikādayo. Rukkhanissitāti uccāliṅgapāṇakādayo. Udakanissitāti macchasuṃsumārādayo. Ākāsanissitāti ḍaṃsamakasakākakulalādayo. Khādeyyunti luñcitvā khādeyyuṃ. Sā tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ṭhāne taṃ taṃṭhānasannissayamūlikaṃ pāṇakhādanabhayaṃ sampassamānā neva attano sakkārasammānaṃ, na piṭṭhiparikammasarīrasambāhanauṇhodakāni icchati, evameva bhikkhu phassāhāramūlakaṃ kilesapāṇakakhādanabhayaṃ sampassamāno tebhūmakaphassena anatthiko hoti.
“比丘们,‘于触食已遍知’,即以三种遍知而遍知。”这里也有三种遍知。其中,如此如实观见有缘的名色:“触是行蕴,与彼相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,心是识蕴,这些的依处与所缘是色蕴”——这是知遍知。就这同一个名色,安立三相之后,依七种随观,从无常等角度进行推度——这是度遍知。针对这同一个名色,遣除欲贪的阿拉汉道——这是断遍知。“三受”:当触食以三种遍知被遍知时,由于三受依触为根、与触相应,因此三受也同时被遍知了。如此,依触食,教法被阐述至阿拉汉果。第二食(触食)。显示巴利原文
Phasse, bhikkhave, āhāre pariññāteti tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Idhāpi tisso pariññā. Tattha ‘‘phasso saṅkhārakkhandho , taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, tesaṃ vatthārammaṇāni rūpakkhandho’’ti evaṃ sappaccayassa nāmarūpassa yāthāvato dassanaṃ ñātapariññā. Tattheva tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ vasena aniccādito tulanaṃ tīraṇapariññā. Tasmiṃyeva pana nāmarūpe chandarāganikkaḍḍhano arahattamaggo pahānapariññā. Tisso vedanāti evaṃ phassāhāre tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte tisso vedanā pariññātāva honti tammūlakattā taṃsampayuttattā ca. Iti phassāhāravasena desanā yāva arahattā kathitā. Dutiyāhāro.
第三,“炭坑”:即炭火的坑。“坑”一词,既指堆,亦指洞穴。显示巴利原文
Tatiye aṅgārakāsūti aṅgārānaṃ kāsu. Kāsūti rāsipi vuccati āvāṭopi.
“Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phuṇanti,”——“其他人填满炭坑,”
“Narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā;”——“男子们哭泣着,肢体被烧焦;”
“Bhayañhi maṃ vindati sūta disvā,”——“车夫啊,看到之后,恐惧确实降临于我,”
“Pucchāmi taṃ mātali devasārathī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.462);”——“我问你,摩多利,天车御者。”(《本生经》2.22.462)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phuṇanti, Narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā; Bhayañhi maṃ vindati sūta disvā, Pucchāmi taṃ mātali devasārathī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.462); –
在这里,“堆”(rāsi)被称为“坑”(kāsū)。显示巴利原文
Ettha rāsi ‘‘kāsū’’ti vutto.
“车夫(sārathī)!你为何如此急切地挖坑(kāsuṃ)呢?”(《本生经》2.22.3)显示巴利原文
‘‘Kinnu santaramānova, kāsuṃ khanasi sārathī’’ti? (Jā. 2.22.3). –
此处作“穴洞”。这里所指的正是这个意思。“超出人长”是指超过一般人高,大约为五肘尺量。以“无焰无烟”这样的描述,正显示了它的巨大灼热。因为有火焰或烟时,便会有风生起,热恼就不至于极为巨大;在它们完全消失时,因为没有风,热恼便极为巨大。“应远离”是说应当远避它才是。显示巴利原文
Ettha āvāṭo. Idhāpi ayameva adhippeto. Sādhikaporisāti atirekaporisā pañcaratanappamāṇā. Vītaccikānaṃ vītadhūmānanti etenassa mahāpariḷāhataṃ dasseti. Jālāya vā hi dhūme vā sati vāto samuṭṭhāti, pariḷāho mahā na hoti, tadabhāve vātābhāvato pariḷāho mahā hoti. Ārakāvassāti dūreyeva bhaveyya.
“正是如此”等语:在此处,这是譬喻的连结——即,应将那炭坑视作如同三界的轮回。那位想活命的人,如同执着于轮回的愚痴凡夫。那两个大力士,如同善与不善业。他们抓住那人的各条手臂、将他拖向炭坑的时刻,就如同凡夫在造作诸业的时刻。因为正在造业之时,即被称说为在牵引着结生。以炭坑为缘的苦,应被了知为如同以业为缘的轮回之苦。显示巴利原文
Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – aṅgārakāsu viya hi tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jīvitukāmo puriso viya vaṭṭanissito bālaputhujjano. Dve balavanto purisā viya kusalākusalakammaṃ. Tesaṃ taṃ purisaṃ nānābāhāsu gahetvā aṅgārakāsuṃ upakaḍḍhanakālo viya puthujjanassa kammāyūhanakālo. Kammañhi āyūhiyamānameva paṭisandhiṃ ākaḍḍhati nāma. Aṅgārakāsunidānaṃ dukkhaṃ viya kammanidānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“被遍知”指被三种遍知所遍知。然而,这里的遍知联结,应按照在“触”那里所说的方式去理解。“三渴爱”即欲爱、有爱、非有爱,这些都被遍知了。为什么呢?因为意思是以渴爱为根的。在因还未被断除时,果是不会断除的。如此,借助意思食的要义,开示被一直说到直至阿拉汉果为止。这是第三食。显示巴利原文
Pariññāteti tīhi pariññāhi pariññāte. Pariññāyojanā panettha phasse vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Tisso taṇhāti kāmataṇhā bhavataṇhā vibhavataṇhāti imā pariññātā honti. Kasmā? Taṇhāmūlakattā manosañcetanāya. Na hi hetumhi appahīne phalaṃ pahīyati. Iti manosañcetanāhāravasenapi yāva arahattā desanā kathitā. Tatiyāhāro.
在第四项中,「有罪行的人」指造作恶行、犯过失的人。「那个人怎么样了?」:即是问那个人是什么状况,他是否还能谋生?「大王,他如常活着」:如同从前那样,现在也那样活着。显示巴利原文
Catutthe āgucārinti pāpacāriṃ dosakārakaṃ. Kathaṃ so purisoti so puriso kathaṃbhūto, kiṃ yāpeti, na yāpetīti pucchati? Tatheva deva jīvatīti yathā pubbe, idānipi tatheva jīvati.
「正是如此」等:此处的譬喻连接如下——应把业视为如国王,把依着于轮回的愚痴凡夫视为如那有罪行的人,把三百支矛视为如结生识,把国王下令「用三百支矛刺他」的那个时刻,视为如业之王抓住那依着于轮回的凡夫,将其投入结生之时。对此,虽然结生识就像那三百支矛,但那些矛本身并无痛苦,苦是从被矛击中后所生的伤口而来;同样地,结生本身也没有痛苦。然而,得到结生之后,在生命流转过程中所要领受的异熟苦,便如同被矛击中之后,以伤口为因缘而生起的那份苦。显示巴利原文
Evamevakhoti idhāpi idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rājā viya hi kammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, āgucārī puriso viya vaṭṭasannissito bālaputhujjano, tīṇi sattisatāni viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ, āgucāriṃ purisaṃ ‘‘tīhi sattisatehi hanathā’’ti raññā āṇattakālo viya kammaraññā vaṭṭasannissitaputhujjanaṃ gahetvā paṭisandhiyaṃ pakkhipanakālo. Tattha kiñcāpi tīṇi sattisatāni viya paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ, sattīsu pana dukkhaṃ natthi, sattīhi pahaṭavaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, evameva paṭisandhiyampi dukkhaṃ natthi, dinnāya pana paṭisandhiyā pavatte vipākadukkhaṃ sattipahaṭavaṇamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ viya hoti.
「被遍知」:即以三种遍知而遍知。此处遍知的应用,也应按照在「触食」处已说的方法来理解。「名色」:即依识为缘而生起的名色。因为当识被遍知时,由于名色以识为根本,且两者同时生起,故彼名色即随之被遍知。如是,也借由识食之义,将教说一直解至阿拉汉果为止。第四食。第三终。显示巴利原文
Pariññāteti tīheva pariññāhi pariññāte. Idhāpi pariññāyojanā phassāhāre vuttanayeneva veditabbā. Nāmarūpanti viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ. Viññāṇasmiñhi pariññāte taṃ pariññātameva hoti tammūlakattā sahuppannattā ca. Iti viññāṇāhāravasenapi yāva arahattā desanā kathitāti. Catutthāhāro. Tatiyaṃ.
4.《有贪经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Atthirāgasuttavaṇṇanā
64 在第四篇经文中,“贪”等词语都是贪爱本身的名称。贪爱因具有染着性,故称为“贪”;因具有欢喜性,故称为“喜”;因具有渴求性,故称为“渴爱”。“在那里,识安住并生长”的意思是:业令速行心生起之后,因其具备牵引结生的能力,故既安住又生长。“在……中”是位格,指在三地轮转中的处所,或指前面每一句所提及的一切处。“在那里,有诸行的增长”:这是针对安住于此异熟轮转中的人,指那些能成为未来轮转之因的诸行而说的。“在那里,有未来再有的转起”:意思是于未来某处,将有未来再有的转起。显示巴利原文
64. Catutthe rāgotiādīni lobhasseva nāmāni. So hi rañjanavasena rāgo, nandanavasena nandī, taṇhāyanavasena taṇhāti vuccati. Patiṭṭhitaṃ tattha viññāṇaṃ virūḷhanti kammaṃ javāpetvā paṭisandhiākaḍḍhanasamatthatāya patiṭṭhitañceva virūḷhañca. Yatthāti tebhūmakavaṭṭe bhummaṃ, sabbattha vā purimapurimapade etaṃ bhummaṃ. Atthi tattha saṅkhārānaṃ vuddhīti idaṃ imasmiṃ vipākavaṭṭe ṭhitassa āyativaṭṭahetuke saṅkhāre sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yattha atthi āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattīti yasmiṃ ṭhāne āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti atthi.
“正是这样”:这里是譬喻的对应——带有资粮的业,如同染工与画师;三地轮转,如同木板、墙壁与布匹。正如染工或画师在清净的木板等上绘制出图像,带有资粮的业同样在诸有中产生出物质形态。此处,如同由不善巧的画师所绘出的图像丑陋、难看、令人不悦,若有人以与智不相应的心来造业,那个业在产生物质形态时,不会赋予眼等诸根的圆满,而产生出丑陋、难看、连父母也心生不悦的物质形态。反之,如同由善巧的画师所绘出的图像美妙、好看、令人悦意,若有人以与智相应的心来造业,那个业在产生物质形态时,便赋予眼等诸根的圆满,而产生出如纯金般美妙、好看、如同经过精心装饰的物质形态。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – rajakacittakārā viya hi sahakammasambhāraṃ kammaṃ, phalakabhittidussapaṭā viya tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ. Yathā rajakacittakārā parisuddhesu phalakādīsu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpenti, evameva sasambhārakakammaṃ bhavesu rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha yathā akusalena cittakārena samuṭṭhāpitaṃ rūpaṃ virūpaṃ hoti dussaṇṭhitaṃ amanāpaṃ, evameva ekacco kammaṃ karonto ñāṇavippayuttena cittena karoti, taṃ kammaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpentaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ sampattiṃ adatvā dubbaṇṇaṃ dussaṇṭhitaṃ mātāpitūnampi amanāpaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Yathā pana kusalena cittakārena samuṭṭhāpitaṃ rūpaṃ surūpaṃ hoti susaṇṭhitaṃ manāpaṃ, evameva ekacco kammaṃ karonto ñāṇasampayuttena cittena karoti, taṃ kammaṃ rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpentaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ sampattiṃ datvā suvaṇṇaṃ susaṇṭhitaṃ alaṅkatapaṭiyattaṃ viya rūpaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti.
在这里,应当如此理解:将食与识合为一组,食与名色之间便有一个连接点;将异熟的运作方式与名色合为一组,名色与行之间便有一个连接点;而行与未来有之间,也有一个连接点。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca āhāraṃ viññāṇena saddhiṃ saṅkhipitvā āhāranāmarūpānaṃ antare eko sandhi, vipākavidhiṃ nāmarūpena saṅkhipitvā nāmarūpasaṅkhārānaṃ antare eko sandhi, saṅkhārānañca āyatibhavassa ca antare eko sandhīti veditabbo.
「尖顶屋」指取一根主椽而建造的房屋。「重阁讲堂」则指取两根主椽而建造的讲堂。「正是这样」:于此,漏尽者的业,应知犹如太阳光线。太阳光线是存在的,但仅由于无安立之处,故说「无安住」;而漏尽者的业,则因业本身并不存在,故为无安住。虽其身体等尚存,但依此身等所造之业,不可称为善或不善,唯停留在唯作上,成为无果报。因此,他的业以不存在故,称为「无安住」。第四篇经文解释完毕。显示巴利原文
Kūṭāgāranti ekakaṇṇikaṃ gāhāpetvā kataṃ agāraṃ. Kūṭāgārasālāti dve kaṇṇike gahetvā katasālā. Evameva khoti ettha khīṇāsavassa kammaṃ sūriyarasmisamaṃ veditabbaṃ. Sūriyarasmi pana atthi, sā kevalaṃ patiṭṭhāya abhāvena appatiṭṭhā nāma jātā, khīṇāsavassa kammaṃ natthitāya eva appatiṭṭhaṃ. Tassa hi kāyādayo atthi, tehi pana katakammaṃ kusalākusalaṃ nāma na hoti, kiriyamatte ṭhatvā avipākaṃ hoti. Evamassa kammaṃ natthitāya eva appatiṭṭhaṃ nāma jātanti. Catutthaṃ.
第五 《城经》注释显示巴利原文
5. Nagarasuttavaṇṇanā
65 在第五篇经文中,「有名色故有识」:此处,按理也应说「有行故有识」及「有无明故有行」,然而这两句并未宣说。为什么呢?因为无明与行属于第三有(过去有),它们与这里的观照并不相应。因为大人正是依于现在的五蕴身而深入作意的。显示巴利原文
65. Pañcame nāmarūpe kho sati viññāṇanti ettha ‘‘saṅkhāresu sati viññāṇa’’nti ca ‘‘avijjāya sati saṅkhārā’’ti ca vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, tadubhayampi na vuttaṃ. Kasmā? Avijjāsaṅkhārā hi tatiyo bhavo, tehi saddhiṃ ayaṃ vipassanā na ghaṭīyati. Mahāpuriso hi paccuppannapañcavokāravasena abhiniviṭṭhoti.
岂非若未见到无明与行,佛陀便不能出现于世?诚然,若未见到,则不能。然而,依此观智,无明与行实由有、取、爱之关联而已被见到。因此,好比有人追踪一只蜥蜴,看见它钻进洞穴,便下到那里,挖掘它钻入之处,捉住蜥蜴后便离去,而不会去挖掘另一边。为什么不挖呢?因为那里什么都没有。同样地,大人犹如那位追踪蜥蜴者,坐于菩提树下结跏趺座,从老死开始探寻「此之缘为何,此之缘为何」,如此渐次探寻,直至见到名色诸法之缘;进而更探名色之缘,唯见识而已。由此,他认识到「就五蕴有的范围,思惟的运作到这里便到极致」,于是便将观照回转过来。至于上方的无明与行这两者,它们就如洞穴被破开之处,虽自存在;但因它们实际上已被下方的观照所涵盖执取,故不再成为各别思惟之对境,因此便不再执取。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca avijjāsaṅkhāresu adiṭṭhesu na sakkā buddhena bhavitunti. Saccaṃ na sakkā, iminā pana te bhavaupādānataṇhāvasena diṭṭhāva. Tasmā yathā nāma godhaṃ anubandhanto puriso taṃ kūpaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ disvā otaritvā paviṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ khaṇitvā godhaṃ gahetvā pakkameyya, na parabhāgaṃ khaneyya , kasmā? Kassaci natthitāya. Evaṃ mahāpurisopi godhaṃ anubandhanto puriso viya bodhipallaṅke nisinno jarāmaraṇato paṭṭhāya ‘‘imassa ayaṃ paccayo, imassa ayaṃ paccayo’’ti pariyesanto yāva nāmarūpadhammānaṃ paccayaṃ disvā tassapi paccayaṃ pariyesanto viññāṇameva addasa. Tato ‘‘ettako pañcavokārabhavavasena sammasanacāro’’ti vipassanaṃ paṭinivattesi, parato tucchakūpassa abhinnaṭṭhānaṃ viya avijjāsaṅkhāradvayaṃ atthi, tadetaṃ heṭṭhā vipassanāya gahitattā pāṭiyekkaṃ sammasanūpagaṃ na hotīti na aggahesi.
“回转”即返回。那么,此处回转的是哪一种识呢?是结生识与观识。其中,结生识是从缘上回转,观识是从所缘上回转。这两种识都不超越名色,不超出名色之外。在“到此为止,或生……”等句中,意思是:当识成为名色的缘,名色也成为识的缘,两者处于互为缘的状态时,单凭这一点,便有生、有再生。因为除此之外,还能有什么别的来生、来再生呢?难道不正是这本身在生、在再生吗?显示巴利原文
Paccudāvattatīti paṭinivattati. Katamaṃ panettha viññāṇaṃ paccudāvattatīti? Paṭisandhiviññāṇampi vipassanāviññāṇampi. Tattha paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ paccayato paṭinivattati, vipassanāviññāṇaṃ ārammaṇato. Ubhayampi nāmarūpaṃ nātikkamati, nāmarūpato paraṃ na gacchati. Ettāvatā jāyetha vātiādīsu viññāṇe nāmarūpassa paccaye honte, nāmarūpe viññāṇassa paccaye honte, dvīsupi aññamaññapaccayesu hontesu ettakena jāyetha vā upapajjetha vā. Ito hi paraṃ kimaññaṃ jāyetha vā upapajjetha vā, nanu etadeva jāyati ca upapajjati cāti?
如此,在连同前后相续的死与结生而显示了五句之后,为了阐明“到此为止”所说的意思,又说道:“即,以名色为缘而有识,以识为缘而有名色。”此后,为随顺缘起的规律,显示以“以识为缘有名色”为根本的六处与老死,于是宣说了“以名色为缘有六处”等。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ saddhiṃ aparāparacutipaṭisandhīhi pañca padāni dassetvā puna taṃ ettāvatāti vuttamatthaṃ niyyātento yadidaṃ nāmarūpapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpanti vatvā tato paraṃ anulomapaccayākāravasena viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpamūlakaṃ āyatijarāmaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatanantiādimāha.
“路”是“道”的同义词。“高耸有墙”:因为从护城河中高高隆起,故得“高耸”之名,即拥有城墙基址之处。“可爱”:城周四门之内,种种货物无不具足,因此可爱。“令建造”:派遣众人使居住。“当令建造”:即让人居住。在建造之时,先派遣十八俱胝人,问:“满了吗?”答:“未满。”便再派遣五百家。再问,答“未满”,再派遣五百五十家。再问,答“未满”,再派遣三十家。再问,答“未满”,再派遣一千家。再问,答“未满”,再派遣一万一千家。再问,答“未满”,再派遣八万四千家。再问“满了吗?”时,应如此回答:“大王,您说什么呢?偌大的城岂会拥挤?以此方法遣人,是绝不可能填满的。然而,可令人敲鼓巡行,宣告:‘我们这座城,具足如是如是功德。谁愿来此居住,可随意前来,将得到如是如是的照料。’”这便是令人宣扬城的功德与世间将得的利养。他应如此而行。于是,众人听闻了城的功德与所能得到的利养,从各处聚集而来,将城市填满。显示巴利原文
Añjasanti maggasseva vevacanaṃ. Uddhāpavantanti āpato uggatattā uddhāpanti laddhavohārena pākāravatthunā samannāgataṃ. Ramaṇīyanti samantā catunnaṃ dvārānaṃ abbhantare ca nānābhaṇḍānaṃ sampattiyā ramaṇīyaṃ. Māpehīti mahājanaṃ pesetvā vāsaṃ kārehi. Māpeyyāti vāsaṃ kāreyya. Kārento ca paṭhamaṃ aṭṭhārasa manussakoṭiyo pesetvā ‘‘sampuṇṇa’’nti pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni pañcakulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni pañcapaññāsakulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni tiṃsa kulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparaṃ kulasahassaṃ peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni ekādasanahutāni kulāni peseyya. Puna pucchitvā ‘‘na tāva sampuṇṇa’’nti vutte aparāni caturāsītikulasahassāni peseyya. Puna ‘‘sampuṇṇa’’nti pucchite, ‘‘mahārāja, kiṃ vadesi? Mahantaṃ nagaraṃ asambādhaṃ, iminā nayena kulāni pesetvā na sakkā pūretuṃ, bheriṃ pana carāpetvā ‘amhākaṃ nagaraṃ imāya ca imāya ca sampattiyā sampannaṃ, ye tattha vasitukāmā, yathāsukhaṃ gacchantu, imañcimañca parihāraṃ labhissantī’ti nagarassa ceva vaṇṇaṃ lokassa ca parihāralābhaṃ ghosāpethā’’ti vadeyya. So evaṃ kareyya. Tato manussā nagaraguṇañceva parihāralābhañca sutvā sabbadisāhi samosaritvā nagaraṃ pūreyyuṃ. Taṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva assa phītañca. Taṃ sandhāya tadassa nagaraṃ aparena samayena iddhañceva phītañcātiādi vuttaṃ.
其中,「繁荣」指圆满、丰足。「富庶」指具足一切成就而昌盛。「众人所知」指被众人所认识,或利益众人。也读作「众人」。「人众杂沓」指被人群充满,没有间断地拥挤。「达到增长广大」即达到增长与广大,也就是达到最殊胜的地位与广博的规模,即成为一万轮围界中最上等的城。显示巴利原文
Tattha iddhanti samiddhaṃ subhikkhaṃ. Phītanti sabbasampattīhi pupphitaṃ. Bāhujaññanti bahūhi ñātabbaṃ, bahujanānaṃ hitaṃ vā. ‘‘Bahujana’’ntipi pāṭho. Ākiṇṇamanussanti manussehi ākiṇṇaṃ nirantaraṃ phuṭṭhaṃ. Vuḍḍhivepullappattanti vuḍḍhippattañceva vepullappattañca, seṭṭhabhāvañceva vipulabhāvañca pattaṃ, dasasahassacakkavāḷe agganagaraṃ jātanti attho.
「正如这样」这一句,在此配合譬喻说明:正如在野外树林中行走的人,这位大人应当视为从燃灯佛足下开始,依次圆满诸波罗蜜而来。如同那人见到先前之人所走过的道路,这如同大士渐次安坐菩提座,在先前阶段见到八支观道。如同那人沿着那条单人小道行走,在后阶段见到大道,这如同大士在完成更高层次的观时,见到了出世间道。如同那人顺着道路行进,在前方见到城市,这如同如来见到了涅槃城。然而,世间的城是由他人所见、他人所建造并供人居住的;而涅槃城却是大师亲自见、亲自安住的。如同那人见到四座城门的那一刻,即是如来见到四道的那一刻。如同他经由四座城门进入城市的那一刻,即是如来经由四道进入涅槃的那一刻。如同他在城市中辨别各种货物的那一刻,即是如来以省察智辨别三十七菩提分法的那一刻。如同为了在城市中建造房屋而寻找家族的那段时间,即是大师从果定出来,观察应受调教众生的那段时间。如同他所请求的国王见到一位大财主,即是被大梵天所请求的世尊见到憍陈如长老。如同国王命人把大财主叫来,派他去营造……显示巴利原文
Evamevakhoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – araññapavane caramānapuriso viya hi dīpaṅkarapādamūlato paṭṭhāya pāramiyo pūrayamāno mahāpuriso daṭṭhabbo, tassa purisassa pubbakehi manussehi anuyātamaggadassanaṃ viya mahāsattassa anupubbena bodhipallaṅke nisinnassa pubbabhāge aṭṭhaṅgikassa vipassanāmaggassa dassanaṃ, purisassa taṃ ekapadikamaggaṃ anugacchato aparabhāge mahāmaggadassanaṃ viya mahāsattassa uparivipassanāya ciṇṇante lokuttaramaggadassanaṃ, purisassa teneva maggena gacchato purato nagaradassanaṃ viya tathāgatassa nibbānanagaradassanaṃ, bahinagaraṃ panettha aññena diṭṭhaṃ, aññena manussavāsaṃ kataṃ, nibbānanagaraṃ satthā sayameva passi, sayaṃ vāsamakāsi. Tassa purisassa catunnaṃ dvārānaṃ diṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatassa catunnaṃ maggānaṃ diṭṭhakālo, tassa catūhi dvārehi nagaraṃ paviṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatassa catūhi maggehi nibbānaṃ paviṭṭhakālo, tassa nagarabbhantare bhaṇḍavavatthānakālo viya tathāgatassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇena paropaṇṇāsakusaladhammavavatthānakālo. Nagarassa agārakaraṇatthaṃ kulapariyesanakālo viya satthu phalasamāpattito vuṭṭhāya veneyyasatte volokanakālo, tena purisena yācitassa rañño ekaṃ mahākuṭumbikaṃ diṭṭhakālo viya mahābrahmunā yācitassa bhagavato aññāsikoṇḍaññattheraṃ diṭṭhakālo, rañño mahākuṭumbikaṃ pakkosāpetvā ‘‘nagaravāsaṃ karohī’’ti pahitakālo viya bhagavato ekasmiṃ pacchābhatte aṭṭhārasayojanamaggaṃ gantvā āsāḷhipuṇṇamadivase bārāṇasiyaṃ isipatanaṃ pavisitvā theraṃ kāyasakkhiṃ katvā dhammaṃ desitakālo, mahākuṭumbikena aṭṭhārasa purisakoṭiyo gahetvā nagaraṃ ajjhāvuṭṭhakālo viya tathāgatena dhammacakke pavattite therassa aṭṭhārasahi brahmakoṭīhi saddhiṃ sotāpattiphale patiṭṭhitakālo, evaṃ nibbānanagaraṃ paṭhamaṃ āvāsitaṃ, tato sampuṇṇaṃ nagaranti pucchitvā na tāvāti vutte pañca kulāni ādiṃ katvā yāva caturāsītikulasahassapesanaṃ viya tathāgatassa pañcamadivasato paṭṭhāya anattalakkhaṇasuttādīni desetvā pañcavaggiye ādiṃ katvā yasapamukhā pañcapaṇṇāsa kulaputtā, tiṃsa bhaddavaggiyā, sahassapurāṇajaṭilā, bimbisārapamukhāni ekādasapurisanahutāni, tirokuṭṭānumodane caturāsītisahassānīti ettakassa janassa ariyamaggaṃ otāretvā nibbānanagaraṃ pesitakālo, atha tena nayena nagare apūriyamāne bheriṃ carāpetvā nagarassa vaṇṇaghosanaṃ kulānaṃ parihāralābhaghosanaṃ viya ca māsassa aṭṭha divase tattha tattha nisīditvā dhammakathikānaṃ nibbānavaṇṇassa ceva nibbānappattānaṃ jātikantārādinittharaṇānisaṃsassa ca ghosanaṃ, tato sabbadisāhi āgantvā manussānaṃ nagarasamosaraṇaṃ viya tattha tattha dhammakathaṃ sutvā tato tato nikkhamitvā pabbajjaṃ ādiṃ katvā anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannānaṃ aparimāṇānaṃ kulaputtānaṃ nibbānasamosaraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
「古道」指圣八支道。此圣道在《自恣经》(《相应部》1.215)中,依未曾转起之义,被称为「未生起的道」;在此经中,依已转起之义,被称为「古道」。「梵行」指包含三学的整体教法。「繁荣」指以禅那之乐而圆满、丰足。「富庶」指以神通为庄严而昌盛。「广布」即流传广远。「众人所知」即被众人所了知。「乃至天人皆所善说」:意即,在一万轮围界内的天与人之间,在其所及范围,由如来所善说、善教导。第五段。显示巴利原文
Purāṇaṃ magganti ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ. Ayañhi ariyamaggo pavāraṇasutte (saṃ. ni. 1.215) avattamānakaṭṭhena ‘‘anuppannamaggo’’ti vutto, imasmiṃ sutte avaḷañjanaṭṭhena ‘‘purāṇamaggo’’ti. Brahmacariyanti sikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ sakalasāsanaṃ. Iddhanti jhānassādena samiddhaṃ subhikkhaṃ. Phītanti abhiññābharaṇehi pupphitaṃ. Vitthārikanti vitthiṇṇaṃ. Bāhujaññanti bahujanaviññeyyaṃ. Yāva devamanussehisuppakāsitanti yāva dasasahassacakkavāḷe devamanussehi paricchedo atthi, etasmiṃ antare suppakāsitaṃ sudesitaṃ tathāgatenāti. Pañcamaṃ.
6. 思惟经注释显示巴利原文
6. Sammasasuttavaṇṇanā
66 第六段中,为何称唤他?因为一种微细、触及三相的法教现于他前。据说在那个地方,人们有因而具智慧;那里的食物柔软细滑,食用者智慧增长,故能通达深奥、触及三相的法义。因此,世尊便在那个地方宣说了《大念处》、《大因缘》、《不动利益》,以及《相应部》中的《小因缘》等其他甚深经典。“汝等思惟耶”:即“你们确实思惟了吗?”“内思惟”:指向内于诸缘而思惟。“那位比丘不能令世尊心满意”:因为世尊希望他依缘起而作答,他却未如此回答,反以三十二分身作答,未能通达世尊的意趣。显示巴利原文
66. Chaṭṭhe āmantesīti kasmā āmantesi? Yasmāssa sukhumā tilakkhaṇāhatā dhammadesanā upaṭṭhāsi. Tasmiṃ kira janapade manussā sahetukā paññavanto. Siniddhāni kirettha bhojanāni, tānisevato janassa paññā vaḍḍhati, te gambhīraṃ tilakkhaṇāhataṃ dhammakathaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ samatthā honti. Teneva bhagavā dīghamajjhimesu mahāsatipaṭṭhānāni (dī. ni. 2.372 ādayo) mahānidānaṃ (dī. ni. 2.95 ādayo), āneñjasappāyaṃ (ma. ni. 3.66 ādayo), saṃyuttake cūḷanidānādisuttanti evamādīni aññāni gambhīrāni suttāni tattheva kathesi. Sammasatha noti sammasatha nu. Antaraṃ sammasanti abbhantaraṃ paccayasammasanaṃ. Na so bhikkhu bhagavato cittaṃ ārādhesīti paccayākāravasena byākārāpetukāmassa bhagavato tathā abyākaritvā dvattiṃsākāravasena byākaronto ajjhāsayaṃ gahetuṃ nāsakkhi.
“说此”:因说法尚未依循法义的次第关联而展开,为使说法依循次第关联而展开,故说此语。“那时,阿难,你们听”这一句,是全部三藏佛语中一句独一无二、不与余处相混的文句,因为在其他地方从未如此说过。“依的因”:即五取蕴之因。此处所说“依”,特指五取蕴。“生起”:即产生。“止住”:指依循再三流转而安住。显示巴利原文
Etadavocāti desanā yathānusandhiṃ na gatā, desanāya yathānusandhigamanatthaṃ etadavoca. Tenahānanda, suṇāthāti idaṃ tepiṭake buddhavacane asambhinnapadaṃ. Aññattha hi evaṃ vuttaṃ nāma natthi. Upadhinidānanti khandhupadhinidānaṃ. Khandhapañcakañhettha upadhīti adhippetaṃ. Uppajjatīti jāyati. Nivisatīti punappunaṃ pavattivasena patiṭṭhahati.
“世间令人欢喜、令人愉悦”:即世间中性质可爱、性质甘甜之物。在“眼是世间”等语句中,那些以“我所”执而执着眼等根的众生,安住于自己的成就,将眼——依镜中取像之理——视为如同极清净的五净色,犹如黄金宫殿中开启的宝狮窗;将耳视为银制水槽或腰带束线;将名为“高鼻”的鼻,视为如同旋制而成的雌黄棒;将舌视为如同层层相叠的红色毛毯,柔软、滑润、甘美;将身视为秫秸或黄金拱门;将意视为殊异、广大,不与余人共的胜妙之物。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ kho loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpanti yaṃ lokasmiṃ piyasabhāvañceva madhurasabhāvañca. Cakkhuṃ loketiādīsu lokasmiñhi cakkhādīsu mamattena abhiniviṭṭhā sattā sampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhitā attano cakkhuṃ ādāsādīsu nimittaggahaṇānusārena vippasannapañcapasādaṃ suvaṇṇavimāne ugghāṭitamaṇisīhapañjaraṃ viya maññanti, sotaṃ rajatapanāḷikaṃ viya pāmaṅgasuttaṃ viya ca maññanti, tuṅganāsāti laddhavohāraṃ ghānaṃ vaṭṭetvā ṭhapitaharitālavaṭṭiṃ viya maññanti, jivhaṃ rattakambalapaṭalaṃ viya mudusiniddhamadhurarasadaṃ maññanti, kāyaṃ sālalaṭṭhiṃ viya suvaṇṇatoraṇaṃ viya ca maññanti, manaṃ aññesaṃ manena asadisaṃ uḷāraṃ maññanti.
“视为常”的意思就是看作恒常。其余语句的解说方式也是如此。“未能从苦中解脱”指未能从整个轮回之苦中解脱出来。“将会看见”即将会见到。“Āpānīyakaṃsa(饮器盆)”是酒杯的名称。然而,因为在此饮用液体,所以称为“āpānīya”(饮料盆)。既是饮料盆,又是金属器,因此叫作“āpānīyakaṃsa”。这是盛放酒和浮渣的碗的名称。不过,依据“具足色”等说法,这里指的是盆中所盛的饮料。“为暑热所逼”是指被暑热所压迫。“被暑热所侵袭”是指被暑热触恼、随逐。对于饮用者来说,它将因具足颜色等优点而令人满意,或者由此而遍满全身,令喜悦生起并安住。“不审虑”即不加观察。显示巴利原文
Niccato addakkhunti niccanti addasaṃsu. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Na parimucciṃsu dukkhasmāti sakalasmāpi vaṭṭadukkhā na parimucciṃsu. Dakkhissantīti passissanti. Āpānīyakaṃsoti sarakassa nāmaṃ. Yasmā panettha āpaṃ pivanti, tasmā ‘‘āpānīyo’’ti vuccati. Āpānīyo ca so kaṃso cāti āpānīyakaṃso. Surāmaṇḍasarakassetaṃ nāmaṃ. ‘‘Vaṇṇasampanno’’tiādivacanato pana kaṃse ṭhitapānameva evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ghammābhitattoti ghammena abhitatto. Ghammaparetoti ghammena phuṭṭho, anugatoti attho. Pivato hi kho taṃ chādessatīti pivantassa taṃ pānīyaṃ vaṇṇādisampattiyā ruccissati, sakalasarīraṃ vā pharitvā tuṭṭhiṃ uppādayamānaṃ ṭhassati. Appaṭisaṅkhāti apaccavekkhitvā.
“正是如此”当中,以譬喻配合说明如下:世间可爱、可悦的所缘,应视为饮器盆;依止轮回而住的凡夫,应视为被暑热逼恼的人;以世间可爱、可悦的所缘来引诱的人,应视为以饮器盆来邀请的人;那位向饮酒者解说饮器盆中好处与过患的人,应视为如老师、亲教师那样的善知识。正如那位回头告知的人,向那人说明了饮器盆的优点与过患,同样地,老师或亲教师也为比丘讲说五种欲功德中的乐味,以及如何从中出离。显示巴利原文
Evameva khoti ettha idaṃ opammasaṃsandanaṃ – āpānīyakaṃso viya hi loke piyarūpaṃ sātarūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, ghammābhitattapuriso viya vaṭṭanissito puthujjano, āpānīyakaṃsena nimantanapuriso viya loke piyarūpena sātarūpena ārammaṇena nimantakajano, āpānīyakaṃse sampattiñca ādīnavañca ārocento āpānakamanusso viya ācariyupajjhāyādiko kalyāṇamitto. Yatheva hi tassa purisassa apalokitamanusso āpānīyakaṃse guṇañca ādīnavañca āroceti, evameva ācariyo vā upajjhāyo vā bhikkhuno pañcasu kāmaguṇesu assādañca nissaraṇañca katheti.
在此,如同有人讲说了饮器盆的优点与过患,那人仅仅因为喜爱颜色等优点,一时冲动想:“就算会死,以后再看吧”,便匆忙不加审虑地喝了,最终遭受死亡或濒死的痛苦;同样地,比丘,对于五种欲功德,由眼见等方式生起的喜悦只是“味”,而过患——无论现世还是来世——却是众多而种种的。欲乐少味、多苦、多恼。就这样,老师与亲教师讲述了利益与过患,并教诫说:“你应当修习沙门道,于诸根守护根门,饮食知量,专修警寤。”即使受到这样的教诫,他由于心耽着于乐味,便说:“如果真有过患,以后再看吧”,轻慢老师与亲教师,舍弃听受教法、反复请问等义务与修行,说些世间利益的话,因贪着欲乐而舍戒还俗。此后,他造作种种恶行,在破窗行窃等时被捉住,并被认定为“这是贼”,扭送国王。在这一生,他遭受砍断手足等刑罚,来世又于四恶趣中受大苦痛。显示巴利原文
Tattha yathā āpānīyakaṃsamhi guṇe ca ādīnave ca ārocite so puriso piyavaṇṇādisampadāyameva sañjātavego ‘‘sace maraṇaṃ bhavissati, pacchā jānissāmī’’ti sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāya taṃ pivitvā maraṇaṃ vā maraṇamattaṃ vā dukkhaṃ nigacchati, evameva, bhikkhu, ‘‘pañcasu kāmaguṇesu dassanādivasena uppannasomanassamattameva assādo, ādīnavo pana diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyiko bahu nānappakāro, appassādā kāmā bahudukkhā bahupāyāsā’’ti evaṃ ācariyupajjhāyehi ānisaṃsañca ādīnavañca kathetvā – ‘‘samaṇapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajja, indriyesu guttadvāro bhava bhojane mattaññū jāgariyaṃ anuyutto’’ti evaṃ ovaditopi assādabaddhacittatāya ‘‘sace vuttappakāro ādīnavo bhavissati, pacchā jānissāmī’’ti ācariyupajjhāye apasādetvā uddesaparipucchādīni ceva vattapaṭipattiñca pahāya lokāmisakathaṃ kathento kāme paribhuñjitukāmatāya sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya hīnāyāvattati. Tato duccaritāni pūrento sandhicchedanādikāle ‘‘coro aya’’nti gahetvā rañño dassito idheva hatthapādādichedanaṃ patvā samparāye catūsu apāyesu mahādukkhaṃ anubhoti.
其中,“或以水除去”是指用凉水去除;“以凝乳浆”是指单用凝乳浆;“以咸炒粉饮”是指加了盐的炒粉饮料;“以盐醋饮”是指人们将一切谷物、果实、嫩芽等放入而制成的所谓盐醋饮,并用它来除去。显示巴利原文
Pānīyena vā vinetunti sītena vārinā harituṃ. Dadhimaṇḍakenāti dadhimaṇḍanamattena. Bhaṭṭhaloṇikāyāti saloṇena sattupānīyena. Loṇasovīrakenāti sabbadhaññaphalakaḷīrādīni pakkhipitvā loṇasovīrakaṃ nāma karonti, tena.
然而,这里的譬喻配合应这样理解:瑜伽行者尚依托轮回而生存的时期,当看作被暑热逼迫的人;那位行人审虑后舍弃饮器盆,用水等解除口渴,当看作比丘依止师长、亲教师的教导,把握六门等,次第修习观而证得阿拉汉果;四种道当看作四种饮料;漏尽者饮用了四道之饮,灭尽了渴爱,前往从未到过的涅槃境界,正如饮用了某种水,解除了酒后的焦渴,获得安乐,得以随心而行。第六。显示巴利原文
Opammasaṃsandanaṃ panettha – ghammābhitattapuriso viya vaṭṭasannissitakāle yogāvacaro daṭṭhabbo, tassa purisassa paṭisaṅkhā āpānīyakaṃsaṃ pahāya pānīyādīhi pipāsassa vinodanaṃ viya bhikkhuno ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ ovāde ṭhatvā chadvārādīni pariggahetvā anukkamena vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhentassa arahattaphalādhigamo, pānīyādīni cattāri pānāni viya hi cattāro maggā, tesu aññataraṃ pivitvā surāpipāsitaṃ vinodetvā sukhino yena kāmaṃ gamanaṃ viya khīṇāsavassa catumaggapānaṃ pivitvā taṇhaṃ vinodetvā agatapubbaṃ nibbānadisaṃ gamanakālo veditabbo. Chaṭṭhaṃ.
芦苇束经注疏显示巴利原文
7. Naḷakalāpīsuttavaṇṇanā
67 第六十七。在第七经中,“朋友,究竟为了什么”——他为何这样问?他想:“这样被问,他会如何回答?”这是为了了解长老的内心倾向。再者,过去两位上首弟子曾决断过这个问题,为了让未来的比丘们知道,所以他也这样提问。“现在才这样为我”,长老说这句话,是因为之前所说“识是名色的缘”,现在同样也说“名色也是识的缘”。“芦苇束”——在此处,并非拿铁束等来作譬喻,而是为了显示识与名色无力、脆弱的情形,才引用了这个譬喻。显示巴利原文
67. Sattame kinnu kho, āvusoti kasmā pucchati? ‘‘Evaṃ puṭṭho kathaṃ nu kho byākareyyā’’ti. Therassa ajjhāsayajānanatthaṃ. Apica atīte dve aggasāvakā imaṃ pañhaṃ vinicchayiṃsūti anāgate bhikkhū jānissantītipi pucchati. Idāneva kho mayanti idaṃ thero yassa nāmarūpassa viññāṇaṃ paccayoti vuttaṃ, tadeva nāmarūpaṃ viññāṇassa paccayoti vuttattā āha . Naḷakalāpiyoti idha pana ayakalāpādivasena upamaṃ anāharitvā viññāṇanāmarūpānaṃ abaladubbalabhāvadassanatthaṃ ayaṃ upamā ābhatā.
“息灭”(nirodho hoti)于此,是依缘所生的五蕴有而作的言说。“以三十六种事”(Chattiṃsāya vatthūhīti):即在以下解答的十二个方面中,每一方面各以三种方式理解,总合为三十六种因。其中,第一种是说法者的德能,第二种是修习的行道,第三种是行道之果。由第一种方式说明了说法圆满;由第二种说明了有学地;由第三种说明了无学地。显示巴利原文
Nirodho hotīti ettake ṭhāne paccayuppannapañcavokārabhavavasena desanā kathitā. Chattiṃsāya vatthūhīti heṭṭhā vissajjitesu dvādasasu padesu ekekasmiṃ tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ vasena chattiṃsāya kāraṇehi. Ettha ca paṭhamo dhammakathikaguṇo, dutiyā paṭipatti, tatiyaṃ paṭipattiphalaṃ. Tattha paṭhamanayena desanāsampatti kathitā, dutiyena sekkhabhūmi, tatiyena asekkhabhūmīti. Sattamaṃ.
8. 憍赏弥经的注释显示巴利原文
8. Kosambisuttavaṇṇanā
68 在第八个问题中,“除这些之外”(aññatreva)的意思是:有人因相信他人,就把他所说的话当作真实而执取。有人静坐思维,某个理由恰合他的心意,便凭喜好认定“这是真的”而执取。有人因长期以来的传说,认为“此事自古即如此传,必定真实”,便依传闻而执取。有人在思惟时,心中浮现一个依据,便依随“这大概是对的”的表象去遍寻推敲,进而执取。另外有人在思惟中产生一种见解,他顺着这个见解反复审察那个理由,感到满意后,便说“这必定是真的”,由此透过对见解的审察容忍而执取。长老将这一切理由全部搁置,转而以他亲身现证的智慧去追问,说道:“贤友穆希拉,除了这些,凭信仰等……”。这里的“除这些之外”(aññatreva),即是将信仰等理由撇开不用,不依赖它们的意思。“有之灭尽即是涅槃”(bhavanirodho nibbānaṃ):五取蕴的灭尽即是涅槃。显示巴利原文
68. Aṭṭhame aññatrevāti ekacco hi parassa saddahitvā yaṃ esa bhaṇati, taṃ bhūtanti gaṇhāti. Aparassa nisīditvā cintentassa yaṃ kāraṇaṃ ruccati, so ‘‘atthi eta’’nti ruciyā gaṇhāti. Eko ‘‘cirakālato paṭṭhāya evaṃ anussavo atthi, bhūtameta’’nti anussavena gaṇhāti. Aññassa vitakkayato ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhāti, so ‘‘attheta’’nti ākāraparivitakkena gaṇhāti. Aparassa cintayato ekā diṭṭhi uppajjati, yāyassa taṃ kāraṇaṃ nijjhāyantassa khamati, so ‘‘attheta’’nti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā gaṇhāti. Thero pana pañcapi etāni kāraṇāni paṭikkhipitvā paccakkhañāṇena paṭividdhabhāvaṃ pucchanto aññatreva, āvuso musila, saddhāyātiādimāha. Tattha aññatrevāti saddhādīni kāraṇāni ṭhapetvā, vinā etehi kāraṇehīti attho. Bhavanirodho nibbānanti pañcakkhandhanirodho nibbānaṃ.
“保持沉默”(tuṇhī ahosīti):那位漏尽长老保持沉默,而我也未说“我是漏尽者”或“我不是”,就只是沉默。为何尊者那罗陀要对尊者帕维塔说这番话?据传他心中这样想:“‘有之灭尽名为涅槃’这个问题,即使是有学之人也应知晓;但此刻那位长老却将这位长老视为有学,我要让他明白这个道理。”因此才说了这番话。显示巴利原文
Tuṇhī ahosīti thero khīṇāsavo, ahaṃ pana khīṇāsavoti vā na vāti vā avatvā tuṇhīyeva ahosi. Āyasmā nārado āyasmantaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ etadavocāti kasmā avoca? So kira cintesi – ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbānaṃ nāmāti sekhehipi jānitabbo pañho esa, ayaṃ pana thero imaṃ theraṃ asekhabhūmiyā kāreti, imaṃ ṭhānaṃ jānāpessāmī’’ti etaṃ avoca.
「以正慧善见」:以与观相应的道慧而善见。「而我不说我是阿罗汉」:因住于不来道,故表明自己不是阿罗汉。如今他所具有的那种‘有灭即涅槃’的智,乃是不摄于十九种观察智中的观察智。「水井」:指深二十肘或三十肘的饮用水井。「取水器」:指舀水的器具。「水即是智」:犹如站在岸边观看的人,会生起‘那是水’的智。「而不能以身触」:虽然见到水,却不能把水取出来以身触而安住。正如井中见水,即是不来者见涅槃;如被热所逼恼的人,即是不来者;如取水器,即是阿罗汉道。如同被热所逼恼的人在井中见水,不来者也以观察智了知‘上方尚有阿罗汉果’。然而,如同那人因没有取水器,虽见水却不能取出来以身触;不来者也因没有阿罗汉道,不能以涅槃为所缘而进入阿罗汉果定安住。第八。显示巴利原文
Sammappaññāyasudiṭṭhanti saha vipassanāya maggapaññāya suṭṭhu diṭṭhaṃ. Na camhi arahanti anāgāmimagge ṭhitattā arahaṃ na homīti dīpeti. Yaṃ panassa idāni ‘‘bhavanirodho nibbāna’’nti ñāṇaṃ, taṃ ekūnavīsatiyā paccavekkhaṇañāṇehi vimuttaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Udapānoti vīsatiṃsahatthagambhīro pānīyakūpo. Udakavārakoti udakaussiñcanavārako. Udakanti hi kho ñāṇaṃ assāti tīre ṭhitassa olokayato evaṃ ñāṇaṃ bhaveyya. Na ca kāyena phusitvāti udakaṃ pana nīharitvā kāyena phusitvā viharituṃ na sakkuṇeyya. Udapāne udakadassanaṃ viya hi anāgāmino nibbānadassanaṃ, ghammābhitattapuriso viya anāgāmī, udakavārako viya arahattamaggo, yathā ghammābhitattapuriso udapāne udakaṃ passati. Evaṃ anāgāmī paccavekkhaṇañāṇena ‘‘upari arahattaphalasamayo nāma atthī’’ti jānāti. Yathā pana so puriso udakavārakassa natthitāya udakaṃ nīharitvā kāyena phusituṃ na labhati, evaṃ anāgāmī arahattamaggassa natthitāya nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā arahattaphalasamāpattiṃ appetvā nisīdituṃ na labhati. Aṭṭhamaṃ.
9. 增上经的注释显示巴利原文
9. Upayantisuttavaṇṇanā
69 第九经中,「增长」:指在水量增加时,向上涌起。「大河」:指恒河、阎牟那河等大河流。「令增长」:使其上涨,即增长、充满的意思。「无明增长」:无明向上增长,能成为诸行的缘。「令行增长」:令诸行上涨、增长。所有句义都应如此理解。「减退」:退落、消减。「无明减退」:无明退落、消减时,便不能成为诸行的缘。「令行减退」:令诸行退落。如此类推各句。第九。显示巴利原文
69. Navame upayantoti udakavaḍḍhanasamaye upari gacchanto. Mahānadiyoti gaṅgāyamunādikā mahāsaritāyo. Upayāpetīti upari yāpeti, vaḍḍheti pūretīti attho. Avijjā upayantīti avijjā upari gacchantī saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ sakkuṇantī. Saṅkhāre upayāpetīti saṅkhāre upari yāpeti vaḍḍheti. Evaṃ sabbapadesu attho veditabbo. Apayantoti apagacchanto osaranto. Avijjā apayantīti avijjā apagacchamānā osaramānā upari saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo bhavituṃ na sakkuṇantīti attho. Saṅkhāre apayāpetīti saṅkhāre apagacchāpeti. Esa nayo sabbapadesu. Navamaṃ.
10. 殊希摩经的注释显示巴利原文
10. Susimasuttavaṇṇanā
70 第十经中,「被敬重」:被一切天人与人从心中看重,犹如石伞盖一般。「被推崇」:被以敬意喜爱。「被供养」:以四资具供养而被恭敬。「被礼敬」:以谦下的行为而被恭敬。人们见到导师后,会从象肩等高座下来让路,从肩头取下布,从座位起身,顶礼膜拜。这样,他便成为他们所称的‘被礼敬’者。「殊希摩」:是一位名叫殊希摩、精通吠陀支分的聪明游方行者。「来吧,你」:据说,他们当时这样想:‘沙门乔达摩并非靠出身、种姓等而获得最高的利养,但他却是最杰出的诗人,以超群的文才为弟子们编撰偈颂并教授。弟子们学了之后,便向信众讲说随顺的谈话、随喜的赞叹,以及音韵的讽诵等。那些信众心生欢喜,便拿出供养。如果我们也能略懂一些沙门乔达摩所知的法,再把我们自己的见解掺进去,去向信众宣说,这样我们或许也能成为得到供养的人。那么,有谁在沙门乔达摩跟前出家后,能最快学会呢?’他们这样想过之后,看出殊希摩有能力,便走到他面前,这样对他说了。显示巴利原文
70. Dasame garukatoti sabbehi devamanussehi pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya cittena garukato. Mānitoti manena piyāyito. Pūjitoti catupaccayapūjāya pūjito. Apacitoti nīcavuttikaraṇena apacito. Satthārañhi disvā manussā hatthikkhandhādīhi otaranti maggaṃ denti, aṃsakūṭato sāṭakaṃ apanenti, āsanato vuṭṭhahanti vandanti. Evaṃ so tehi apacito nāma hoti. Susimoti evaṃnāmako vedaṅgesu kusalo paṇḍitaparibbājako. Ehi tvanti tesaṃ kira etadahosi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo na jātigottādīni āgamma lābhaggappatto jāto, kaviseṭṭho panesa uttamakavitāya sāvakānaṃ ganthaṃ bandhitvā deti, taṃ te uggaṇhitvā upaṭṭhākānaṃ upanisinnakathampi anumodanampi sarabhaññampīti evamādīni kathenti, te tesaṃ pasannā lābhaṃ upasaṃharanti. Sace mayaṃ yaṃ samaṇo gotamo jānāti, tato thokaṃ jāneyyāma, attano samayaṃ tattha pakkhipitvā mayampi upaṭṭhākānaṃ katheyyāma, tato etehi lābhitarā bhaveyyāma. Ko nu kho samaṇassa gotamassa santike pabbajitvā khippameva uggaṇhituṃ sakkhissatī’’ti. Te evaṃ cintetvā ‘‘susimo paṭibalo’’ti disvā taṃ upasaṅkamitvā evamāhaṃsu.
“往诣尊者阿难处”:他为何往诣?据载,他当时这样想:“我究竟应到谁面前,才能尽快获得此法?”随后又思惟:“沙门乔达摩位份尊崇、威德深重,常精勤不辍,若不逢适宜之时,便难以亲近。且诸多刹帝利等众亦将拜见沙门乔达摩,彼时更无缘上前。在其弟子众中,舍利弗智慧深广,于观相中列为第一;大目犍连于定相中列为第一;大迦叶于持头陀行者中、阿那律于得天眼者中、满慈子于说法者中、优波离长老于持律者中,皆尊为第一。而这位阿难,乃是多闻、持三藏者,导师亦将各处所说法要荟集而授与之,他在五处被列为第一,获八种殊胜抉择,具足四稀有、未曾有法。若我往至其前,应当很快便得以闻法。”以此因缘,他便往诣尊者阿难之处。显示巴利原文
Yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi, ‘‘kassa nu kho santikaṃ gantvā ahaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ khippaṃ laddhuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti? Tato cintesi – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo garu tejussado niyamamanuyutto, na sakkā akāle upasaṅkamituṃ, aññepi bahū khattiyādayo samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ upasaṅkamanti, tasmimpi samaye na sakkā upasaṅkamituṃ. Sāvakesupissa sāriputto mahāpañño vipassanālakkhaṇamhi etadagge ṭhapito, mahāmoggallāno samādhilakkhaṇasmiṃ etadagge ṭhapito, mahākassapo dhutaṅgadharesu anuruddho dibbacakkhukesu, puṇṇo mantāṇiputto dhammakathikesu, upālitthero vinayadharesu etadagge ṭhapito, ayaṃ pana ānando bahussuto tipiṭakadharo, satthāpissa tattha tattha kathitaṃ dhammaṃ āharitvā katheti, pañcasu ṭhānesu etadagge ṭhapito, aṭṭhannaṃ varānaṃ lābhī, catūhi acchariyabbhutadhammehi samannāgato, tassa samīpaṃ gato khippaṃ dhammaṃ laddhuṃ sakkhissāmī’’ti. Tasmā yenāyasmā ānando tenupasaṅkami.
“往诣世尊处”:阿难何故不自行度其出家,却带他去见世尊?据载,阿难当时这样想:“此人在外道时期,独自宣称‘我为导师’而游化,出家后或为损毁教法而拉拢徒众。况且,我实不能洞晓其志向,但世尊必能知晓。”因此,阿难便领着殊希摩,往诣世尊之处。“那么,阿难,度殊希摩出家吧”:据载,世尊当时这样想:“此游方者在外道时,宣称‘我乃独尊之导师’而游化,今却云‘愿于此处修清净梵行’。他究竟是信服我,还是信服我诸弟子,抑或信服我或弟子之说法?”那时,世尊洞察其无论对何者皆无真心信服,便如此观察:“此人为盗取我教法中法义而出家。如此看来,其出家动机不净;然其最终果报当如何?”世尊观察后了知:“此人虽为‘盗法’而出家,然仅需数日,一番精进,便能证得阿拉汉果。”因了知此……显示巴利原文
Yenabhagavā tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā sayaṃ apabbājetvā upasaṅkami? Evaṃ kirassa ahosi – ‘‘ayaṃ titthiyasamaye pāṭiyekko ‘ahaṃ satthā’ti paṭijānanto carati, pabbajitvā sāsanassa alābhāyapi parisakkeyya. Na kho panassāhaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ ājānāmi, satthā jānissatī’’ti. Tasmā taṃ ādāya yena bhagavā tenupasaṅkami. Tenahānanda, susimaṃ pabbājethāti satthā kira cintesi – ‘‘ayaṃ paribbājako titthiyasamaye ‘ahaṃ pāṭiyekko satthā’ti paṭijānamāno carati, ‘idha maggabrahmacariyaṃ carituṃ icchāmī’ti kira vadati. Kiṃ nu kho mayi pasanno, udāhu mayhaṃ sāvakesu, udāhu mayhaṃ vā mama sāvakānaṃ vā dhammakathāya pasanno’’ti? Athassa ekaṭṭhānepi pasādābhāvaṃ ñatvā, ‘‘ayaṃ mama sāsane dhammaṃ thenessāmīti pabbajati. Itissa āgamanaṃ aparisuddhaṃ; nipphatti nu kho kīdisā’’ti? Olokento ‘‘kiñcāpi ‘dhammaṃ thenessāmī’ti pabbajati, katipāheneva pana ghaṭetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhissatī’’ti ñatvā ‘‘tenahānanda, susimaṃ pabbājethā’’ti āha.
“他宣告了阿拉汉果”:据说,那些比丘于世尊座前领受业处,随后便入三个月的雨安居。就在该雨安居期内,他们策励精进、持续用功,证得阿拉汉果。诸比丘心想:“我等应将所证功德禀告世尊。”于是,在自恣结束后,他们收拾坐卧具,来到世尊跟前,各自禀报所证功德。这段话正因此事而说。“阿拉汉果”,是阿拉汉果的称谓。“宣告”,即禀告之义。“他听闻了”:据载,他聚精会神地听闻,并依次往赴那些比丘各自居处,想听取种种交谈。“他前往诸比丘之处”:他为何前去?据说,他听到此事后,心中便思量:“于佛教法中,所谓‘阿拉汉果’,定是最胜、最精要之所在,大概如同师长秘传之口诀。我若去问,便能明了。”因此,他便前往诸比丘那里。显示巴利原文
Aññā byākatā hotīti te kira bhikkhū satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā temāsaṃ vassaṃ vasantā tasmiṃyeva antotemāse ghaṭentā vāyamantā arahattaṃ paṭilabhiṃsu. Te ‘‘paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ satthu ārocessāmā’’ti pavāritapavāraṇā senāsanaṃ saṃsāmetvā satthu santikaṃ āgantvā attano paṭiladdhaguṇaṃ ārocesuṃ. Taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Aññāti arahattassa nāmaṃ. Byākatāti ārocitā. Assosīti so kira ohitasoto hutvā tesaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ gacchati taṃ taṃ kathaṃ suṇitukāmo. Yena te bhikkhū tenupasaṅkamīti kasmā upasaṅkami? Taṃ kirassa pavattiṃ sutvā etadahosi – ‘‘aññā nāma imasmiṃ sāsane paramappamāṇaṃ sārabhūtā ācariyamuṭṭhi maññe bhavissati, pucchitvā naṃ jānissāmī’’ti. Tasmā upasaṅkami.
“种种”(anekavihitanti):意为多种多样。“神变类”(iddhividhanti):指神通变化的部分。“显现与隐没”(āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāvanti):指将显现变为隐没,又将隐没变为显现,意思是问:“你们能作到吗?”“穿墙”(tirokuṭṭanti):指墙的另一边。其余“穿壁”、“穿山”两句,道理相同。“出没地中”(ummujjanimujjanti):指从地中涌出与潜入地中。“以结跏趺坐”(pallaṅkenāti):指以盘腿而坐的方式。“如鸟在空中”(kamathāti):问的是“能否像鸟那样坐着或飞行?”“有翼之鸟”(pakkhī sakuṇoti):指带有翅膀的鸟。这里仅为简略的释义,关于此神变以及后面天耳等内容的详细注释方法,应依《清净道论》所述的道理来理解。显示巴利原文
Anekavihitanti anekavidhaṃ. Iddhividhanti iddhikoṭṭhāsaṃ. Āvibhāvaṃ tirobhāvanti āvibhāvaṃ gahetvā tirobhāvaṃ, tirobhāvaṃ gahetvā āvibhāvaṃ kātuṃ sakkothāti pucchati. Tirokuṭṭanti parakuṭṭaṃ. Itarapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Ummujjanimujjanti ummujjanañca nimujjanañca. Pallaṅkenāti pallaṅkabandhanena. Kamathāti nisīdituṃ vā gantuṃ vā sakkothāti pucchati? Pakkhī sakuṇoti pakkhayutto sakuṇo. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana imassa iddhividhassa, ito paresaṃ dibbasotādīnañca vaṇṇanānayo visuddhimagge vuttanayena veditabboti.
“寂静的解脱”(santā vimokkhāti):因其支分寂静、所缘寂静而称为寂静的无色界解脱。“以身触证”(kāyena phusitvāti):即以名身触证、获得。“友!我等是慧解脱者”(paññāvimuttā kho mayaṃ, āvusoti):这表示“朋友,我们是审察者、纯观行者,唯以智慧而得解脱”。“友,殊希摩!你应了知,或你不应了知”(ājāneyyāsi vā tvaṃ, āvuso susima, na vā tvaṃ ājāneyyāsīti):他们为何这样说呢?据说,他们当时心想:“我们尚未能确切把握他的心意而为他讲解,但只要他去请问十力者,便能无有疑惑了。”“法住智”(dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti):即观智,此智先生起。“于涅槃之智”(nibbāne ñāṇanti):指在观行达到顶点时所转起的道智,此智后生起。因此,世尊这样说道。显示巴利原文
Santā vimokkhāti aṅgasantatāya ceva ārammaṇasantatāya ca santā āruppavimokkhā. Kāyena phusitvāti nāmakāyena phusitvā paṭilabhitvā. Paññāvimuttā kho mayaṃ, āvusoti, āvuso, mayaṃ nijjhānakā sukkhavipassakā paññāmatteneva vimuttāti dasseti. Ājāneyyāsi vā tvaṃ, āvuso susima, na vā tvaṃ ājāneyyāsīti kasmā evamāhaṃsu? Evaṃ kira nesaṃ ahosi – ‘‘mayaṃ imassa ajjhāsayaṃ gahetvā kathetuṃ na sakkhissāma, dasabalaṃ pana pucchitvā nikkaṅkho bhavissatī’’ti. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ, taṃ paṭhamataraṃ uppajjati. Nibbāne ñāṇanti vipassanāya ciṇṇante pavattamaggañāṇaṃ, taṃ pacchā uppajjati. Tasmā bhagavā evamāha.
“你应了知”等语(ājāneyyāsi vātiādi),为何而说?是为了显示即使没有定,智慧也能如此生起。其中所表达的意思是:殊希摩,道也罢,果也罢,它们并非定的直接果报,非定的利益,亦非定的最终成就;而是观(毗婆舍那)的直接果报,是观的利益,是观的最终成就。因此,无论你是否了知,事实上都是法住智在先,于涅槃之智在后。显示巴利原文
Ājāneyyāsi vātiādi kasmā vuttaṃ? Vināpi samādhiṃ evaṃ ñāṇuppattidassanatthaṃ. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – susima, maggo vā phalaṃ vā na samādhinissando, na samādhiānisaṃso, na samādhissa nipphatti, vipassanāya paneso nissando, vipassanāya ānisaṃso, vipassanāya nipphatti, tasmā jāneyyāsi vā tvaṃ, na vā tvaṃ jāneyyāsi, atha kho dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ pubbe, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇanti.
这时,世尊了知他已具备证悟的能力,便开示三转法轮的法,问道:“殊希摩,汝意云何?色是常还是无常?”等等。在那番开示结束时,殊希摩长老便证得了阿拉汉果。接着,世尊为进一步勘问他,又说道:“殊希摩,‘以生为缘而有老死’,你看到这一层了吗?”等等。那么,为何又重提“殊希摩,而汝……”这句话呢?这是为了显明那些审察型、纯观型比丘们的境界。此处的用意是:殊希摩,不仅你一人是审察者、纯观者,这些比丘也都是如此。其余内容,各处文句皆已显了易懂。第十经。显示巴利原文
Idānissa paṭivedhabhabbataṃ ñatvā teparivaṭṭaṃ dhammadesanaṃ desento taṃ kiṃ maññasi, susima? Rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vātiādimāha? Te parivaṭṭadesanāvasāne pana thero arahattaṃ patto. Idānissa anuyogaṃ āropento jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti, susima, passasītiādimāha. Api pana tvaṃ, susimāti idaṃ kasmā ārabhi? Nijjhānakānaṃ sukkhavipassakabhikkhūnaṃ pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – na kevalaṃ tvameva nijjhānako sukkhavipassako, etepi bhikkhū evarūpāyevāti. Sesaṃ sabbattha pākaṭamevāti. Dasamaṃ.
第八 沙门婆罗门品。显示巴利原文
8. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavaggo
1. 对《老死经》等的注释。显示巴利原文
1. Jarāmaraṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
71-72 71-72. 在《沙门婆罗门品》中,针对老死等每一词各立一经,共宣说了十一部经,其义皆已显了。显示巴利原文
71-72. Samaṇabrāhmaṇavagge jarāmaraṇādīsu ekekapadavasena ekekaṃ katvā ekādasa suttāni vuttāni, tāni uttānatthānevāti.
第九 中间省略。显示巴利原文
9. Antarapeyyālaṃ
1. 师经等的注释。显示巴利原文
1. Satthusuttādivaṇṇanā
73 73. 从此以后,有名为十二中间略说品者,以“应寻求师”等方法而展开。所有这些都是随应那些以种种方式得以觉悟的应化众生之意乐而说。其中,“师”:无论是佛陀还是声闻,凡是依止他而获得道智的,就称为“师”,这样的师应当去寻求。“应行学”:三种学都应当修习。在“瑜伽”等词中,“瑜伽”指精勤努力;“欲”指想要行善的善法欲;“精勤”指堪能承受一切的最上精进;“不退”即不退转;“热忱”即能烧尽烦恼的精进本身;“不断”指持续不断的修习;“念”是以老死等为所缘而把握四圣谛的念;“正知”即那样的智慧;“不放逸”指在修习圣谛上的不放逸。其余各处,皆显而易见。显示巴利原文
73. Ito paraṃ ‘‘satthā pariyesitabbo’’tiādinayappavattā dvādasa antarapeyyālavaggā nāma honti. Te sabbepi tathā tathā bujjhanakānaṃ veneyyapuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttā. Tattha satthāti buddho vā hotu sāvako vā, yaṃ nissāya maggañāṇaṃ labhati, ayaṃ satthā nāma, so pariyesitabbo. Sikkhā karaṇīyāti tividhāpi sikkhā kātabbā. Yogādīsu yogoti payogo. Chandoti kattukamyatākusalacchando. Ussoḷhīti sabbasahaṃ adhimattavīriyaṃ. Appaṭivānīti anivattanā. Ātappanti kilesatāpanavīriyameva. Sātaccanti satatakiriyaṃ. Satīti jarāmaraṇādivasena catusaccapariggāhikā sati. Sampajaññanti tādisameva ñāṇaṃ. Appamādoti saccabhāvanāya appamādo. Sesaṃ sabbattha uttānamevāti.